ET 200S Fail-Safe Motor Starters

Important information, Contents Product overview Brief instructions Installation
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
SIMATIC ET 200S Motor starters Fail-safe motor starters Safety integrated SIGUARD system
Manual
Commissioning and diagnostics General technical specifications Terminal modules PM-D power module Direct and soft starters Reversing starters Safety integrated SIGUARD system Expansion modules Fail-safe modules Appendix Order numbers Dimensional drawings
A B C
This document is part of the documentation package 6ES7151-1AA10-8BA0
Applications Glossary, Index
Release 06/2004
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Safety guidelines
This manual contains notices which you should observe to ensure your own personal safety, as well as to protect the product and connected equipment. These notices are highlighted in the manual by a warning triangle and are marked as follows according to the level of danger:
Safety note
Contains important information for the acceptance test and the safety-related use of the product.
Danger
Indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage will result if proper precautions are not taken.
Warning
Indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
Warning
Indicates that minor personal injury or property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
Caution
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
Important
Draws your attention to particularly important information on the product, handling the product, or to a particular part of the documentation.
Qualified personnel
Only qualified personnel should be allowed to install and work on this equipment. Qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission, to ground, and to tag circuits, equipment, and systems in accordance with established safety practices and standards.
Correct usage
Note the following:
Warning
This device and its components may only be used for the applications described in the catalogue or the technical descriptions, and only in connection with devices or components from other manufacturers which have been approved or recommended by Siemens. This product can only function correctly and safely if it is transported, stored, set up, and installed correctly, and operated and maintained as recommended.
Brands
SIMATIC, SIMATIC HMI and SIMATIC NET are brands of SIEMENS AG. Some other designations used in these documents are also brands; the owner's rights may be violated if they are used by third parties for their own purposes.
Copyright Siemens AG 2004 All rights reserved The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its contents is not permitted without express written authority. Offenders will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or design, are reserved.
Disclaimer of liability We have checked this manual to ensure that its contents are correct and applicable in relation to the hardware and software it describes. Despite all our endeavors, however, discrepancies cannot be wholly excluded and so we cannot guarantee complete correctness and applicability. However, the data in this manual are reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections included in subsequent editions. Suggestions for improvement are welcomed.
Technical Assistance: Telephone: +49 (0) 911-895-5900 (8 - 17 CET) Fax: +49 (0) 911-895-5907 E-mail: [email protected] Internet: www.siemens.de/lowvoltage/technical-assistance Technical Support: Telephone: +49 (0) 180 50 50 222
Siemens AG 2004
Technical data subject to change without notice. Siemens AG Bereich Automatisierungs- und Antriebstechnik Geschftsgebiet Niederspannungs-Schalttechnik 90327 Nrnberg Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
Important information
Purpose of the manual
This manual is an addition to the following manuals:

ET 200S Distributed I/O System IM 151/CPU Interface Module ET 200S Process-Related Functions ET 200S Positioning ET 200S Serial Interface Module ET 200S Distributed I/O System, Fail-Safe Modules Safety Engineering in SIMATIC S7, System Description S7 Distributed Safety Configuration and Programming ET 200S FC frequency converter operating manual ET 200S FC frequency converter list manual (in preparation)
This manual describes all the functions of the ET 200S motor starters. The manual does not deal with general ET 200S functions. You can find descriptions of these in the SIMATIC ET 200S Distributed I/O System manual.
Target group
This manual describes the hardware of the ET 200S motor starters and failsafe motor starters, and the safety integrated SIGUARD system. It is aimed at configuration engineers, commissioning engineers and maintenance personnel.
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Documentation packets and manuals
The following listing shows a summary of the documentation packets and manuals (see Chapter A.6):
ET 200S Distributed I/O System SIMATIC ET 200S Motor Starters Fail-Safe Motor Starters Safety Integrated SIGUARD System 6ES7151-1AA10-8xA0 1) 2) Interface Module IM 151-7 CPU
6ES7151-1AB00-8xA0 1)
Installing and wiring motor starters Commissioning and diagnostics of motor starters Technical specifications of motor starters Fail-safe motor starters Safety integrated SIGUARD system Order numbers for motor starters ET 200S FC frequency converter ET 200S FC frequency converter Operating manual List manual 6SL3298-0CA12-0xP0 1)
Installing and wiring the ET 200S Commissioning and diagnostics of the ET 200S Technical data from IM 1511, digital and analog electronic modules Order numbers for ET 200S
Addressing of IM 151-7 CPU ET 200S with IM 151-7 CPU in a PROFIBUS network Commissioning and diagnostics of the IM 151-7 CPU Technical data for the IM 151-7 CPU
ET 200S Positioning 6ES7151-1AD00-8xA0 1)
Installation Commissioning Control processes Protection and monitoring functions Technical specifications ET 200S Process-Related Functions 6ES7151-1AC00-8xA0 1)
Parameter list Function charts Alarm, error messages
1STEP 5V/204 kHz 1POS INC/Digital 1POS SSI/Digital 1POS INC/Analog 1POS SSI/Analog ET 200S Serial Interface Module 6ES7151-1AE00-8xA0 1)
Automation systems S7-300, Operations list 6ES7398-8AA10-8xN0 1)

1)
2)
1COUNT 24V/100kHz IM 151-7 CPU 1SI 3964/ASCII 1COUNT 5V/500kHz 1SI MODBUS/USS 1SSI 2PULSE x = The documentation packet or manuals can be ordered for the following languages: A = German, B = English The languages French, Spanish and Italian are also available through the Internet. The documentation package also includes: - The "PROFINET" system description; - The programming manual, "From PROFINET DP to PROFINET IO".
ii
Note The "ET 200S Decentralized Peripheral System" manual is also located in the "ET 200S FC Frequency Converter" manual. The failsafe modules are described in the "ET 200S Decentralized Peripheral System Failsafe Modules" manual. This and other manuals related to failsafe systems can be downloaded from the Internet.
Scope of validity
This manual is valid for ET 200S motor starters. It contains a description of the components that were valid at the time the manual was published. We reserve the right to enclose a product information document containing upto-date information about new components and new versions of components.
What's new?
In comparison to edition 11/2003 the current edition has the following changes:
Subject Chapters 2 to 11 are all moved one number up. Section 2-11 to 3-12 2 2 separate manuals 8, 9, 10, 12, C 6.3.4, 6.3.8 3.2
Brief instructions for commissioning motor starters. Frequency converter for ET 200S in preparation. Information for EMC protective circuits Contact prevention in terminal area of L1 - L3, T1 - T3, N and PE of the terminal modules for the motor starter Installation rules, station width to 2 m
iii
Certification
The product series in the ET 200S distributed I/O system - motor starters, fail-safe motor starters, and safety integrated SIGUARD system corresponds to the following rule specifications:
EU directive 73/23/EEC on low voltage EU directive (89/336/EEC) on electromagnetic compatibility Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.: UL 508 registered (Industrial Control Equipment) Canadian Standards Association: CSA C22.2 Number 142, tested (Process Control Equipment)
Standards, certificates and approvals
The ET 200S distributed I/O system is based on IEC 61158/EN 50170, Volume 2, PROFIBUS. The ET 200S distributed I/O device fulfills the requirements and criteria of IEC 61131, Part 2 and the requirements for obtaining the CE marking. ET 200S has CSA and UL approval. You will find detailed information on the relevant standards, certificates, and approvals in Section 7.1 of the SIMATIC ET 200S Distributed I/O System manual.
Disclaimer of liability
The products described in this manual were developed to discharge safetyoriented functions as part of a higher-order system or machine. A complete safety system generally comprises sensors, analyzers, signaling devices and concepts for safe shutdowns. The manufacturer of the system or machine is responsible for ensuring correct overall functioning. Siemens AG, its subsidiaries and its affiliated companies (hereinafter designated Siemens) are not in a position to guarantee all features of a higher-order system or machine not designed by Siemens. Siemens also refuses to accept liability for recommendations, express or implicit, in the subsequent description. No warranty, guarantee or liability claims above and beyond the General Terms and Conditions of Supply and Sale of Siemens can be derived from the subsequent description.
iv
Position in the information landscape
As well as this manual, you will need the manual for the DP master you are using.
Note You will find a list of the contents of the SIMATIC ET 200S manuals in Section 1.4 of this manual. We recommend that you begin by reading this section so as to find out which parts of which manuals are most relevant to you in helping you to do what you want to do.
Aids to accessing information
You can find specific information in the manual quickly by using the following aids:
There is a list of contents at the front of the manual. Each chapter contains subheadings that provide you with an overview of the contents of the relevant sections. Following the appendices you will find a glossary, in which important technical terms used in the manual are defined. At the end of the manual you will find a detailed index, which makes it easy for you to find the information you are looking for.
Constantly updated information
Should you have any queries regarding motor starters, please get in touch with the point of contact in your region responsible for low-voltage switchgear/controlgear with communication capability. You can obtain a list of the points of contact, along with the latest release of the manual, at the following Internet address: http://www.siemens.de/siriusnet
vi
Contents
1 1.1 1.1.1 1.1.2 1.1.3 1.1.4 1.1.5 1.1.6 1.1.7 1.2 1.3 1.4 2 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.4.1 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 2.9.1 2.10 3 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.4.1 3.4.2 3.4.3 3.4.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.7.1 3.7.2 3.8 Product overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Components up to 5.5 kW and 45/90 mm installation width for standard motor starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Components up to 7.5 kW and 65/130 mm installation width for high feature motor starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fail-safe components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Components required for the safety integrated SIGUARD system Components of the expansion modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . Components for frequency converter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ET 200S configuration options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maximum number of modules that can be connected/maximum configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Guide to the ET 200S manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 1-2 1-2 1-4 1-6 1-8 1-10 1-12 1-12 1-13 1-18 1-20 2-1 2-2 2-3 2-4 2-4 2-6 2-7 2-8 2-9 2-10 2-11 2-12 2-13 3-1 3-2 3-3 3-5 3-6 3-6 3-6 3-7 3-8 3-13 3-16 3-18 3-18 3-24 3-31
. . . . . .
Short instructions for commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction and target of example . . ET 200S components. . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit of the sample layout . . . . . Wiring and fitting . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . Integration into the user program . . Switch on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic options . . . . . . . . . . Diagnosis with HW Config by STEP7 Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Slot rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation measurements and clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . Derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What is derating?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Derating factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DM-V15 spacing module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Criteria for configurations with/without DM-V15 spacing modules Installing terminal modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inserting power modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing and removing motor starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard motor starter with installation width of 45 or 90 mm . . High feature/fail-safe motor starters with an installation width of 65 or 130 mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inserting the terminating module, terminating cover and caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . .
vii
4 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.8.1 4.8.2 4.9 4.9.1 4.9.2 4.9.3 4.9.4 4.9.5 4.9.6 4.9.7 4.9.8 4.9.9 4.9.10 4.9.11 4.9.12 4.10 4.10.1 4.10.2 4.10.3 4.11 5 5.1 5.2 6 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.3.1 6.3.2 6.3.3 6.3.4 6.3.5 6.3.6 6.3.7 6.3.8 6.4
Commissioning and diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2DI control module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2DI COM control module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2DI LC COM control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics and monitoring through the user program . . . . . . . . . Diagnosis by LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnosis of the PM-D power module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnosis of the PM-D F1 power module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnosis of the PM-D F2 power module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnosis of the PM-D F3 power module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnosis of the PM-D F4 power module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnosis of the PM-D F5 power module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnosis of the PM-X connection module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnosis of the PM-D F X1 fail-safe power/expansion module . . . . . Diagnosis of the fail-safe F-CM contact replicator. . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnosis of the standard DS, DS-x, DS1-x, RS, RS-x and RS1-x motor starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnosis of the high feature DS1e-x, RS1e-x and DSS1e-x motor starters Fail-safe F-DS1e-x and F-RS1e-x motor starters Diagnosis of xB3, xB4 brake control modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . Process image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Process image of the standard DS, DS-x, DS1-x, RS, RS-x, and RS1-x motor starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Process image of the high feature DS1e-x, RS1e-x, and DSS1e-x motor starters Fail-safe F-DS1e-x and F-RS1e-x motor starters Process image of xB3 and xB4 brake control modules . . . . . . . . . Switch ES Motor Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shipping and storage conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mechanical and climatic environmental conditions . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of the terminal modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TM-P15 S27-01 terminal module for PM-D power module . . . . . . . Terminal modules for motor starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TM-DS45 terminal modules for standard DS, DS-x and DS1-x direct starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TM-DS65 terminal modules for the high feature DS1e-x direct starter and the high feature DSS1e-x direct soft starter . . . . . . . . . . . . TM-FDS65 terminal modules for fail-safe F-DS1e-x direct starters . . . Technical specifications, TM-DS45 and TM-DS65/TM-FDS65 . . . . . . TM-RS90 terminal modules for RS, RS-x, RS1-x standard reversing starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TM-RS130 terminal modules for RS1e-x high feature reversing starter . TM-FRS130 terminal modules for fail-safe F-RS1e-x reversing starters . Technical specifications - TM-RS90 and TM-RS130/TM-FRS130 . . . . Power bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1 4-2 4-6 4-7 4-8 4-11 4-12 4-13 4-19 4-19 4-23 4-23 4-23 4-24 4-25 4-26 4-27 4-28 4-28 4-29 4-30 4-31 4-32 4-35 4-36 4-36 4-37 4-40 4-41 5-1 5-1 5-2 6-1 6-2 6-4 6-6 6-6 6-7 6-8 6-9 6-10 6-11 6-12 6-13 6-14
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
viii
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
7 7.1 7.1.1 7.1.2 8 8.1 8.2 8.2.1 8.2.2 8.2.3 8.3 8.3.1 8.3.2 8.3.3 8.3.4 8.3.5 8.4 8.4.1 8.4.2 8.4.3 8.4.4 8.4.5 8.4.6 8.5 8.5.1 8.5.2 8.5.3 8.5.4 8.5.5 8.6 9 9.1 9.2 9.2.1 9.2.2 9.2.3 9.3 9.3.1 9.3.2 9.3.3 9.3.4 9.3.5
PM-D power module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PM-D power module for motor starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical specifications - PM-D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct starters and soft starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard direct starters DS, DS-x, DS1-x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High feature DS1e-x direct starter Fail-safe F-DS1e-x direct starter . Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Additional features of the F-DS1e-x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High feature direct soft starter DSS1e-x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Physical principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Application and use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notes on configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description of fixed values and parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . Permanently set values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Actual motor current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User-definable parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emergency start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trip Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Factory setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1 7-2 7-3 7-4 8-1 8-2 8-4 8-4 8-7 8-8 8-11 8-11 8-14 8-19 8-20 8-22 8-26 8-26 8-30 8-31 8-38 8-41 8-43 8-45 8-45 8-47 8-48 8-55 8-55 8-56 9-1 9-2 9-4 9-4 9-7 9-8 9-11 9-11 9-14 9-19 9-20 9-22
Reversing starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard reversing starters RS, RS-x, RS1-x . Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . High feature RS1e-x reversing starter Fail-safe Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Additional features of the F-RS1e-x . . . . . . Module replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-RS1e-x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . reversing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ix
10 10.1 10.2 10.2.1 10.2.2 10.2.3 10.2.4 10.2.5 10.2.6 10.2.7 10.3 10.3.1 10.3.2 10.3.3 10.4 10.5 10.6 10.6.1 10.6.2 10.6.3
Safety integrated SIGUARD system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-1 10-2 10-4 10-4 10-5 10-5 10-6 10-7 10-9 10-10 10-13 10-15 10-16 10-19 10-20 10-21 10-25 10-26 10-28 10-30 10-32 10-34 10-36 10-38 10-40 10-42 10-44 10-46 10-48 10-50 10-52 10-54 10-56 10-58
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal modules TM-PF30 S47 and TM-X15 S27-01 . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of the terminal modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View of the TM-PF30 S47 terminal modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical specifications of the TM-PF30 S47 terminal modules . . . . TM-X15 S27-01 terminal module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power modules PM-D F1 to 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electrical configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical specifications - PM-D F1 to 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection module PM-X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ET 200S with safety integrated SIGUARD system . . . . . . . . . . . Safety integrated system configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety circuit with integrated SIGUARD combination . . . . . . . . . . Two safety circuits with integrated SIGUARD combinations . . . . . . Two cascaded safety circuits with integrated SIGUARD combinations (potential group, potential subgroup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.6.4 Three cascaded safety circuits with integrated SIGUARD combinations (potential group, potential subgroup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.6.5 Safety circuit with an external SIGUARD combination 3TK2824, category 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.6.6 Safety circuit with an external SIGUARD combination 3TK2823 . . . . 10.6.7 Safety circuit incorporating pneumatic valves. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.6.8 Safety circuit incorporating external actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.6.9 Emergency stop combined with protective door . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.6.10Emergency stop combined with 2 cascaded protective-door circuits . . 10.6.11 Emergency stop circuit with cascaded delay category 2 . . . . . . . . 10.6.12Emergency stop circuit with cascaded delay category 3 or 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.6.13One emergency stop circuit for two or more ET 200S rails . . . . . . . 10.6.14Two emergency-stop circuits, three shutdown groups . . . . . . . . . 10.6.15Floating connection between an ET 200S safety circuit and autonomous safety circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.6.16DSS1e-x high feature direct soft starters up to safety category 4. . . . 10.6.17ET 200S SIGUARD with AS-i Safety at work . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
11 11.1 11.2 11.2.1 11.3 11.3.1 11.3.2 11.3.3 11.3.4 11.3.5 11.3.6 11.3.7 11.3.8 12 12.1 12.1.1 12.2 12.2.1 12.2.2 12.2.3 12.3 12.3.1 12.3.2 12.3.3 12.4 12.4.1 12.4.2 12.4.3 12.5 12.5.1 12.5.2 12.5.3 12.5.4 12.5.5 12.5.6 12.5.7 12.5.8 12.5.9
Expansion modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of expansion modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TM-xB15 S24-01 and TM-xB215 S24-01 terminal modules . Assignment of the terminal modules . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake control module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TM-xB15 S24-01, TM-xB215 S24-01 terminal modules . . . Signal response of xB3 and xB4 brake control modules and DS1-x, DS1e-x, and F-DS1e-x motor starters . . . . . . . . Signal response of xB3 and xB4 brake control modules and RS1-x, RS1e-x, and F-RS1e-x motor starters . . . . . . . . Externally powered brake xB1, xB3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internally powered brake xB2, xB4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing the brake control module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-1 11-2 11-3 11-3 11-4 11-4 11-11 11-13 11-15 11-17 11-20 11-24 11-26 12-1 12-2 12-3 12-4 12-4 12-5 12-7 12-9 12-10 12-11 12-14 12-16 12-17 12-18 12-21 12-23 12-24 12-26 12-28 12-30 12-32 12-34 12-36 12-38 12-40
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fail-safe modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal modules TM-PFX30 S47 and TM-FCM30-S47 . . . . . . . . . Assignment of the terminal modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal modules TM-PFX30 S47 for the PM-D F X1 power/expansion module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal module TM-FCM30-S47 for the F-CM contact replicator . . . Power/expansion module PM-D F X1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electrical configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical specifications - PM-D F X1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-CM contact replicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electrical configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical specifications - F-CM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Examples with fail-safe modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example with PM-D F PROFIsafe and 4 emergency stop circuits. . . . Example with the PM-D F X1 power/expansion module and external safety combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example with PM-D F PROFIsafe and several stations . . . . . . . . . Example with PM-D F PROFIsafe and contact replicator . . . . . . . . Example with PM-D F X1 power module and contact replicator . . . . ET 200S fail-safe motor starter with AS-i Safety at work . . . . . . . . Example with the PM-D F X1 power/expansion module and external safety combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ET 200S fail-safe motor starter and PM-D F X1 with central safety PLC Distributed selective detection of safety signals . . . . . . . . . . . .
xi
A A.1 A.1.1 A.1.2 A.1.3 A.1.4 A.1.5 A.2 A.3 A.4 A.5 A.6 B B.1 B.1.1 B.1.2 B.1.3 B.1.4 B.2 B.2.1 B.2.2
Order numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ET 200S standard direct starters DS, DS-x and DS1-x . . . . . . . ET 200S standard reversing starters, RS, RS-x and RS1-x . . . . . ET 200S starters high feature with electronic overload protection (DS1e-x, DSS1e-x, RS1e-x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ET 200S high feature motor starter for Switch ES . . . . . . . . . ET 200S fail-safe motor starter with electronic overload protection (F-DS1e-x, F-RS1e-x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Components for the ET 200S motor starters . . . . . . . . . . . . Components for the safety integrated SIGUARD system . . . . . . Components for expansion modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fail-safe components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ET 200S Distributed I/O System Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-1 A-2 A-2 A-3 A-4 A-4 A-4 A-5 A-8 A-9 A-9 A-10 B-1 B-2 B-2 B-3 B-4 B-5 B-6 B-6
Dimensional drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DS, DS-x, DS1-x standard direct starters and TM-DS45 terminal module High feature DS1e-x direct starter, High feature DSS1e-x direct soft starter and TM-DS65 terminal module Fail-safe F-DS1e-x direct starter and TM-FDS65 terminal module . . . . RS, RS-x, RS1-x standard reversing starters and TM-RS90 terminal module RS1e-x high feature reversing starter and TM-RS130 terminal module F-RS1e-x fail-safe reversing starter and TM-FRS130 terminal module . . Power modules, connection module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PM-D power module and TM-P15 S27-01 terminal module . . . . . . . PM-D F1 to 5 power modules and terminal modules TM-PF30 S47-B0/-B1/-C0/-C1/-D0 PM-D F PROFIsafe power module and TM-PF30 S47-F1 terminal module PM-D F X1 power/expansion module and TM-PFX30 S47-G0/-G1 terminal modules F-CM contact replicator and TM-FCM30 S47-E0 terminal module. . . . PM-X connection module and TM-X15 S27-01 terminal module . . . . DM-V15 spacing module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expansion modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xB1 to 4 brake control modules and TM-xB15 S24-01, TM-xB215 S24-01 terminal modules . . . . . . . . .
B.2.3 B.3 B.4 B.4.1
B-7 B-8 B-8 B-9 B-9
xii
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
C C.1 C.1.1
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . . . . .
C-1 C-2 C-2 C-4 C-6 C-8 C-10 C-12 C-14 C-14 C-16 Gl-1
Examples with brake control modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example with 2 directions of rotation and limit-switch operation without brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.1.2 Example with 2 directions of rotation, 2 speeds and 24 V brake with external power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.1.3 Example with 2 directions of rotation, 2 speeds and 400 V brake with internal power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.1.4 Example with frequency converter and 400 V brake with internal power supply and delayed EMERGENCY STOP shutdown, category C.1.5 Example of lifting platform - up with motor, down with valve . . . . C.1.6 Example of lifting platform - up and down with brake motor . . . . C.2 Examples with reversible motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.2.1 Example with 2 directions of rotation and 2 speeds with one Dahlander winding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.2.2 Example with 2 directions of rotation and 3 speeds with two Dahlander windings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . .
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Index-1
xiii
Figures
Figure 1-1: Figure 1-2: Figure 1-3: Figure 1-4: Figure 1-5: Figure 1-6: Figure 2-1: Figure 2-2: Figure 2-3: Figure 2-4: Figure 2-5: Figure 3-1: Figure 3-2: Figure 3-3: Figure 3-4: Figure 3-5: Figure 3-6: Figure 3-7: Figure 3-8: Figure 3-9: Figure 3-10: Figure 4-1: Figure 4-2: Figure 4-3: Figure 4-4: Figure 4-5: Figure 4-6: Figure 4-7: Figure 6-1: Figure 6-2: Figure 6-3: Figure 6-4: Figure 6-5: Figure 6-6: ET 200S with motor starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ET 200S with motor starters and electronic modules . . . . . . . . ET 200S with motor starters and safety integrated SIGUARD system up to category 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ET 200S with fail-safe motor starters up to category 4/SIL3 . . . . ET 200S with fail-safe motor starters and fail-safe electronic modules up to category 4/SIL3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Potential groups and load groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Components and design for the example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set PROFIBUS address 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit for the example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assemblies in the HW Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View in DP-Slave Diagnosis status window . . . . . . . . . . . . DM-V15 spacing module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Criteria for vertical installation on horizontal rails with DS, DS-x, DS1-x Criteria for horizontal installation on vertical rails with DS, DS-x, DS1-x Criteria for vertical installation on horizontal rails with F-DS1e-x, F-RS1e-x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration example for derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Determining the derating for a configuration example . . . . . . . Mechanical coding of terminal modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inserting power modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the safety group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inserting the terminating module, terminating cover and caps . . . Current setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overload tripping test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preventing unauthorized persons from switching on . . . . . . . . Lock in the terminal module preventing unauthorized persons from switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring diagram for control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sketched wiring diagram, 2DI control module . . . . . . . . . . . . 2DI LC COM control module wiring diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . TM-DS45 terminal modules for standard DS, DS-x and DS1-x direct starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TM-DS65 terminal modules for DS1e-x high feature direct starter and DSS1e-x soft starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TM-FDS65 terminal modules for fail-safe F-DS1e-x direct starters . TM-RS90 terminal modules for RS, RS-x, RS1-x standard reversing starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TM-RS130 terminal modules for RS1e-x high feature reversing starter TM-FRS130 terminal modules for fail-safe F-RS1e-x reversing starters 1-13 1-14 1-14 1-16 1-16 1-17 2-4 2-5 2-6 2-8 2-12 3-7 3-8 3-9 3-10 3-11 3-11 3-17 3-17 3-24 3-32 4-2 4-3 4-5 4-5 4-7 4-9 4-12 6-6 6-7 6-8 6-10 6-11 6-12
xiv
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Figure 6-7: Figure 6-8: Figure 6-9: Figure 7-1: Figure 8-1: Figure 8-2: Figure 8-3: Figure 8-4: Figure 8-5: Figure 8-6: Figure 8-7: Figure 8-8: Figure 8-9: Figure 8-10: Figure 8-11: Figure 8-12: Figure 8-13: Figure 8-14: Figure 8-15: Figure 8-16: Figure 8-17: Figure 8-18: Figure 8-19: Figure 8-20: Figure 9-1: Figure 9-2: Figure 9-3: Figure 9-4: Figure 9-5: Figure 9-6: Figure 10-1: Figure 10-2: Figure 10-3: Figure 10-4: Figure 10-5: Figure 10-6: Figure 10-7:
TM-DS45 terminal block - example for DS, DS-x, DS1-x standard direct starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14 PE/N terminal block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 Current flow in the power bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16 Power module PM-D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Standard DS, DS-x and DS1-x direct starters . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 Sketched circuit diagram - DS, DS-x, DS1-x standard direct starters 8-6 High feature DS1e-x direct starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 Sketched circuit diagram of high feature DS1e-x direct starter . . . 8-13 Fail-safe F-DS1e-x direct starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17 Sketched circuit diagram of the fail-safe F-DS1e-x direct starter . . 8-18 Typical current and torque curve of a three-phase asynchronous motor 8-26 Current and torque curves for star-delta starting . . . . . . . . . . 8-27 Phase firing of the supply voltage by semiconductor elements in the DSS1e-x soft starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28 Current and torque curves for a soft starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29 High feature direct soft starter DSS1e-x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32 Sketched circuit diagram - high feature direct soft starter DSS1e-x . 8-33 Time ramp/timing diagram, DSS1e-x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35 Cyclic duration factor CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36 Load and motor torques and motor terminal voltage for operation with soft starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39 Reductions as a function of site altitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40 Principle of anti-blocking function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46 Tripping class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49 Idle time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50 Factory setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-57 RS, RS-x, RS1-x standard reversing starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Sketched circuit diagram - RS, RS-x, RS1-x standard reversing starters 9-6 High feature RS1e-x reversing starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12 Sketched circuit diagram - high feature RS1e-x reversing starter . . 9-13 Fail-safe F-RS1e-x reversing starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17 Sketched circuit diagram of the fail-safe F-RS1e-x reversing starter 9-18 External wiring of the SIGUARD EMERGENCY STOP circuit (category 4) EN 954-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 View of the TM-PF30 S47 terminal modules . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 TM-X15 S27-01 terminal module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10 Views of the SIGUARD PM-D F1 to 5 power modules . . . . . . . 10-14 Basic circuit diagram of the SIGUARD PM-D F1, F2 power modules with TM-PF30 S47-B1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16 Basic circuit diagram of the SIGUARD PM-D F3, F4 power modules with TM-PF30 S47-C1 or C0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17 Block circuit diagram of the SIGUARD PM-D F5 power module . . 10-18
xv
Figure 10-8: Figure 10-9: Figure 10-10: Figure 10-11: Figure 10-12: Figure 10-13: Figure 10-14: Figure 10-15: Figure 10-16: Figure 10-17: Figure 10-18: Figure 10-19: Figure 10-20: Figure 10-21: Figure 10-22: Figure 10-23: Figure 10-24: Figure 10-25: Figure 10-26: Figure 11-1: Figure 11-2: Figure 11-3: Figure 11-4: Figure 11-5: Figure 11-6: Figure 12-1: Figure 12-2: Figure 12-3: Figure 12-4: Figure 12-5: Figure 12-6: Figure 12-7: Figure 12-8: Figure 12-9:
PM-X connection module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit diagram for SIGUARD emergency stop circuit . . . . . . . . Safety circuit with integrated SIGUARD combination . . . . . . . . Two safety circuits with integrated SIGUARD combinations . . . . Two cascaded safety circuits with integrated SIGUARD combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Three cascaded safety circuits with integrated SIGUARD combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety circuit with an external SIGUARD combination 3TK2824, category 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety circuit with an external SIGUARD combination 3TK2823, category 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety circuit incorporating pneumatic valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety circuit incorporating external actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . Emergency stop combined with protective door . . . . . . . . . . Emergency stop combined with 2 cascaded protective-door circuits Emergency stop circuit with cascaded delay category 2 . . . . . . Emergency stop circuit with cascaded delay category 3 or 4 . . . . One emergency stop circuit for two or more ET 200S rails . . . . . Two emergency-stop circuits, three shutdown groups . . . . . . . Floating connection between an ET 200S safety circuit and autonomous safety circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DSS1e-x high feature direct soft starters up to safety category 4 . . ET 200S SIGUARD with AS-i Safety at work . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake control modules xB1 to 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration with brake control module and spacing module . . . Sketched circuit diagram of externally powered brake . . . . . . . Sketched circuit diagram of internally powered brake . . . . . . . . Mechanical coding of terminal modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PM-D F X1 power/expansion module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block diagram for the PM-D F X1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-CM contact replicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block diagram for the F-CM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example with PM-D F PROFIsafe and 4 emergency stop circuits up to category 4/SIL3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example with the PM-D F X1 power/expansion module and external safety combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example with PM-D F PROFIsafe and several stations up to category 4/SIL3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example with PM-D F PROFIsafe and contact replicator up to category 4/SIL3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example with PM-D F X1 power module and contact replicator up to category 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-20 10-21 10-26 10-28 10-30 10-32 10-34 10-36 10-38 10-40 10-42 10-44 10-46 10-48 10-50 10-52 10-54 10-56 10-58 11-5 11-7 11-10 11-17 11-21 11-25 12-9 12-11 12-16 12-18 12-24 12-26 12-28 12-30 12-32
xvi
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Figure 12-10: Example with PM-D F X1 power module and AS-i Safety at work up to category 4/SIL3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 12-11: Example with the PM-D F X1 power/expansion module and external safety combinations up to category 4/SIL3 . . . . . . . . . Figure 12-12: ET 200S fail-safe motor starters and PM-D F X1 with central safety PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 12-13: Distributed selective detection of safety signals . . . . . . . . . . Figure A-1: Removing coding elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure C-1: Example with 2 directions of rotation and limit-switch operation without brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure C-2: Example with 2 directions of rotation, 2 speeds and 24 V brake with external power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure C-3: Example with 2 directions of rotation, 2 speeds and 400 V brake with internal power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure C-4: Example with frequency converter and 400 V brake with internal power supply and delayed EMERGENCY STOP shutdown, category 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure C-5: Example of lifting platform - up with motor, down with valve . . . . Figure C-6: Example of lifting platform - up and down with brake motor . . . . Figure C-7: Example with 2 directions of rotation and 2 speeds with one Dahlander winding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure C-8: Example with 2 directions of rotation and 3 speeds with 2 Dahlander windings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-34 12-36 12-38 12-40 A-3 C-2 C-4 C-6
C-8 C-10 C-12 C-14 C-16
xvii
Tables
Table 1-1: Table 1-2: Table 1-3: Table 1-4: Table 1-5: Table 1-6: Table 1-7: Table 1-8: Table 2-1: Table 2-2: Table 3-1: Table 3-2: Table 3-3: Table 3-4: Table 3-5: Table 3-6: Table 3-7: Table 3-8: Table 3-9: Table 3-10: Table 3-11: Table 4-1: Table 4-2: Table 4-3: Table 4-4: Table 4-5: Table 4-6: Table 4-7: Table 4-8: Table 4-9: Table 4-10: General components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Components for standard motor starters up to 5.5 kW and 45/90 mm installation width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Components for high feature motor starters up to 7.5 kW and 65/130 mm installation widths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fail-safe components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Components of the SIGUARD emergency stop circuit . . . . . . . Components of the expansion modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameter length of the modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maximum current-carrying capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Components for the example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration table in HW Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Slot rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation position and station width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation measurements and clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing terminal modules - standard direct starter: example . . Removing terminal modules - standard direct starter: example . Installing a standard motor starter with installation width of 45 or 90 mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing a standard motor starter with an installation width of 45 or 90 mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electrical connections during installation/removal of the standard motor starter (45 or 90 mm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing a high feature/fail-safe motor starter with an installation width of 65 or 130 mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deinstalling a high feature/fail-safe motor starter with an installation width of 65 or 130 mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electrical connections during installation/removal of a high feature/fail-safe motor starter (65 mm or 130 mm) . . . . . . Signal states, control module 2DI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical specifications, 2DI control module . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring motor starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power module fault types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expansion module fault types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fault types for motor starters up to 5.5 kW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fault types for motor starters up to 7.5 kW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED status and error displays on the PM-D power module . . . . LED status and error displays on the SIGUARD PM-D F1 power module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED status and error displays on the SIGUARD PM-D F2 power module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 1-4 1-6 1-8 1-10 1-12 1-18 1-19 2-3 2-8 3-2 3-4 3-5 3-13 3-15 3-18 3-20 3-22 3-25 3-27 3-29 4-8 4-10 4-13 4-19 4-20 4-20 4-21 4-23 4-24 4-25
xviii
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Table 4-11: Table 4-12: Table 4-13: Table 4-14: Table 4-15: Table 4-16: Table 4-17: Table 4-18: Table 4-19: Table 4-20: Table 4-21: Table 6-1: Table 6-2: Table 6-3: Table 6-4: Table 6-5: Table 6-6: Table 6-7: Table 7-1: Table 7-2: Table 8-1: Table 8-2: Table 8-3: Table 8-4: Table 8-5: Table 8-6: Table 8-7: Table 8-8: Table 8-9: Table 8-10: Table 8-11: Table 8-12:
LED status and error displays on the SIGUARD PM-D F3 power module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED status and error displays on the SIGUARD PM-D F4 power module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED status and error displays on the SIGUARD PM-D F5 power module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnosis of the PM-X connection module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status and error displays with LEDs on the fail-safe PM-D F X1 power/expansion module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status and error displays with LEDs on the fail-safe F-CM contact replicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED status and error displays on the standard motor starters (5.5 kW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED status and error displays for DS1e-x, RS1e-x, DSS1e-x, F-DS1e-x and F-RS1e-x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED status and error displays for F-DS1e-x and F-RS1e-x . . . . . . LED status and fault displays for xB3, xB4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of the terminal modules for power modules . . . . . . Assignment of the terminal modules for motor starters . . . . . . . Assignment of the terminal modules for fail-safe modules . . . . . Terminal assignment of the TM-P15 S27-01 terminal module for the PM-D power module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical specifications - TM-P15 S27-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical specifications - TM-DS45 and TM-DS65/TM-FDS65 . . . Technical specifications - TM-RS90 and TM-RS130/TM-FRS130 . . Parameters for the PM-D power module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical specifications - PM-D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of direct starters and soft starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters for the DS, DS-x, DS1-x standard direct starters . . . . Technical specifications - DS, DS-x, DS1-x standard direct starters Technical specifications DS... - circuit breaker, contactor, auxiliary switch block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters for the high feature DS1e-x direct starter and the fail-safe F-DS1e-x direct starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical specifications of the high feature DS1e-x direct starter and the fail-safe F-DS1e-x direct starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical specifications of the DS1e-x and F-DS1e-x starter protection switch and contactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switching frequency for DSS1e-x soft starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters for DSS1e-x high feature direct soft starter . . . . . . . Technical specifications - DSS1e-x high feature direct soft starter . Technical specifications DSS1e-x - starter protection switch, soft starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Actual motor current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-26 4-27 4-28 4-28 4-29 4-30 4-31 4-32 4-34 4-35 4-38 6-2 6-3 6-3 6-4 6-5 6-9 6-13 7-3 7-4 8-3 8-7 8-8 8-9 8-20 8-22 8-24 8-37 8-41 8-43 8-44 8-47
xix
Table 8-13: Table 9-1: Table 9-2: Table 9-3: Table 9-4: Table 9-5: Table 9-6: Table 9-7: Table 10-1: Table 10-2: Table 10-3: Table 10-4: Table 10-5: Table 10-6: Table 10-7: Table 10-8: Table 10-9: Table 10-10: Table 10-11: Table 10-12: Table 10-13: Table 10-14: Table 10-15: Table 11-1: Table 11-2: Table 11-3: Table 11-4: Table 11-5: Table 11-6: Table 11-7: Table 11-8: Table 11-9: Table 11-10: Table 11-11: Table 11-12:
Description of actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of reversing starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters for the RS, RS-x, RS1-x standard reversing starters . . Technical specifications - RS, RS-x, RS1-x standard reversing starters Technical specifications RS... - circuit breaker, contactor, auxiliary switch block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters for the high feature RS1e-x reversing starter and the fail-safe F-RS1e-x reversing starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical specifications - high feature RS1e-x reversing starter, fail-safe F-RS1e-x reversing starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical specifications of the RS1e-x and F-RS1e-x starter protection switch and contactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of the terminal modules for SIGUARD modules . . . . Terminal assignment of the TM-PF30 S47-B0 terminal module . . Terminal assignment of the TM-PF30 S47-B1 terminal module . . Terminal assignment of the TM-PF30 S47-C0 terminal module . . Terminal assignment of the TM-PF30 S47-C1 terminal module . . Terminal assignment of the TM-PF30 S47-D0 terminal module . . Technical specifications of the TM-PF30 S47 terminal modules . . Terminal assignment of the TM-X15 S27-01 terminal module for the PM-X connection module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical specifications - TM-X15 S27-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Features of the SIGUARD PM-D F1 to 5 power modules . . . . . . Parameters for SIGUARD PM-D F1 to 5 power modules . . . . . . Technical specifications - PM-D F1 to 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical specifications - PM-X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing and wiring fail-safe kit 1 - standard direct starters . . . . . Installing and wiring fail-safe kit 2 - standard reversing starters . . Overview of expansion modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of the terminal modules for expansion modules . . . Features of the brake control modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameter for brake control modules xB3, xB4 . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal assignment of the TM-xB15 S24-01, TM-xB215 S24-01 terminal module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical specifications - TM-xB15 S24-01, TM-xB215 S24-01 . . . Signal response of xB3 and xB4 brake control modules and DS1-x, DS1e-x, and F-DS1e-x motor starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Signal response of xB3 and xB4 brake control modules and RS1-x, RS1e-x, and F-RS1e-x motor starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical specifications, brake control module xB1, xB3 . . . . . . Technical specifications, brake control module xB2, xB4 . . . . . . Installing terminal module for brake control module . . . . . . . . . Connecting the brake control module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-54 9-3 9-7 9-8 9-9 9-20 9-22 9-24 10-4 10-7 10-7 10-8 10-8 10-9 10-9 10-11 10-12 10-13 10-15 10-19 10-20 10-22 10-23 11-2 11-3 11-8 11-9 11-11 11-12 11-13 11-15 11-18 11-22 11-24 11-26
xx
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Table 11-13: Table 12-1: Table 12-2: Table 12-3: Table 12-4: Table 12-5: Table 12-6: Table 12-7: Table 12-8: Table 12-9: Table 12-10:
Connecting the motor starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of the fail-safe modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of the terminal modules for fail-safe modules . . . . Terminal assignment of the TM-PFX30 S47-G0/G1 terminal modules for the PM-D F X1 power module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical specifications - TM-PFX30 S47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal assignment of the TM-FCM30-S47 terminal modules for the F-CM contact replicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical specifications - TM-FCM30-S47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters for the PM-D F X1 power/expansion module . . . . . Technical specifications - PM-D F X1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters for the F-CM contact replicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical specifications - F-CM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .
11-26 12-3 12-4 12-6 12-6 12-7 12-8 12-10 12-14 12-17 12-21
xxi
xxii
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Product overview
1
Subject Page 1-2 1-2 1-4 1-6 1-8 1-10 1-12 1-13 1-18 1-20
Section 1.1 1.1.1 1.1.2 1.1.3 1.1.4 1.1.5 1.1.6 1.2 1.3 1.4 Overview General components
Components up to 5.5 kW and 45/90 mm installation width for standard motor starters Components up to 7.5 kW and 65/130 mm installation width for high feature motor starters Fail-safe components Components required for the safety integrated SIGUARD system Components of the expansion modules ET 200S configuration options Maximum number of modules that can be connected/maximum configuration Guide to the ET 200S manuals
1-1
Product overview
1.1
1.1.1
Overview
General components
The following table shows the general components required for a configuration with motor starters.
Component DIN rails
Function ... are the mechanical supports onto which the terminal modules of the ET 200S are snapped.
Drawing
100 mm
Interface module IM 151
... connects the ET 200S with the PROFIBUS-DP master and prepares the data for the electronic modules and motor starters connected. (See the ET 200S Distributed I/O System manual.)
Power module PM-D
The module monitors the voltage of the electronic components and contactors for a group of motor starters (potential group) (see Chapter 7).
Terminal modules TM-P15 S27-01
... carry the wiring and take the PM-D power module (with terminating cover) (see Section 6.2).
Spacing module DM-V15
... a spacing module must be inserted between the DS, DS-x, and DS1-x standard direct starters and the F-DS1e-x, F-RS1e-x fail-safe motor starters in the case of high ambient temperatures and for operation in the upper current setting range of the circuit breaker. Configuration not necessary (see Section 3.4.3).
Table 1-1: General components
1-2
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Product overview
Component Jumper module L1/L2/L3 Function ... loops L1, L2 and L3 through ... for closing gaps in the power bus, for example when expansion modules and spacing modules are used Available types: With L1/L2/L3 throughfeed, 15 mm, 30 mm
15/30 mm
Drawing
Jumper module PE/N
... adds a PEN conductor (N) and protective ground (PE) to the power bus. ... for closing gaps in the PE/N bus, for example when expansion modules and spacing modules are used Available types: with PE/N throughfeed, 15 mm, 30 mm ... protect the contacts of the power bus from touching (IP20) and included with the terminal modules with power bus infeed and with the terminal blocks with PE/N infeed (see Section 3.8). ... terminates the internal data bus of the ET 200S electrically and is included with the IM module. (see Section 3.8 and the ET 200S Distributed I/O System manual).
15/30 mm
Caps
Terminating module
Terminating cover
... prevents the contacts of the motor starters from being touched and is included with the terminal modules TM-P15 S27-01, TM-PF30 S47 B1/C1/F1, and TM-PFX30 S47-G1. (see Section 3.8).
3-phase feed-in terminal for S0
... for expanding the conductor cross section for power infeed - if necessary - as follows: single- or multi-core: 2.5 to 25 mm2 finely stranded with wire end ferrule: 2.5 to 25 mm2 single- or multi-core: AWG 12 to 4 (see Appendix A.2)
Table 1-1: (cont.) General components
1-3
Product overview 1.1.2 Components up to 5.5 kW and 45/90 mm installation width for standard motor starters
Function Standard direct starter SIRIUS ... switches a motor on or off. ... protects three-phase motors up to 5.5 kW in the event of overloading and short circuiting. ... also controls a brake control module (xB1 to 4). Only the brake function of the xB3 and xB4 modules is supported, the inputs have no effect. ... also controls a brake control module (xB3 or xB4) (see Section 8.2). ... carries the wiring and takes a standard direct starter (DS, DS-x or DS1-x). ... distributes L1, L2 and L3 via the integrated power bus. Available types: with power bus infeed for a load group (drawing on left), including 3 caps with power bus throughfeed (drawing on right) (see Section 6.3.1). Standard reversing starter SIRIUS Drawing
Component Standard direct starters DS (discontinued type) DS-x (discontinued type)
DS1-x
Terminal module TM-DS45
Standard reversing starter RS (discontinued type)
RS-x (discontinued type)
RS1-x
Terminal module TM-RS90
... switches a motor rotating clockwise or counterclockwise on or off. ... protects three-phase motors up to 5.5 kW in the event of overloading and short circuiting. ... also controls a brake control module (xB1 to 4). Only the brake function of the xB3 and xB4 modules is supported, the inputs have no effect. ... also controls a brake control module (xB3 or xB4). (see Section 9.2). ... carries the wiring and takes a standard reversing starter (RS, RS-x or RS1-x). ... distributes L1, L2 and L3 via the integrated power bus. Available types: with power bus infeed for a load group (drawing on left), including 3 caps with power bus throughfeed (drawing on right) (see Section 6.3.5).
Table 1-2: Components for standard motor starters up to 5.5 kW and 45/90 mm installation width
1-4
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Product overview
Component PE/N terminal block Function ... adds a PEN conductor (N) and protective ground (PE) to the power bus. Available types: with PE/N infeed and connection to right, including 2 caps, 45 mm with PE/N connection and throughfeed, 45 mm (see Sections 6.3.1 and 6.3.5). ... for manual operation of the contactor and checking the wiring (only for DS, DS-x, DS1-x, RS, RS-x, RS1-x) (see Section 4.2). Drawing
Control kit
Control unit for ET 200S
... for direct drive of the contactor coils and for checking the wiring and operation of the powers section for commissioning and service purposes. (only for DS, DS-x, DS1-x, RS, RS-x, RS1-x) (see Section 4.3).
Table 1-2: (cont.)Components for standard motor starters up to 5.5 kW and 45/90 mm installation width
1-5
Product overview 1.1.3 Components up to 7.5 kW and 65/130 mm installation width for high feature motor starters
Function High feature direct starter with electronic overload protection ... switches a motor on or off. ... protects three-phase motors up to 7.5 kW in the event of overloading and short circuiting. ... also controls a brake control module (xB1 to 4). ... with integrated fail-safe kit (see Section 8.3). High feature direct soft starter with electronic overload protection ... switches a motor on or off. ... protects three-phase motors up to 7.5 kW in the event of overloading and short circuiting. ... also controls a brake control module (xB1, 3) (see Section 8.4). ... carries the wiring and takes a high feature direct starter DS1e-x or high feature direct soft starter DSS1e-x. ... distributes L1, L2 and L3 via the integrated power bus. Available types: with power bus infeed for a load group (drawing on left), including 3 caps with power bus throughfeed (drawing on right) (see Section 6.3.2). High feature reversing starter with electronic overload protection ... switches a motor rotating clockwise or counterclockwise on or off. ... protects three-phase motors up to 7.5 kW in the event of overloading and short circuiting. ... also controls a brake control module (xB1 to 4). ... with integrated fail-safe kit (see Section 9.3). ... carries the wiring and takes a high feature reversing starter RS1e-x. ... distributes L1, L2 and L3 via the integrated power bus. Available types: with power bus infeed for a load group (drawing on left), including 3 caps with power bus throughfeed (drawing on right) (see Section 6.3.6).
Table 1-3: Components for high feature motor starters up to 7.5 kW and 65/130 mm installation widths
Component High feature direct starters DS1e-x
Drawing
Hight feature direct soft starter DSS1e-x
Terminal module TM-DS65
High feature RS1e-x reversing starter
Terminal module TM-RS130
1-6
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Product overview
Component Terminal block and jumper module PE/N Function ... adds a PEN conductor (N) and protective ground (PE) to the power bus. Available types: with PE/N infeed and connection to right, including 2 caps, 65 mm with PE/N connection and throughfeed, 65 mm (see Sections 6.3.2, 6.3.3, 6.3.6, and 6.3.7). Digital module with 2 inputs for parameterizable high feature motor starters. Actions, for example, for full local operation, limit-position operation, emergency start ... (for DS1e-x, RS1e-x, DSS1e-x, F-DS1e-x, F-RS1e-x) (see Section 4.4). The same as the 2DI control module but with an option to connect to the PC via the LOGO! PC cable (order no.: 6ED1057-1AA00-0BA0) (see Section 4.5). Like the control module 2DI COM, however with an additional input point to switch to the manual operation local mode. (see Chapter 4.6). Drawing
2DI control module
2DI COM control module
Control Module 2DI LC COM
Table 1-3: (cont.)Components for high feature motor starters up to 7.5 kW and 65/130 mm installation widths
1-7
Product overview 1.1.4 Fail-safe components

Function Fail-safe direct starter with electronic overload protection ... switches a motor on or off. ... switches off safely if there is no SG signal. ... protects three-phase motors up to 7.5 kW in the event of overloading and short circuiting. ... also controls a brake control module (xB1 to 4). (see Section 8.3). ... carries the wiring and takes a fail-safe F-DS1e-x direct starter. ... distributes L1, L2 and L3 via the integrated power bus. ... contains the coding for the safety group (SG1 to SG6) Available types: with power bus infeed for a load group (drawing on left), including 3 caps with power bus throughfeed (drawing on right) (see Section 6.3.3). Fail-safe reversing starter F-RS1e-x Fail-safe, high feature reversing starter with electronic overload protection ... switches a motor rotating clockwise or counterclockwise on or off. ... switches off safely if there is no SG signal. ... protects three-phase motors up to 7.5 kW in the event of overloading and short circuiting. ... also controls a brake control module (xB1 to 4). (see Section 9.3). ... carries the wiring and takes a fail-safe F-RS1e-x reversing starter. ... distributes L1, L2 and L3 via the integrated power bus. ... contains the coding for the safety group (SG1 to SG6) Available types: with power bus infeed for a load group (drawing on left), including 3 caps with power bus throughfeed (drawing on right) (see Section 6.3.7).
Table 1-4: Fail-safe components
Component Fail-safe direct starter F-DS1e-x
Drawing
Terminal module TM-FDS65
Terminal module TM-FRS130
1-8
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Product overview
Component PM-D F X1 power/expansion module Function ... supplies external safety devices ... loops the 6 SG buses and U1 and M through (see Section 12.3). Drawing
TM-PFX30 terminal module
... carries the wiring and takes a PM-D F X1 power/expansion module Available types: Incoming supply from the left for expansion Without an incoming supply from the left as power module (see Section 12.2). ... used in conjunction with a fail-safe power module PM-D F PROFIsafe 1) or PM-D F X1 ... makes 4 floating relay contacts available Switches off the relay contacts safely if there is no SG signal. (see Section12.4).
F-CM contact replicator
SF
PWR
STAT
TM-FCM30 terminal module
... carries the wiring and takes a contact replicator module (see Section 12.2).
1) Power module PM-D F PROFIsafe
see the ET 200S Distributed I/O System, Fail-Safe Modules manual.

Table 1-4: (cont.)Fail-safe components
1-9
Product overview 1.1.5 Components required for the safety integrated SIGUARD system
The following table shows the components required to set up a SIGUARD emergency stop circuit.
Component SIGUARD power module PM-D F1 to 4 Function The module monitors the voltage of the electronic components and contactors for a group of motor feeders (potential group). ... Ensures that all motor starters in a group are switched off in the interests of safety. ... Is required to meet the requirements of safety categories 2 to 4 (EN 954-1). ... Ensures safe switching of other enabling circuits as a function of PM-D F1 to 4 ... Achieves the category of the associated PM-D F1 to 4 (see Section 10.3). ... carry the wiring and take the PM-D F1 to 5 power module. ... incorporate the terminals for the sensor circuits (PM-D F1, 2). ... incorporate the terminals for the auxiliary voltages (PM-D F1 to 4). ... incorporate the terminals for the enabling circuits (PM-D F5). ... types ...B1 and ...C1 with terminating cover (see Section 10.2). ... for connecting the release circuit ... for connecting an external infeed contactor/release circuit ... for integrating ET 200S motor starter groups in external safety circuits (see Section 10.4). Drawing
PM-D F5
SIGUARD terminal modules TM-PF30 S47
SIGUARD connection module PM-X
SIGUARD terminal module TM-X15 S27-01
... carries the wiring and takes the PM-X connection module. The same model is used for the start and end of a motor starter group (see Section 10.2.7).
Table 1-5: Components of the SIGUARD emergency stop circuit
1-10
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Product overview
Component Infeed contactor, for example SIRIUS Function ... is a second circuit-breaking element in the main circuit. ... is required for category 3 (EN 954-1) and higher. Drawing
Fail-safe kit 1 for standard direct starters DS, DS-x, DS1-x
... is required for category 2 (EN 954-1) and higher. ... consists of an auxiliary switch block (a) a contact holder with a connecting lead for the direct starter (b) two contact supports for the terminal module (c) ... is already integrated in the DS1e-x and TM-DS65 (see Section 10.5). ... is required for category 2 (EN 954-1) and higher. ... consists of two auxiliary switch blocks (a) a contact holder with a connecting lead for the reversing starter (b) four contact holders for the terminal module (c) a connecting lead (d) ... is incorporated into RS1e-x and TM-RS130 (see Section 10.5).
Fail-safe kit 2 for standard reversing starters RS, RS-x, RS1-x
a c
Table 1-5: (cont.) Components of the SIGUARD emergency stop circuit
1-11
Product overview 1.1.6 Components of the expansion modules

Function ... for all motor starters except DS and RS
xB1 DC24V/4A
Component Brake control module xB1 xB3
Drawing
... with externally powered mechanical brakes (24 VDC/4 A) ... and 2 inputs (see Section 11.3.5). ... with internally powered mechanical brakes (500 VDC/0.7 A) ... and 2 inputs (see Section 11.3.6). ... carries the wiring and takes a brake control module (xB1 or xB2).
X 2 3 4
Stat
xB2 xB4 Terminal module TM-xB15 S24-01 Terminal module TM-xB215 S24-01
3RK19030CB00
... carries the wiring and takes a brake control module xB3 or xB4. (see Section 11.3.2).
Table 1-6: Components of the expansion modules
1.1.7
Components for frequency converter

Frequency converter and fail-safe frequency converter are described in separate manuals. The following documentation packages with corresponding contents are available:
order number 6SL3298-0CA12-0xP0 1) with - ET 200S FC frequency converter operating manual - ET 200S FC frequency converter list manual order number 6SL3298-0CA12-1xP0 1) with - ET 200S FC frequency converter operating manual - ET 200S FC frequency converter list manual - ET 200S decentralized peripheral system
1)
x = The documentation package can be ordered in the following languages:

A = German B = English
The frequency converters are in preparation.
1-12
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Product overview
1.2
ET 200S configuration options

Motor starters with the following features can be combined as follows:
Motor starters with installation widths of 45/90 mm (standard motor starters) and 65/130 mm (high feature motor starters) can be combined in any configuration. Supply through the backplane bus is compatible. Power infeed between the motor starters with installation widths of 45/90 mm and 65/130 mm is separate, on account of the different installation lengths.
Safety note Only applies in fail-safe mode (fail-safe technology) It is not permissible to combine fail-safe modules with standard modules in a single fail-safe potential group, with the exception of expansion modules such as xB1 to xB4, depending on the category (see Sections 8.3, 9.3).
ET 200S with motor starters

PM-D IM 151 DS1-x DS1-x DS1-x RS1-x DS1e-x DS1e-x
Termin. module
Figure 1-1: ET 200S with motor starters
Terminating cover
Terminating cover
1-13
Product overview
ET 200S with motor starters and electronic modules

IM 151 PM-E DS1-x PM-D DS1-x DS1e-x DS1e-x PM-E
Terminating cover 2DI DC 24 V Termin. module Termin. module
Figure 1-2: ET 200S with motor starters and electronic modules
ET 200S with motor starters and safety integrated SIGUARD system up to category 4
IM 151
2DI DC 24 V
PM-D F1
DS1-x PM-D
2DI DC 24 V
DS1-x
RS1-x
DS1e-x PM-X
2DI DC 24 V
Terminating cover
Figure 1-3: ET 200S with motor starters and safety integrated SIGUARD system up to category 4
1-14
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Infeed contactor
Product overview
Parts list
The following parts list contains all the components required for an ET 200S sample configuration with motor starters and safety-integrated SIGUARD system (see Figure 1-3).
Abbreviation IM 151 PM-D TM-P15 S27-01 TM-DS45S32 DS1-x TM-PF30 S47-B1 PM-D F1 TM-DS45S32 DS1-x F kit 1 TM-RS90S31 RS1-x F kit 2 TM-DS65 S32 -01 FS L DS1e-x TM-X15 S27-01 PM-X Order number 6ES7151-1AA00-0AB0 3RK1903-0BA00 3RK1903-0AA00 3RK1903-0AB00 3RK1301-0KB00-0AA2 3RK1903-1AA10 3RK1903-1BA00 3RK1903-0AB00 3RK1301-1EB00-0AA2 3RK1903-1CA00 3RK1903-0AC10 3RK1301-1BB00-1AA2 3RK1903-1CA01 3RK1903-0AK00 3RK1301-0CB10-0AA2 3RK1903-1AB00 3RK1903-1CB00 Description IM 151 interface module Power module for motor starter Terminal module for power module Terminal module for standard direct starter with power bus infeed Standard direct starter, electromechanical, 0.9 to 1.25 A SIGUARD terminal module with infeed for power module SIGUARD power module for emergency stop Terminal module for standard direct starter with power bus infeed Standard direct starter, electromechanical, 2.8 to 4.0 A Fail-safe kit 1, for standard direct starter Terminal module for standard reversing starter, with power bus throughfeed Standard reversing starter, electromechanical, 1.4 to 2.0 A Fail-safe kit 2, for standard reversing starter Terminal module for high feature direct starter with power bus infeed High feature direct starter with electronic overload protection, 2.4 to 16 A Terminal module for SIGUARD connection module SIGUARD connection module Terminating cover (component of the terminal modules with power bus infeed for power modules for motor starters) Terminating module (component of the IM 151) 3RT1035-1BB40 Infeed contactor as second disconnection option (e.g. SIRIUS, size 2)
1-15
Product overview
ET 200S with fail-safe motor starters up to category 4/SIL3

PM-D F X1 IM 151 F-DS1e-x F-DS1e-x
Termin. module Terminating cover
Figure 1-4: ET 200S with fail-safe motor starters up to category 4/SIL3
ET 200S with fail-safe motor starters and fail-safe electronic modules up to category 4/SIL3
IM 151 High Feature PM-D F PROFIsafe F-DS1e-x F-DS1e-x F DO PM-E F DI
Termin. module
F DI
F DO
PM-E
Figure 1-5: ET 200S with fail-safe motor starters and fail-safe electronic modules up to category 4/SIL3
Terminating cover
1-16
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Product overview
Potential and load groups

A potential group consists of a power module and all the modules to the right of the power module up to the next power module. A load group consists of a motor starter with power infeed and all the motor starters to the right of it up to the next motor starter with a power infeed.
Potential group 1
IM 151 PM-D
Potential group 2
PM-D
Termin. module
DS-x1
DS1-x
DS1-x
DS1-x
DS1-x
DS1-x
RS1-x
DS1-x
Load group 1
Figure 1-6: Potential groups and load groups
Load group 2 Jumper module
Load group 3
1-17
Terminating cover
Product overview
1.3
Maximum number of modules that can be connected/maximum configuration

Please note the following rules when configuring your ET 200S station:
The maximum number of modules is 64. This includes: - Interface module - Power modules - Electronic modules - Reserve modules - Motor starters The maximum width is 1 m. The maximum length of the parameters is 244 bytes (depending on the DP master used). The following table contains the parameter length of the different modules in bytes: Module Parameters (bytes) 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 20 3 3 - 2) - 2) - 2) PIQ/PII (bytes) 0/0 0/0 0/0 0/0 0/0 0/0 0/0 0/0 0/0 5/5 1/1 1) 1/1 1) 0/0 0/0 0/0 DS RS DS-x RS-x DS1-x RS1-x DS1e-x RS1e-x DSS1e-x F-DS1e-x F-RS1e-x Module Parameters (bytes) 3 3 3 3 3 3 12 12 12 12 12 PIQ/PII (bytes) 1/1 1) 1/1 1) 1/1 1) 1/1 1) 1/1 1) 1/1 1) 2/2 2/2 2/2 2/2 2/2
PM-D PM-D F1 PM-D F2 PM-D F3 PM-D F4 PM-D F5 PM-X PM-D F X1 F-CM PM-D F PROFIsafe xB3 xB4 xB1 xB2 DM V15
1 2
) 2 bits each are used in the PIQ/PII, addresses can be packed ) Not included with the configuration tool
Table 1-7: Parameter length of the modules
1-18
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Product overview
The following table shows you the maximum current-carrying capacity of the modules you have to take into consideration: Power modules Maximum current-carrying capacity 10 A Modules that can be connected
PM-D PM-D F1 PM-D F2 PM-D F3 PM-D F4 PM-D F X1 PM-D F PROFIsafe
2A+4A (see Section 10.3.3)
The number of modules that can be connected depends on the total current of all the modules in this potential group. This must not exceed the relevant maximum current-carrying capacity.
6A Making current: 10 A Continuous current: 5A
Table 1-8: Maximum current-carrying capacity
1-19
Product overview
1.4
Guide to the ET 200S manuals

The components of the ET 200S are described in various manuals in the ET 200S manual package. The examples below show the possible ET 200S configurations and the manuals required for them.
You use the following components ...

The ET 200S consists of the following components: You will need information from the following manuals: Order numbers for the necessary documentation packets or manuals
6ES7 151-1AA10-8xA0 1)
IM 151
PM-E
DO2
2AO
ET 200S Distributed I/O System
DI2
2AI
ET 200S Distributed I/O System + ET 200S Process-Related Functions
IM 151
2PULSE
PM-E
6ES7 151-1AA10-8xA0 1) 6ES7 151-1AC00-8xA0 1)
1SSI
2DO
2DI
1Posinc/Dig.
1Posinc/An.
ET 200S Distributed I/O System + ET 200S Positioning
IM 151
6ES7 151-1AA10-8xA0 1) 6ES7 151-1AD00-8xA0 1)
PM-E
2DO
2DI
Modbus/USS
ET 200S Distributed I/O System + ET 200S Serial Interface Module
IM 151
6ES7 151-1AA10-8xA0 1) 6ES7 151-1AE00-8xA0 1)
PM-E
2DO
2DI
2AI
ET 200S Distributed I/O System + IM 151/CPU Interface Module
IM 151/ CPU
6ES7 151-1AA10-8xA0 1) 6ES7 151-1AB00-8xA0 1)
PM-E
2DO
2AO
2DI
2AI
IM 151
DS1-x PM-E DO2 2AI 2AO DI2 PM-D
DS1-x
ET 200S Distributed I/O System + ET 200S Motor Starters Fail-Safe Motor Starters Safety Integrated SIGUARD System
6ES7 151-1AA10-8xA0 1)
1)
x = The documentation packets or manuals can be ordered for the following languages: A = German B = English The languages French, Spanish and Italian are also available through the Internet.
1-20
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Product overview
You use the following fail-safe components:

The ET 200S consists of the following components: You will need information from the following manuals: Order numbers for necessary documentation packets or manuals
6ES7 151-1AA10-8xA0 1)
ET 200S Distributed I/O System + ET 200S Distributed I/O System Fail-safe module
IM 151-1 HF
PM-E F DI
PM-E
F DO
2DO
2DI
Available on the Internet
PM-D F PROFIsafe
IM 151-1 HF
F-DS1e-x
F-DS1e-x
PM-E
F DO F DO
F DI
F DI
ET 200S Distributed I/O System Fail-safe module + ET 200S Distributed I/O System + ET 200S Motor Starters Fail-Safe Motor Starters Safety Integrated SIGUARD System
Available on the Internet
6ES7 151-1AA10-8xA0 1)
) x = The documentation packet or manuals can be ordered for the following languages: A = German B = English The languages French, Spanish and Italian are also available through the Internet.
You are using frequency converter (in preparation)...

ET 200S comprises the following components: You will need the information from the following manuals: Order numbers of the required documentation package
ET 200S FC frequency converter Operating manual + ET 200S FC frequency converter List manual
or manuals
6SL3298-0CA12-0xP0 2)
IM 151-1
PM-D IPM25 FSA
ET 200S decentralized peripheral system + ET 200S FC frequency converter Operating manual + ET 200S FC frequency converter List manual
ICU24
1)
6SL3298-0CA12-1xP0 2)
1 2
) ICU24F for fail-safe frequency converters ) x = The documentation package or manuals can be ordered for the following languages: A = German B = English The languages French, Spanish and Italian are also available through the Internet.
1-21
Product overview
Where do you find information?

The following table is designed to help you quickly find the information you need. It tells you which manual you need to refer to and which chapter deals with the topic you are interested in.
Manual chapter/appendix
S7 Distributed Safety Configuration and Programming ET 200S Distributed I/O System ET 200S Distributed I/O System Fail-Safe Modules IM 151/CPU Interface Module ET 200S FC frequency converter list manual ET 200S FC frequency converter operating manual ET 200S Process-Related Functions Safety Engineering in S7 System Description ET 200S Motor Starters Fail-Safe Motor Starters
Subject
Components of ET 200S Brief instructions Configuration options Communication Configuration Addressing Installation Electrical layout and wiring of the ET 200S Programming Commissioning and diagnostics Functions Function charts General technical specifications Technical specifications Terminal modules Power modules Direct and soft starters Reversing starters ET 200S with safety-integrated SIGUARD system Interface modules Electronic modules Positioning modules Expansion modules Fail-safe modules Monitoring, cycle, and response times Order numbers Dimensioned drawings Applications Glossary
1 2 1 4
1 2 3
1 2 4
ET 200S Serial Interface Module
ET 200S Positioning
2 3
2 3 4 7
1/2 1 4/5 1 3 2
2 3 4 5
5 5 6 8 5
6 5
6 6-8 6-8 9 2 2
1 3 2
7 6 2-5 2 2, 3
6, 9 10-12 7, 10, 10 12 8 9 10 8 11-15 3-6 11 12 7 A B C Gl A B Gl Gl 9 12 11 10 13 10 9
2/3 2/3 9
A1 A2
1-22
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Short instructions for commissioning
2
Page 2-2 2-3 2-4 2-4 2-6 2-7 2-8 2-9 2-10 2-11 2-12 2-13
Section 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.4.1 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 2.9.1 2.10
Subject Introduction and target of example ET 200S components Requirements Installation Circuit of the sample design Wiring and fitting Configuration Integration into the user program Switching on Diagnostic options Diagnosis using hardware configuration Help
2-1
2.1
Introduction and target of example

The following example gives you step-by-step instructions for commissioning the ET 200S with motor starters. The DS1-x; Standard direct starter is controlled by an ON button and an OFF button, which are connected to a 4DI DC24V ST module. The HW Config software is used for configuration.
Introduction
Goal of example
This example is intended to 1. show you how to commission a simple DS1-x; Standard direct starter with ET 200S in a few steps 2. enable you to modify this example for your application 3. help you to implement other applications easily
Important steps
The important steps with ET 200S are always:
Installing ET 200S components and external wiring of control elements (keys) and actuators (e.g. motor) Configuration with STEP 7 Integration into the user program Switching on the ET 200S Evaluation of the diagnosis
2-2
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
2.2
ET 200S components
The following table shows the components that are required for this example:
Number 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1
Required components
Order number corresponding design corresponding design corresponding design corresponding design corresponding design 6ES7151-1AA01-0AB0 6ES7193-4CE00-0AA0 6ES7138-4CA00-0AA0 6ES7193-4CB20-0AA0 6ES7131-4BD00-0AA0 3RK1903-0AA00 3RK1903-0BA00 3RK1903-0AB00 3RK1903-2AA00 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA2 1)
Description short-circuit and overload protection for 400 V AC power feed power supply for 24 V DC button with make function for ON button with break function for OFF PLC with master for PROFIBUS-DP corresponding to your selection Interface modules IM151-1 STANDARD (with terminator module) Terminal module for PM-E DC24V TM-P15S22-01 Power module for electronic modules PM-E DC24V Terminal module for 4DI DC24V ST TM-E15S24-01 Digital electronic module with 4 inputs 4DI DC24V ST Terminal module for PM-D TM-P15 S27-01 (with cover) Power module for motor starter PM-D Terminal module for DS1-x with infeed TM-DS45-S32 (with 3 flaps) Terminal block with infeed PE/N (with 2 caps) Direct starter; Standard DS1-x
) xx = the current range must be selected in accordance with the connected load
Table 2-1: Components for the example
2-3
2.3
Requirements
The requirements for the example are:
You have an S7 station consisting of a power supply assembly and a DP master (e.g. CPU 315-2 DP). A CPU 315-2 DP has been used as the DP master for this example. Any other DP master (IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1) can of course be used. STEP7 (from V 5.2) is fully installed on the PG. You are familiar with STEP7. The PG is connected to the DP master.
Note See the online help for information on operating STEP7.
2.4
Installation
Warning Dangerous high voltage! May cause electric shock and burns. Switch off all power to the system and device before starting work.
The following illustration shows the sequence for installing the ET 200S components on the DIN rails.
Terminating module
Slot in the HW Config 1 2 3 4

PM-E PM-D 4DI
DS1-x
Power supply
CPU 315-2 DP
Master
IM 151-1
Profibus-DP
TM-P15 S27-01
Terminating cover 3 caps 2 caps
PLC
ET 200S
PE/N
Figure 2-1: Components and design for the example
2-4
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Installation sequence
There is an exact description of the installation for:
Installing terminal modules in Section 3.5 Inserting power modules in Section 3.6 Installing and removing motor starters in Section 3.7
Proceed as follows for installation: 1. Install the two rails (35 x 7.5 mm or 15 mm) of at least 210 mm in length on a solid base at a distance 100 mm apart. 100 mm 2. Start installation of the modules on the rail from the left (attach swing into place slide to the left). Use the following sequence: - Interface module IM151-1 STANDARD - Terminal module TM-P15 S22-01 - Terminal module TM-E15 S24-01 - Terminal module TM-P15 S27-01 - Connect terminal block PE/N and terminal module TM-DS45-S32 together - Mount terminal module TM-DS45-S32 on DIN rail 3. Place the following parts on the right side of the TM-DS45-S32: - the terminator module (with the IM151-1) - the sealing cover (with the TM-P15 S27-01) - the 3 caps for L1 to L3 (with the TM-DS45-S32) - the 2 caps for PE and N (with the terminal block PE/N) (see Figure 2-1) 4. Set the PROFIBUS address 3 on the IM151-1 STANDARD interface module.
OFF 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 ON
Code switch under slider bottom right on the front panel
PROFIBUS address 3
Figure 2-2: Set PROFIBUS address 3
2-5
Short instructions for commissioning 2.4.1 Circuit of the sample layout

The following illustration shows the circuit of the main power circuit and the control power circuit for the example.
1L1 400 VAC 1L2 1L3
PM-E DC24V
DI0 DI2 ON 13 1
2
E 2
4DI DC24V ST
5 DI1 6 DI3 STOP 21 22
1L1 3L2 5L3
14 24VDC M 3 2 6 3 7 4 7 8
DC 24 V
E Fault E A 24VDC E 2T1 4T2 6T3 M
IM151-1
1L+ 2L+ 1M 2M
24VDC L+ U1 M
1 8 2 9
6 13 AUX2 7 AUX3 14
PM-D
N PE M 3~
24VDC A1+ U2 E = integrated input for programming A = integrated output for programming = line for external wiring A2-
4 11 5 12
Figure 2-3: Circuit for the example
2-6
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
2.5
Wiring and fitting

Carry out the following steps: 1. Caution Make sure that the complete layout is sufficiently protected from short circuit and overload. 2. Wire the ET 200S as shown in Figure 2-3. Only the external lines shown in bold still need to be wired. That is: - AC 400 V at L1 - L3 on the terminal module for the motor starter - PE and N on the PE/N terminal block - Consumer (motor) on T1 - T3 and PE - DC 24 V on IM151-1 - DC 24 V on the terminal module for the PM-E - DC 24 V on the terminal module for the PM-D - the two buttons for ON (maker) and OFF (breaker) 3. Connect the DP master to the ET 200S with the PROFIBUS bus terminal plug. The PROFIBUS-DP interface is on the IM151-1 STANDARD. 4. Plug the power module, electronic module and motor starter into the terminal modules. 5. Switch on the power supply for the DP master. 6. Observe the status LEDs on the DP master. CPU 315-2 DP: - DC 5 V green - SF DP off - BUSF flashes red
2-7
2.6
Configuration
1. Start the SIMATIC manager and create a new project with a DP master (e.g. CPU315-2 DP) (see Figure 2-4). 2. Generate the PROFIBUS subnet. 3. Add the ET 200S to the PROFIBUS from the hardware catalog. 4. Set the PROFIBUS address 3 for ET 200S. 5. Drag the various ET 200S modules to the configuration table from the hardware catalog (see Figure 2-4).
Assembly/ DP detection 1 2 3 4
1 2
Order number 6ES7138-4CA00-0AA0 6ES7131-4BD00-0AA0 3RK1903-0BA00 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA2 2)
E-Addr.
A-Addr.
Comment Power module PM-E DC24V
0.0 - 0.3
Input module 4DI DC24V ST Power module PM-D 1)
1.0 - 1.3
0.0 - 0.3
Motor starters DS1-x
) Can be found under motor starter when selecting the modules ) xx = The current range must be selected to match the connected load
Table 2-2: Configuration table in HW Config
The following diagram should appear.
Figure 2-4: Assemblies in the HW Config
2-8
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Setting the parameters

6. To receive the diagnoses of the assemblies, please set the following parameters for the various assemblies: - In the DP slave properties dialog box for ET 200S Startup at setpoint <> actual layout: enabled Assembly change during operation: enabled - in the DP slave properties dialog box for the PM-E DC24V, Assembly/DP detection 1 (in the configuration table) Diagnosis: missing load voltage - In the properties DP slave dialog box for PM-D, Assembly/DP detection 3 (in the configuration table) Diagnosis: group diagnosis enabled - In the properties DP slave dialog box for DS1-x, Assembly/DP detection 4 (in the configuration table) Diagnosis: group diagnosis enabled Save the configuration.
7.
2.7
Integration into the user program

1. Create the user program in the KOP/AWL/FUP editor in the OB1.
AWL U E S A UN E R A 0.0 0.0 0.1 0.0 And input 0.0 (button ON) Set output 0.0 And not input 0.1 (button OFF) Reset output 0.0
2. Save the project in the SIMATIC manager. 3. Load the configuration into the DP master.
2-9
2.8
Switch on
1. Switch on the following power supplies on the ET 200S. - IM151-1 STANDARD - PM-E DC24V - PM-D with U1 and U2 - Do not switch on the AC 400 V power supply yet! 2. Observe the status LEDs on the DP master and ET 200S - CPU 315-2 DP: DC 5V: on SF DP: off BUSF: off 3. Observe the status LEDs on the IM151-1 STANDARD. - SF off - BF off - ON green 4. Observe the status LEDs on the PM-E DC24V - SF off - PWR green 5. Observe the status LEDs on the 4DI DC24V ST. - DI0 off - DI1 green - DI2 off - DI3 green 6. Observe the status LEDs on the PM-D - SF off - PWR green - CON green 7. Observe the status LEDs on the DS1-x motor starter - SF off - C-STAT off
2-10
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Check wiring
Check that the wiring of the ON button and the OFF button is correct. 8. Press the ON button Observe the LEDs - 4DI DC24V ST, DI0 green - Motor starter DS1-x, C-STAT yellow. 9. Press the OFF button Observe the LEDs - 4DI DC24V ST, DI1 off - DS1-x motor starter, C-STAT off. 10. Switch on the AC 400 V power supply for the motor starter. Danger Make sure that dangerous live parts cannot be touched. 11. Repeat steps 8 and 9 and observe the behavior of the connected consumer in each case. Warning Make sure that there is no danger from actuators connected to the motor starter (e.g. uncontrolled rotary motion by the motor).
2.9
Diagnostic options
There are several options for accessing the diagnoses of the ET 200S modules:
with the DP diagnosis blocks for SIMATIC S7 "FB125" or "FC125". The two blocks and a description in PDF format can be downloaded from the Internet at the following address: http://www4.ad.siemens.de/WW/view/en/387257 with HW Config S7. See chapter 2.9.1 below with the convenient parameter setting and diagnosis software Switch ES Motor starter. This software, which can be integrated into S7, offers a simple and easy method of setting parameters, operating and observing (diagnosis) the ET 200S motor starter, High Feature and also ECOFAST motor starter. The software can be ordered under the following order numbers: - for the full version 3ZS1310-0CC20-0YA0 - for an upgrade 3ZS1310-0CC20-0YE0
2-11
Short instructions for commissioning 2.9.1 Diagnosis with HW Config by STEP7

1. Open the HW Config window in the SIMATIC Manager on your PC or programming device 2. Open the Station Online 3. Simulate various faults and observe the messages in the DP-Slave Diagnosis status window as shown in the following example: - disconnect and connect motor starter in ON status and OFF status - switch off the U1 and/or U2 voltages at PM-D - switch off power switch
For example, the following illustration shows a motor starter disconnected at slot 7.
Figure 2-5: View in DP-Slave Diagnosis status window
2-12
GWA-4NEB950007202-09

4. After every action press F5 on the PC or programming device to refresh the status window. The IM151-1 assembly is identified with a red dot with a white cross during an error message. 5. Double-click with the mouse on the defective station to display the assembly status of the IM151-1 (tab Folder General). Select DP-Slave Diagnosis for the exact fault diagnosis. The various diagnoses of the faulty slave are shown as text.
We hope we have been able to help you with this example.
2.10
Help
If you have any problems or questions, please contact:
Technical Assistance: Telephone: +49 (0) 9131-7-43833 (8 - 17 CET) Fax: +49 (0) 9131-7-42899 E-mail: [email protected] Internet: www.siemens.de/lowvoltage/technical-assistance Technical Support: Telephone: +49 (0) 180 50 50 222
2-13
2-14
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Installation
3
Subject Page 3-2 3-3 3-5 3-6 3-13 3-16 3-18 3-18 3-24 3-31
Section 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.7.1 3.7.2 3.8 Slot rules Installation rules
Installation measurements and clearances Derating Installing terminal modules Inserting power modules Installing and removing motor starters Standard motor starter with installation width of 45 or 90 mm High feature/fail-safe motor starter with an installation width of 65 or 130 mm Inserting the terminating module, terminating cover and caps
3-1
Installation
3.1
Slot rules
Compliance with the following slot rules is essential in order to ensure correct and reliable operation of an ET 200S system.
Rule Module PM-E PM-D PM-D F1 to 4 1) Motor starter DS DS-x DS1-x DS1e-x RS... PM-E F PROFIsafe PM-D F X1 PM-D F PROFIsafe PM-D PM-D F1 to 5 xB1 to 4
The slot immediately to the right of an IM 151 module is always occupied by a... The slot immediately to the left of a PM-X module is always occupied by a...
The slot immediately to the left of an xB1 to xB4 module is always occupied by a ...
DS-x 2) DS1-x DS1e-x DSS1e-x 3) F-DS1e-x 4)
RS-x 2) RS1-x RS1e-x F-RS1e-x 4)
Between a PM-D F1 to F5 and a PM-X module there must never be a...
DSS1e-x F-DS1e-x F-RS1e-x DS... RS... PM-D F1 to 5 xB1 to 4 PM-D F X1
The slot immediately to the left of a Motor starter PM-D F5 module is always occupied by a... The slot immediately to the right of a PM-D F X1 module is always occupied by a... F-CM F-DS1e-x F-RS1e-x
The slot immediately to the left of an F-CM PM-D F X1 module is always occupied by a... PM-D F PROFIsafe F-DS1e-x F-RS1e-x
1
xB1 to 4 F-CM
) Precondition for PM-D F3, 4 is that another row of the same EMERGENCY STOP group must include a PM-D F1, 2 basic unit 2 ) The inputs of xB3, 4 have no function 3 ) See Section 11.3 4 ) Depends on the category with xB3 and xB4, see Sections 8.3, 9.3
Table 3-1:Slot rules
3-2
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Installation
3.2
Installation rules
The ET 200S distributed I/O device is designed for easy installation. To install an ET 200S with power modules, first snap on the terminal modules and then insert the power modules and motor starters into them.
Easy installation
Installation rules for an ET 200S with motor starters

To install an ET 200S, comply with the following rules (see also the figures in Section 1.2, ET 200S configuration options): The components are arranged in a single line in groups. Each line begins on the left with an IM 151 interface module. A power module comes after the interface module or at the beginning of each potential group. Groups with motor starters require special power modules with connections for contactor supply voltage. The ET 200S distributed I/O device ends with the terminating module, motor starters additionally with a terminating cover and with caps for the power bus.
Station width, number of modules and compatible motor starters for an ET 200S rail
The station width, the number of modules that can be connected and the motor starters of an ET 200S rail depend on the IM 151 interface module. For information on the IM 151 interface module see the manual for the ET 200S decentralized peripheral system
3-3
Installation
Installation position
Both perpendicular and parallel mounting positions on a perpendicular mounting surface of a hat-shape rail are permissible. The following rules apply for motor starters:
Motor starters Standard DS, DS-x, DS1-x, RS, RS-x, RS1-x High Feature DS1e-x, RS1e-x Fail-safe) F-DS1e-x, F-RS1e-x
Table 3-2:Installation position and station width
Horizontal rails
Vertical rails
max. 1m max. 2m max. 2m
Rail
The ET 200S distributed I/O device is installed on rails complying with EN 50022 (35 x 7.5 mm or 35 x 15 mm). To install an ET 200S with motor starters, you need two rails installed with center-to-center spacing of 100 mm.
Important
We recommend screwing the rails to the fixing surface at intervals of 200 mm.
Please note
Please note the following points for your designs: A suitable IM 151 interface module depending on the motor starters used for the proposed station width. A sufficient parameter capacity. A sufficient heat dissipation in the switch cabinet. A possible required derating for motor starters (see Chapter 3.4).
3-4
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Installation
3.3
Measurements Installation width
Installation measurements and clearances

Module Terminal module for Power module PM-D DM-V15 spacing module PM-X connection module (safety integrated SIGUARD system) PM-D power module F1 to F5 (safety integrated SIGUARD system) PM-D F PROFIsafe power module PM-D F X1 power module Standard DS, DS-x, DS1-x direct starters High feature DS1e-x direct starter High feature DSS1e-x direct soft starter Fail-safe F-DS1e-x direct starter Standard RS, RS-x, RS1-x reversing starters High feature RS1e-x reversing starter Fail-safe F-RS1e-x reversing starter Terminal module for standard direct and reversing starters with 45 or 90 mm installation width With 3-pin power bus (L1, L2, L3) With 5-pin power bus (incl. PE/N) Terminal module for high feature or fail-safe direct and reversing starters with a 65 or 130 mm installation width With 3-pin power bus (L1, L2, L3) With 5-pin power bus (incl. PE/N) mm
15 15 15 30 30 30 45 65 65 65 90 130 130
Installation height
264 306
290 332 75 127 152 157 180
Installation depth
ET 200S on rail with 7.5 mm depth: ET 200S ET 200S with standard motor starters with an installation width of 45 or 90 mm ET 200S with standard motor starters with an installation width of 45 or 90 mm and safety integrated SIGUARD system ET 200S with high feature or fail-safe motor starters with an installation width of 65 or 130 mm ET 200S with high feature or fail-safe motor starters with an installation width of 65 or 130 mm and 2DI/-2DI COM/-2DI LC COM control module ET 200S with high feature or fail-safe motor starters with an installation width of 65 or 130 mm and 2DI COM/-2DI LC COM control module with LOGO! PC cable Above and below the terminal module To the left of the IM 151 interface module To the right of the ET 200S terminating module Under the installed shield bus
220 35 20 20 15
Minimum spacing for installation and wiring
Table 3-3:Installation measurements and clearances
3-5
Installation
3.4
3.4.1
Derating
What is derating?
Derating refers to the use of devices in difficult operating conditions by selectively limiting their performance. In the case of motor starters, this generally involves operating at high ambient temperatures.
3.4.2
Derating factors
The following applies exclusively to the following motor starters, which are installed side by side in a row. Standard motor starters: - DS - DS-x - DS1-x Fail-safe motor starters: - F-DS1e-x - F-RS1e-x In the case of the ET 200S motor starters, the following factors must be taken into account in difficult environmental conditions: Ambient temperature Tu: Ambient temperature Tu is the temperature around the housing of the motor starter. The lower the maximum ambient temperature Tu, the higher the current load in the motor starters can be. Absolute current load: The lower the current through a motor starter, the lower the heat loss in the device. If the device does not generate much heat, the ambient temperature Tu can be higher.
3-6
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Installation 3.4.3 DM-V15 spacing module

If operating conditions are difficult and render derating necessary, a DM-V15 spacing module is inserted between the corresponding motor starters. The DM-V15 spacing module is suitable for all motor starter series. It is entirely passive and requires no configuration. The bus and all the other connections are looped through for the following modules. The elements of the spacing module are illustrated below.
Ventilation grid Support Bus
Supply voltage U1 for the electronic components AUX1 RF1/2 or SG1/2 Supply voltage U2 for contactors or SG3/4 AUX2/3 or SG5/6
Figure 3-1: DM-V15 spacing module
Note No special measures are required for the following motor starters: Standard reversing starters RS, RS-x, RS1-x High feature DS1e-x direct starter High feature DSS1e-x soft starter High feature RS1e-x reversing starter
3-7
Installation 3.4.4 Criteria for configurations with/without DM-V15 spacing modules

The criteria and configurations in which spacing modules for DS, DS-x, DS1-x, F-DS1e-x, F-RS1e-x are recommended are illustrated below.
Criteria for DS, DS-x, DS1-x

Vertical installation on horizontal rails
Tu 50 C for xB1 to 4 60 C
PM-D|S|S|S PM-D F1-4|S|S|S PM-D|DSx|xB1-4|DSx|xB1-4|DSx|xB1-4
40 C
PM-D|DM-V15|DS|DM-V15|DS|DM-V15|S PM-D F1-4|DM-V15|DS|DM-V15|DS|DM-V15|S PM-D|DM-V15|DSx|xB1-4|DM-V15|DSx|xB1-4|DM-V15|DSx|xB1-4 PM-D|S|S|S PM-D F1-4|S|S|S PM-D|DSx|xB1-4|DSx|xB1-4|DSx|xB1-4
Ie Circuit breaker 6.3 A Circuit breaker >6.3 A
= without DM-V15, motor current 90% of Ie or with DM-V15, motor current 100% of Ie = without DM-V15 = with DM-V15 Ie = max. current setting of circuit breaker
Figure 3-2: Criteria for vertical installation on horizontal rails with DS, DS-x, DS1-x
3-8
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Installation
Horizontal installation on vertical rails
Tu
40 C
30 C
Ie Circuit breaker 6.3 A = without DM-V15 = without DM-V15, motor current 90% of Ie Ie = max. current setting of circuit breaker
Figure 3-3: Criteria for horizontal installation on vertical rails with DS, DS-x, DS1-x
Circuit breaker >6.3 A
3-9
Installation
Criteria for F-DS1e-x, F-RS1e-x

Vertical installation on horizontal rails
Tu 60 C
Ie
50 C
3 A without DM-V15 1) 8 A without DM-V15 1) 16 A without DM-V15 1) 3 A without DM-V15 1) 8 A without DM-V15 1) 16 A with DM-V15 2) 3 A without DM-V15 1) 8 A with DM-V15 2) 16 A not permissible
40 C
30 C
Ie 25% 50% 75% Motor current as % of the maximum current setting Ie Tu = ambient temperature Ie = max. current setting of circuit breaker
1)
100%
without DM-V15: A DM-V15 is not necessary between the motor starters With DM-V15: - A DM-V15 must be placed on the left and right in the case of a F-DS1e-x (with or without brake control module). - A DM-V15 must be placed on the right in the case of a F-RS1e-x (with or without brake control module). The left half of an F-RS1e-x counts as a DM-V15 for the purpose of derating.
2)
Figure 3-4: Criteria for vertical installation on horizontal rails with F-DS1e-x, F-RS1e-x
Important You must insert a DM-V15 between a PM-D F PROFIsafe and a F-DS1e-x as of an ambient temperature of Tu 50 C.
3-10
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Installation
Example: The following example of a configuration shows you when a DM-V15 spacing module is recommended.
A1 A2 PM-D F PROFI safe IM 151-1 HF A3 DM-V15 A4 F-DS1e-x 0.3 ... 3 A Ie = 100% A5 F-RS1e-x 2.4 ... 16 A Ie = 75% A6 A7 DM-V15 A8 F-DS1e-x 2.4 ... 16 A Ie = 75% A9 DM-V15 A10 F-DS1e-x 2.4 ... 8 A Ie = 90%
Terminating module Terminating cover
xB3
Jumper module Figure 3-5: Configuration example for derating
The following criteria were taken into consideration in this example: The ambient temperature Tu is 55 C. A3 is necessary because Tu > 50 C and A4 is a F-DS1e-x on the right of a PM-D F PROFIsafe. A4 is loaded with 3 A (100%) and therefore a DM-V15 is not necessary. A5 is loaded with 12 A (75%) and therefore a DM-V15 (A7) is required next to the brake control module. A8 is loaded with 12 A (75%) and therefore a DM-V15 is required on the right (A9) and left (A7). A10 is loaded with 7.2 A (90%) and therefore a DM-V15 is required on the left (A9). The DM-V15 to the right of A10 is not necessary because the ET 200S station is finished at this point. The following diagram shows you when a DM-V15 is necessary.
Tu 60 C A5 A8 55 C 50 C A10 A4
Ie 50 % 75 % 90 % 100 % Motor current as % of the maximum current setting Ie

Figure 3-6: Determining the derating for a configuration example
3-11
Installation
Horizontal installation on vertical rails
Horizontal installation is permissible for an ambient temperature up to Tu = 40 C. Derating and therefore a DM-V15 is not required for fail-safe motor starters installed horizontally up to a temperature of Tu = 40 C.
Other configurations
The configurations shown above can also be combined, in which case the derating factors specified above change. In such cases, please get in touch with your Siemens contact or the Siemens low-voltage engineering technical support department (fax: +49 (0) 9131/7-42899).
3-12
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Installation
3.5
Features
Installing terminal modules

Terminal modules replace the control wiring in the switch cabinet and are mechanical carriers for the function modules (e.g. the power modules and the motor starters). With the terminal modules it is possible to completely prewire the switch cabinet without the power modules and motor starters being fitted.
Requirements
Two rails are installed (center-to-center spacing 100 mm). Space is left for the IM 151 interface module.
Mechanical coding of the modules

When the module is first inserted, the terminal module is mechanically coded to ensure that, in the event of a fault, it can only be replaced by a module with identical functions. Note the configured structure when installing, and identify the terminal modules with the labeling strips (see Section 3.2).
Installing terminal modules for motor starters

The example below illustrates the installation of terminal modules with an installation width of 45 mm for standard direct starter.
Drawing 1 Procedure Hang the terminal module on the upper rail.
Table 3-4: Installing terminal modules - standard direct starter: example
3-13
Installation
Drawing 2 Procedure Tilt the terminal module backwards into the lower rail until you hear it engage.
Push the terminal to the left with both hands towards the module you have already installed, keeping it straight, until you can hear it engage with the adjacent module.
Table 3-4: (cont.)Installing terminal modules - standard direct starter: example
3-14
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Installation
Removing terminal modules for motor starters

Warning Switch off all the connected supply voltage! You can only remove a terminal module if there are no modules connected on the right. If necessary, you must remove all the modules on the right or move them to the side. The example below illustrates the removal of terminal modules with an installation width of 45 mm for standard direct starter.
Drawing 1
Procedure Use a screwdriver (5 mm) to push down the locking mechanism of the module on the left.
With the locking mechanism of the neighboring module open, pull the module to be removed to the right parallel to the rails.
Table 3-5: Removing terminal modules - standard direct starter: example
3-15
Installation
Drawing 3 Procedure Unlock the module by inserting the screwdriver in the opening of the locking mechanism and pushing the locking mechanism downward. This unlocks both the upper and lower rail.
With the locking mechanism depressed, tilt the module so that it comes off the lower rail. You can then remove the module from the upper rail.
Table 3-5: (cont.)Removing terminal modules - standard direct starter: example
3.6
Inserting power modules

Before inserting power modules, the following requirements must be met: Both rails must be installed. The terminal module for the power module must be installed.
Requirements
3-16
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Installation
Mechanical coding
When the modules are inserted, the corresponding terminal module is mechanically coded (two coding elements) to ensure that, in the event of a fault, it can only be replaced by a module with identical functions. You must therefore bear the configured layout in mind when you insert the modules. The illustration on the right shows the coding of a PM-D power module by way of example. Incorrectly inserted code elements can be removed from the terminal module using a 3 mm screwdriver.
Power module
Code elements
Note If a brand-new module is plugged into a terminal module that is already coded, the part of the code element for the terminal module must be removed from the module beforehand.
Terminal module
Figure 3-7: Mechanical coding of terminal modules
Inserting power modules

Insert the power module onto the installed and prewired terminal module as shown in the drawing. Power modules can only be connected to the correct terminal modules regardless of the code element.
PM-D or PM-D F1 to 4
TM-P15 S27-01 or TM-PF30 S45
Figure 3-8: Inserting power modules
3-17
Installation
3.7
3.7.1
Installing and removing motor starters

Standard motor starter with installation width of 45 or 90 mm
Requirements
Both rails must be installed. All the terminal modules for the power modules and motor starters must be installed.
Mechanical coding
When the motor starters are installed, the terminal modules are mechanically coded to ensure that, in the event of a fault, they can only be replaced by modules with identical functions. You must therefore bear the configured layout in mind when you insert the modules.
Installing standard motor starters

The motor starters are inserted in the installed terminal modules. There are two latched positions here. Depending on the position, electrical connections are made or broken at removal. The locking spring prevents you removing the motor starters under load. The following table takes the example of a standard direct starter to describe how motor starters are installed.
Drawing 1 Latch piece Procedure/Description Hold the standard motor starter at a slight angle (see drawing) and push it into the terminal module from the front. Push firmly on the lower part until contact is established with the power bus. The standard motor starter is still slightly tilted and the latch piece is not engaged. The locking spring is not yet engaged.
The standard motor starter is mechanically insecure in this position and connected only to the power bus.
1
Locking spring
Table 3-6: Installing a standard motor starter with installation width of 45 or 90 mm
3-18
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Installation
Drawing Procedure/Description
2 2
2 3
Press the latch piece and move the motor starter further towards the rail until the latch piece engages. The standard motor starter is now in its parked position.
Parked position The connection to the backplane bus is not yet established. There is no supply to the electronic components. The connection to the power bus is established. The contactors cannot respond, however, because there is no connection to the backplane bus and the electronic components and switching commands thus remain ineffective.
4 4 5
4 5
Press the latch piece again and move the motor starter further towards the DIN rail until the latch piece engages again. The standard motor starter is now in its operating position. Operating position The connection to the backplane bus is established. The electronic components and contactors are supplied with power. The locking spring is engaged.
The locking spring prevents the motor starter from being removed when live. Locking spring
Table 3-6: (cont.) Installing a standard motor starter with installation width of 45 or 90 mm
3-19
Installation
Removing standard motor starters

A motor starter can be removed from the terminal module during operation. The feeder must be dead, e.g. circuit breaker switched off. Before you can remove the module, the latch piece must be taken beyond both latched positions, thus interrupting the electrical connections. The locking spring prevents you removing the load feeders under load. Important If you remove more than one module from the ET 200S, the station switches to STOP mode.
Danger In version 1 of the IM 151, no modules can be removed during operation. Module replacement is only permitted when the supply of the IM 151 is switched off. The following table takes the example of a standard reversing starter to describe how motor starters are removed.
Drawing Procedure/Description Ensure that the motor starter is switched off.
1 1 2 1
1 2
Press both latches down. Move the latch piece beyond the first latched position. The connection to the bus and the supply voltages is interrupted. The motor starter is now in its parked position, i.e. the connection to the backplane bus has been interrupted and the module is (still) in a mechanically secure position (see also Table 3-4) Once you move the latch piece beyond the second latched position, the motor starter is released, the locking spring is disengaged and the motor starter is no longer mechanically secure.
Locking spring
Table 3-7: Removing a standard motor starter with an installation width of 45 or 90 mm
3-20
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Installation
Drawing 3 Procedure/Description Take hold of the load feeder in both hands using the upper and lower grip recesses, and pull the motor starter out. Pull the module from the bottom in a continuous movement (approx. 30 N tensile force) at an angle out of the plug-in connection.
Locking spring
Table 3-7: (cont.) Removing a standard motor starter with an installation width of 45 or 90 mm
Note It is advisable to inform maintenance and service personnel in detail about correct handling of the motor starters before the system is handed over to ensure that the advantages of ET 200S will be available immediately in the event of replacement.
3-21
Installation
Electrical connections during installation and removal

The drawings below illustrate the various installation and removal positions of a standard motor starter and the resulting electrical connections.
Drawing Description Insertion or release position The standard motor starter is electrically connected only to the power bus in this position. The locking spring is in the release position, and the load feeder is mechanically insecure in this position.
Parked position The standard motor starter is electrically connected only to the power bus in this position. The connection to the backplane bus is not established. The supply to the contactors is established but remains ineffective because there is no connection to the ET 200S backplane bus. In this position the feeder is mechanically secured against falling out.
Table 3-8: Electrical connections during installation/removal of the standard motor starter (45 or 90 mm)
3-22
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Installation
Drawing Description Operating position The connections to the backplane bus and the supply to the electronic components and to the contactors have been established. The locking spring is engaged, which means the motor starter cannot be removed.
Table 3-8: (cont.) Electrical connections during installation/removal of the standard motor starter (45 or 90 mm)
3-23
Installation 3.7.2 High feature/fail-safe motor starters with an installation width of 65 or 130 mm
Requirements
Both rails must be installed. All the terminal modules for the power modules and motor starters must be installed. The safety group (SG) must be specified in the terminal modules of the failsafe motor starters before the fail-safe motor starters are installed.
Specifying the safety group

Only relevant for fail-safe motor starters. One of the six safety groups can be coded for each terminal module. The terminal modules can be arranged in any order. The terminal modules are supplied coded for the SG1 safety group. Use the light gray coding connector to set the safety group. The indentation indicates the connection to which the contact of the coding connector applies. The two dark gray coding connectors do not have any contacts. To change the coding to another safety group, proceed as follows To change the coding to the SG2 safety group: Remove the light gray coding connector (see the figure below) from the terminal module, rotate it 180 and reinsert it. To change the coding to the safety groups SG3 to SG6: First remove the dark gray coding connector for the safety group SG3/4 or SG5/6. Then insert the light gray coding connector in the corresponding position. Insert the dark gray coding connector in the free position.
State on delivery
Figure 3-9: Specifying the safety group
Example for SG2
Example for SG5
Safety note Only one safety group may be selected for each terminal module.
3-24
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Installation
Mechanical coding
When the motor starters are installed, the terminal modules are mechanically coded to ensure that, in the event of a fault, they can only be replaced by power modules with identical functions. You must therefore bear the configured layout in mind when you insert the modules.
Installing high feature/fail-safe motor starters

The motor starters are inserted in the installed terminal modules. There are two latched positions here. Depending on the position, electrical connections are made or broken at removal. The locking hook prevents you removing the motor starters under load. The following table takes the example of a high feature direct starter to describe how motor starters are installed.
Drawing 1 Procedure/Description Hold the high feature motor starter at a slight angle (see drawing) and push it into the terminal module from the front. Push firmly on the lower part until contact is established with the power bus. The high feature motor starter is still slightly tilted and the latch piece is not engaged. The locking hook is not yet engaged.
Latch piece
1 1
The high feature motor starter is mechanically insecure in this position and connected only to the power bus.
Table 3-9: Installing a high feature/fail-safe motor starter with an installation width of 65 or 130 mm
3-25
Installation
Drawing 2 3 Procedure/Description Press the latch piece and move the motor starter further towards the rail until the latch piece engages. The high feature motor starter is now in its parked position.
Parked position
The connection to the backplane bus is not yet established. There is no supply to the electronic components. The connection to the power bus is established. The contactors cannot respond, however, because there is no connection to the backplane bus and the electronic components and switching commands thus remain ineffective.
4 5
Press the latch piece again and move the motor starter further towards the DIN rail until the latch piece engages again. The high feature motor starter is now in its operating position. Operating position
4 5
The connection to the backplane bus is established. The electronic components and contactors are supplied with power. The locking hook is engaged.
The locking hook prevents the motor starter from being removed when live.
A A
Locking hook
Table 3-9: (cont.) Installing a high feature/fail-safe motor starter with an installation width of 65 or 130 mm
3-26
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Installation
Deinstalling high feature/fail-safe motor starters

A motor starter can be removed from the terminal module during operation. The feeder must be dead, e.g. circuit breaker switched off. Before you can remove the module, the latch piece must be taken beyond both latched positions, thus interrupting the electrical connections. The locking hook prevents you removing the load feeders under load. Important If you remove more than one module from the ET 200S, the station switches to STOP mode.
Danger In version 1 of the IM 151, no modules can be removed during operation. Module replacement is only permitted when the supply of the IM 151 is switched off. The following table takes the example of a high feature reversing starter to describe how motor starters are removed.
Drawing Procedure/Description Ensure that the motor starter is switched off.
1 2 1 1
1 2
Press both latches down. Move the latch piece beyond the first latched position. The connection to the bus and the supply voltages is interrupted. The motor starter is now in its parked position, i.e. the connection to the backplane bus has been interrupted and the module is (still) in a mechanically secure position (see also Table 3-4) Once you move the latch piece beyond the second latched position, the motor starter is released, the locking hook is disengaged and the motor starter is no longer mechanically secure.
Table 3-10: Deinstalling a high feature/fail-safe motor starter with an installation width of 65 or 130 mm
3-27
Installation
Drawing 3 Procedure/Description Take hold of the load feeder in both hands using the upper and lower grip recesses, and pull the motor starter out. Pull the module from the bottom in a continuous movement (approx. 30 N tensile force) at an angle out of the plug-in connection.
A
Locking hook
Table 3-10: (cont.) Deinstalling a high feature/fail-safe motor starter with an installation width of 65 or 130 mm
Note It is advisable to inform maintenance and service personnel in detail about correct handling of the motor starters before the system is handed over to ensure that the advantages of ET 200S will be available immediately in the event of replacement.
Caution Test the F-DS1e-x, F-RS1e-x after it has been replaced (see Sections 8.3, 9.3).
3-28
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Installation
Electrical connections during installation and removal

The drawings below illustrate the various installation and removal positions of a high feature/fail-safe motor starter and the resulting electrical connections.
Drawing Description Insertion or release position The high feature motor starter is electrically connected only to the power bus in this position. The locking hook is in the release position, and the load feeder is mechanically insecure in this position.
Parked position The high feature motor starter is electrically connected only to the power bus in this position. The connection to the backplane bus is not established. The supply to the contactors is established but remains ineffective because there is no connection to the ET 200S backplane bus. In this position the feeder is mechanically secured against falling out.
Table 3-11: Electrical connections during installation/removal of a high feature/fail-safe motor starter (65 mm or 130 mm)
3-29
Installation
Drawing Description Operating position The connections to the backplane bus and the supply to the electronic components and to the contactors have been established. The locking hook is engaged, which means the motor starter cannot be removed.
Table 3-11: (cont.) Electrical connections during installation/removal of a high feature/fail-safe motor starter (65 mm or 130 mm)
3-30
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Installation
3.8
Inserting the terminating module, terminating cover and caps

The last module to be installed in the ET 200S distributed I/O device is the terminating module. The ET 200S is only ready for operation when the terminating module is inserted. The terminating module is supplied with the IM 151 interface module. For more information see the SIMATIC ET 200S Distributed I/O System manual.
Terminating module
Terminating cover
In a configuration with motor starters, a terminating cover has to be fitted to the last terminal module of a potential group if it is followed by a PM-E or a terminal module, in order to ensure that open contacts are protected against dirt and that the ET 200S is "finger-proof". The terminating cover is supplied with the TM-P15 S27-01, TM-PF30 S47-B1/ C1/F1 and TM-PFX30 S47-G1 terminal modules for the power modules.
Caps
Warning In the case of the last terminal module for motor starters in a load group, the open contacts must be sealed with caps so that they are safe from touching (push the caps on firmly) before the power bus is commissioned (L1, L2, L3, N, PE). This prevents the contacts being touched and removes the danger of an electric shock (400 VAC). When you add to the ET 200S station, you must remove the caps. Use a 1 mm screwdriver to do this. Then replace the caps on the power bus of the new last motor starter. The caps are included in the delivery package of the terminal module for motor starters with power bus infeed and of the terminal block with PE/N infeed.
3-31
Installation
Concluding the line of an ET 200S configuration

You can conclude the installation of the ET 200S distributed I/O device with motor starters by inserting the following components:
Terminating module
Terminating cover
Caps to cover the power buses L1, L2, L3 and PE/N
Figure 3-10: Inserting the terminating module, terminating cover and caps
Installing the terminating module

1. Hang the terminating module on the upper rail. 2. Tilt the terminating module backwards onto the rail until you hear it engage. 3. Move the terminating module to the left until you hear it engage with the last terminal module.
Removing the terminating module

1. Use a screwdriver (5 mm) to push the locking mechanism on the last terminal module to the stop, and move the terminating module to the right. 2. Tilt the terminating module so that it comes off the rail.
3-32
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Commissioning and diagnostics
4
Page 4-2 4-6 4-7 4-8 4-11 4-12 4-13 4-19 4-23 4-36 4-41
Section 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9 4.10 4.11 Commissioning Control kit Control unit 2DI control module 2DI COM control module 2DI LC COM control module Configuration Diagnostics LED indicators Process image Switch ES motor starter
Subject
4-1
4.1
Commissioning
Important It is essential that you comply with the voltage tolerance for the U2 contactor supply up to 60 C: 20.4 V to 28.8 V (does not apply to F-DS1e-x, F-RS1e-x).
Current setting
Standard motor starters with 45/90 mm installation width (see Figure 4-1): Use a screwdriver to adjust the set current for overload tripping on the scale of the circuit breaker before you put the motor starter into operation. Note the two possible setting marks: - Dash marking: Setting mark for the circuit breaker with reversing starters or spacing modules - Triangle marking: Setting mark for the circuit breaker in side-by-side installation.
A
Ie
360 ok
Figure 4-1: Current setting
Warning The adjusting knob can be rotated 360 clockwise. You can only turn it back within the setting range.
In the case of high feature/fail-safe motor starters with an installation width of 65/130 mm: Parameterize the set current by means of the software.
4-2
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
External short-circuit protection

Safety note External short-circuit protection If the short-circuit current at the installation position of the motor starter can exceed the rated short-circuit breaking capacity (50 kA) of the circuit breaker or starter protection switch, you must provide additional external short-circuit protection (fuse or circuit breaker).
Overload tripping test

Only standard motor starters with 45/90 mm installation width You can test overload tripping. To do this, proceed as follows: 1. Switch the toggle switch from 0 to 1. 2. Put a screwdriver in the test opening and push it to the left. Overload tripping works when the toggle switch moves from 1 to 0.
Scale for current setting
Toggle switch of the circuit breaker Test opening
45/90 mm installation width

Figure 4-2: Overload tripping test
4-3
After overload or short-circuit tripping

Standard motor starters with 45/90 mm installation width: After overload or short-circuit tripping during operation, you must reset the circuit breaker.
1. Switch the toggle switch from 0 to 1. 2. Check that the contactor is working.
In the case of high feature/fail-safe motor starters with an installation width of 65/130 mm:
After short-circuit tripping (knob switch of the starter protection switch is between 0 and 1), you must turn the knob switch all the way to 0 (reset function) and then back to 1. After overload tripping (starter protection switch not tripped), there are two ways of resetting overload tripping: a) Using the knob switch on the motor starter in situ: Turn the knob switch from 1 to 0 and then back from 0 to 1 within 2 seconds. b) Using remote reset: By means of a rising edge at the output DO 0.3.
Disconnecting a load from the power supply

By switching the toggle switch on the circuit breaker or the knob switch on the starter protection switch from 1 to 0 you can electrically isolate a connected load from the mains.
Wiring of the contactors with diodes not permitted

The contactors of the motor starters must not be wired with diodes, because Zener diodes are already integrated as surge suppression and additional diodes would thus prolong the switch-off times.
Reversing starters
Use the user program to ensure before a change of direction that the drive is switched to "STOP" mode and remains in stop until the motor has stopped turning.
4-4
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Preventing unauthorized persons from switching on

You can prevent the motor starter from being switched on without authorization by attaching a padlock (with a bow diameter of 3.5 to 4.5 mm) at position 0 of the toggle switch of the circuit breaker in standard motor starters of the pulled-out lug of the knob of the starter protection switch in high feature/fail-safe motor starters
3.5 mm to 4.5 mm
Standard motor starter
Motor starter (high feature/ fail-safe)
Figure 4-3: Preventing unauthorized persons from switching on
This protection loses its effect if a locked motor starter is replaced by an unlocked motor starter. To ensure isolation, we therefore recommend that you remove the motor starter and affix a padlock to the terminal module.
Opening for padlock to prevent installation of motor starters
Terminal module 45 mm Installation width
Terminal module 65 mm Installation width
Figure 4-4: Lock in the terminal module preventing unauthorized persons from switching on
4-5
4.2
Control kit
The control kit is intended only for standard motor starters with installation widths of 45 and 90 mm. The control kit is for the manual operation of the contactors for initial operation and for troubleshooting.
Note
Before connecting the control kit to the contactor or removing it again, always deenergize the motor starter in order to avoid unnecessary wear on the contacts of the contactor.
The load can be switched on and off only by means of the power circuit breaker.
Warning Do not use the control kit in conjunction with safety-oriented applications (SIGUARD with power module PM-D F1 to 5) or motor starters with brake control modules xB1 to xB4.
4-6
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
4.3
Control unit
The control unit is intended only for standard motor starters with installation widths of 45 and 90 mm. The control unit is for direct drive of the contactor coils of ET 200S devices (manual control) for commissioning, servicing, and troubleshooting purposes.
Installation
Set the control unit cable end up on the open coil auxiliary connections of the ET 200S contactor and press it in until seated.
Warning
Do not use the control unit in conjunction with safety-oriented applications (SIGUARD with power module PM-D F1 to 5) or motor starters with brake control modules xB1 to xB4.
Wiring
Use non-overlapping switching elements for the "manual/automatic" selector switch. The cable of the control unit is 1 m in length. Wire the control unit in accordance with the wiring diagram below.
A1+ Autom. / Manual to other motor starters Manual ON Manual ON Control unit U2 24 VDC
4/11 Terminal module TM-P15 S27-01 PM-D
ET 200S bus AUX2 Motor starters DS... / RS...
K1 A25/12
K2 AUX3
Figure 4-5: Wiring diagram for control unit
4-7
4.4
2DI control module

The 2DI control module is intended only for high feature/fail-safe motor starters with installation widths of 65 and 130 mm. Note The 2DI control module can only be used with high feature motor starters with version *E04* and above.
Description
The control module 2DI has two inputs for control-cabinet signals; these inputs can be parameterized by means of the motor starter on which the module is mounted. Each input has a green LED which indicates the status. The signal states of the inputs are as follows:
LED IN3, 4 Off Green Status
M 1 2 3 4 L+ 24 VDC Input 3 Input 4
Low signal High signal
Table 4-1: Signal states, control module 2DI
NO or NC switching elements or 2-wire or 3-wire sensors (PNP) can be connected to the inputs.
Warning The inputs are not floating and do not have a diagnostic message for faults such as: wire break, overload and short-circuit. If any of these faults occur, simultaneous detection and execution of the input function are not possible. Consequently, the use of these elements in safety-relevant parts of the system is not permitted.
Safety note The 2DI control module can only be used in conjunction with the F-DS1e-x and F-RS1e-x (see Sections 8.3, 9.3).
4-8
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Parameter assignment
The inputs can be parameterized independently of each other for different actions. Parameterization is described in: 8.3.4 for high feature/fail-safe direct starters 8.4.5 for high feature direct soft starters 9.3.4 for high feature/fail-safe reversing starters
Installation - removal
In order to install the 2DI control module, push down the transparent cover on the front of the high feature/fail-safe motor starter. Clip the 2DI control module onto the motor starter. Remove the 2DI control module by pressing the recessed grips on each side toward each other and pulling the module off the high feature/fail-safe motor starter. After removal, push the transparent cover up to protect the connections.
Supply voltage
The 2DI control module is supplied from the U1 voltage. This applies both to connected sensors and contact elements.
Wiring
Wire the inputs in accordance with the wiring diagram below.
2-wire 4 L+ 3-wire
U1
DI 0.7 DI 0.6
3 IN4 2 IN3 1 M
Figure 4-6: Sketched wiring diagram, 2DI control module
4-9
Technical specifications, 2DI control module

Dimensions and weight Dimensions W x H x D (mm) (installed) Weight (g) Module-specific data Ambient temperature Degree of protection operation storage 0 to 60 C -40 to 80 C IP20, IEC 60529 23.8 x 45 x 23.3 approx. 15
Inputs IN3 and IN4 (terminals 2 and 3) Input IN LC (terminal 1) (only with the controle module 2DI LC COM) Input characteristic curve to IEC 1131 Low input current High input current Max. input current Input delay tin Iin Iin Type 1 <1.5 mA >5 mA max. 8 to 10 mA approx. 10 ms
Supply from U1 (terminals 1 and 4) short circuit-proof and overload-proof Operating voltage range (referenced to U1-) Current limitation for short-circuit to U1Assignment of the inputs Control module 2DI IN3 IN4 Connection cross-sections Single-core (mm2) Single-wire or finely stranded (mm2) Finely stranded with wire end ferrule (mm2) AWG cables, single- or multi-core Wiring Tool required Tightening torque (Nm) Standard screwdriver, size 1 0.4 to 0.7 1 x (0.14 to 2.5) to IEC 60947 2 x (0.14 to 1) 1 x (0.14 to 1.5) to IEC 60947 High feature motor starter/fail-safe Input 3 (DI 0.6) Input 4 (DI 0.7) 20.4 to 28.8 VDC ca. 100 mA
1 x (18 to 22)
Table 4-2: Technical specifications, 2DI control module
4-10
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
4.5

The 2DI COM control module has the same features as the 2DI control module described in Section 4.4. Only the additional PC interface is described in this section.
Description
The 2DI COM control module has an additional PC interface to connect the parameterization and diagnostic softwareSwitch ES Motor Starter (as of version 2.0). There is a short description of the software in Section 4.11. The 2DI COM control module is intended for motor starters with installation widths of 65 mm and 130 mm: High feature with order numbers ending in ...AA3 Fail-safe motor starters:
M PC interface
2 3
4 L+ 24 VDC
Input 3
Input 4
The LOGO! PC cable' (order no. 6ED1057-1AA00-0BA0) is used as a connection cable between the 2DI COM control module and the PC.
Open the dust cap on the 2DI COM control module on the corresponding motor starter to insert the cable for the connection to the PC. Insert the other end of the cable in your PC in the port for the serial interface.
4-11
4.6
2DI LC COM control Module

The control module 2DI LC COM possesses the same characteristics as the control module 2DI COM described in chapter 4.5. In this chapter only the additional input point IN LC is described.
Description
The controle module 2DI LC COM is suitable for motor starters with the modular widths 65 and 130 mm: High Feature with the order number suffix ...AA3 (revision level E02 or higher) Fail-safe motor starters (revision level E05 or higher).
PC interface
2 3
If the input point IN LC is connected to L+ DC 24 V, then the motor starter is switched to the mode manual operation local.
4 L+ 24 VDC
IN LC Input 3 Input 4
Regardless of the parameterized input function, IN3 (input point 3) for clockwise and IN4 (input point 4) for counter-clockwise operation of the motor starter are then required. In the manual operation local mode the brake is automatically disengaged by a pending ON signal (IN3/IN4). If IN LC is open, then this module behaves like the control module 2DI COM. The parameterized input measures are performed.
Warning
Switching the input point IN LC while simultaneously parameterizing the input functions of the input points 3 and 4 can lead to unforeseeable motor starter conditions (e. g. unwanted switching on and off, if the motor starter is in the final position and then switched to the manual operation local mode.
Wiring
Wire the inputs in accordance with the wiring diagram below.
2-wire 4 L+ 3-wire
U1
DI 0.7 DI 0.6
3 IN4 2 IN3 1 IN LC M
The 3-wire ground should be connected to the ground of the potential group (e.g. PM-D).
Figure 4-7: 2DI LC COM control module wiring diagram
4-12
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
4.7
Configuration
Configuring means configuring and parameterizing the ET 200S. You can find additional information in Section 7.1 of the SIMATIC ET 200S Distributed I/O System manual
The STEP 7 versions as of which the individual modules are included are listed in the table below.
Product label DS DS-x RS RS-x PM-D DC24V PM-D F1 SIGUARD PM-D F2 SIGUARD PM-D F4 SIGUARD PM-D F3 SIGUARD PM-X SIGUARD
MLFB 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA0 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA1 3RK1301-xxB00-1AA0 3RK1301-xxB00-1AA1 3RK1903-0BA00 3RK1903-1BA00 3RK1903-1BB00 3RK1903-1BC00 3RK1903-1BD00
Product brief Direct starter; electromechanical; unfused Direct starter; electromechanical; unfused; expandable Reversing starter; electromechanical; unfused Reversing starter; electromechanical; unfused; expandable Power module; PM-D; 2 x DC 24 V Power module; emergency stop; monitored start; 2 channels Power module; protective door; automatic start; 2 channels Power module; expansion board of F1/2 for another potential group Power module; expansion board of F1/2 for another potential group; time-delayed Connection module for incomingfeeder contactor; external safety circuits
STEP 7 version 5.0 SP3 5.0 SP3 5.0 SP3 5.0 SP3 5.0 SP3 5.0 SP3 5.0 SP3 5.0 SP3 5.0 SP3
3RK1903-1CB00
5.0 SP3
Table 4-3: Configuring motor starters
4-13

STEP 7 version 5.1
Product label RS1-x
MLFB 3RK1301-xxB00-1AA2
Product brief Reversing starter; electromechanical; unfused; expandable (brake, local control) Brake control module DC 24 V/4 A, DI 2 x DC 24 V local control Brake control module DC 500 V/ 0.7 A, DI 2 x DC 24 V local control Direct starter; electromechanical; unfused; expandable (brake, local control) Power module; expansion board of F1 to 4; contact replicator High feature direct starters: mechanical switching; electronic overload protection; unfused; up to 1.1 kW/ 400 V; 0.3 A to 3 A Option: Brake control modules xB1 to xB4 Control modules 2DI, 2DI COM High feature direct starters: mechanical switching; electronic overload protection; unfused; up to 3 kW/ 400 V; 2.4 A to 8 A Option: Brake control modules xB1 to xB4 Control modules 2DI, 2DI COM High feature direct starters: mechanical switching; electronic overload protection; unfused; up to 7.5 kW/ 400 V; 2.4 A up to 16 A Option: Brake control modules xB1 to xB4 Control modules 2DI, 2DI COM
xB3 DC24V/4A xB4 DC500V/0.7A DS1-x
3RK1903-0CE00 3RK1903-0CF00 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA2
5.1 5.1 5.1 SP1
PM-D F5 SIGUARD DS1e-x 0.3 to 3 A high feature
3RK1903-1BE00
5.1 SP1
3RK1301-0AB10-0AA2
5.1 SP2
DS1e-x 2.4 to 8 A high feature
3RK1301-0BB10-0AA2
5.1 SP2
DS1e-x 2.4 to 16 A high feature
3RK1301-0CB10-0AA2
5.1 SP2
Table 4-3: (cont.)Configuring motor starters
4-14
GWA-4NEB950007202-09

STEP 7 version 5.1 SP2
Product label DSS1e-x 0.3 to 3 A high feature
MLFB 3RK1301-0AB20-0AA2
Product brief High feature direct soft starter: electronic switching; electronic overload protection; unfused; up to 1.1 kW/ 400 V; 0.3 A to 3 A Option: Brake control modules xB1 to xB4 Control modules 2DI, 2DI COM High feature direct soft starter: electronic switching; electronic overload protection; unfused; up to 3 kW/ 400 V; 2.4 A to 8 A Option: Brake control modules xB1 to xB4 Control modules 2DI, 2DI COM High feature direct soft starter: electronic switching; electronic overload protection; unfused; up to 7.5 kW/ 400 V; 2.4 A up to 16 A Option: Brake control modules xB1 to 4 Control modules 2DI, 2DI COM High feature reversing starter: mechanical switching; electronic overload protection; unfused; up to 1.1 kW/400 V; 0.3 A to 3 A Option: Brake control modules xB1 to 4 Control modules 2DI, 2DI COM High feature reversing starter: mechanical switching; electronic overload protection; unfused; up to 3 kW/400 V; 2.4 A to 8 A Option: Brake control modules xB1 to 4 Control modules 2DI, 2DI COM High feature reversing starter: mechanical switching; electronic overload protection; unfused; up to 7.5 kW/400 V; 2.4 A up to 16 A Option: Brake control modules xB1 to 4 Control modules 2DI, 2DI COM
DSS1e-x 2.4 to 8 A high feature
3RK1301-0BB20-0AA2
5.1 SP2
DSS1e-x 2.4 to 16 A high feature
3RK1301-0CB20-0AA2
5.1 SP2
RS1e-x 0.3 to 3 A high feature
3RK1301-0AB10-1AA2
5.1 SP2
3RK1301-0BB10-1AA2
5.1 SP2
3RK1301-0CB10-1AA2
5.1 SP2
4-15

STEP 7 version 5.1 SP4
Product label F-DS1e-x 0.3 to 3 A high feature 1)
Product brief Safe direct starter: mechanical switching; electronic overload protection; unfused; up to 1.1 kW/400 V; 0.3 A to 3 A Option: Brake control modules xB1 to 4 Control modules 2DI, 2DI (LC) COM Safe direct starter: mechanical switching; electronic overload protection; unfused; up to 3 kW/400 V; 2.4 A to 8 A Option: Brake control modules xB1 to 4 Control modules 2DI, 2DI (LC) COM Safe direct starter: mechanical switching; electronic overload protection; unfused; up to 7.5 kW/400 V; 2.4 A to 16 A Option: Brake control modules xB1 to 4 Control modules 2DI, 2DI (LC) COM Safe reversing starter: mechanical switching; electronic overload protection; unfused; up to 1.1 kW/400 V; 0.3 A to 3 A Option: Brake control modules xB1 to 4 Control modules 2DI, 2DI (LC) COM Safe reversing starter: mechanical switching; electronic overload protection; unfused; up to 3 kW/400 V; 2.4 A to 8 A Option: Brake control modules xB1 to 4 Control modules 2DI, 2DI (LC) COM Safe reversing starter: mechanical switching; electronic overload protection; unfused; up to 7.5 kW/400 V; 2.4 A to 16 A Option: Brake control modules xB1 to 4 Control module 2DI, 2DI (LC) COM Fail-safe contact replicator Fail-safe power/expansion module
F-DS1e-x 2.4 to 8 A high feature 1)
3RK1301-0BB13-0AA2
5.1 SP4
F-DS1e-x 2.4 to 16 A high feature 1)
3RK1301-0CB13-0AA2
5.1 SP4
F-RS1e-x 0.3 to 3 A high feature 1)
3RK1301-0AB13-1AA2
5.1 SP4
3RK1301-0BB13-1AA2
5.1 SP4
3RK1301-0CB13-1AA2
5.1 SP4
F-CM PM-D F X1
1
3RK1903-3CA00 3RK1903-3DA00
5.1 SP4 5.1 SP4
) Switching to the manual operation local mode is possible with the 2DI LC COM control module, beginning with revision level 02.
4-16
GWA-4NEB950007202-09

STEP 7 version 5.2
Product label DS1e-x 0.3 to 3 A high feature1)
Product brief High feature direct starters: mechanical switching; electronic overload protection; unfused; up to 1.1 kW/ 400 V; 0.3 A to 3 A Option: Brake control modules xB1 to 4 Control modules 2DI, 2DI (LC) COM High feature direct starter: mechanical switching; electronic overload protection; unfused; up to 3 kW/ 400 V; 2.4 A to 8 A Option: Brake control modules xB1 to 4 Control modules 2DI, 2DI (LC) COM High feature direct starter: mechanical switching; electronic overload protection; unfused; up to 7.5 kW/ 400 V; 2.4 A up to 16 A Option: Brake control modules xB1 to 4 Control modules 2DI, 2DI (LC) COM High feature direct soft starter: electronic switching; electronic overload protection; unfused; up to 1.1 kW/ 400 V; 0.3 A to 3 A Option: Brake control modules xB1 to 4 Control modules 2DI, 2DI (LC) COM High feature direct soft starter: electronic switching; electronic overload protection; unfused; up to 3 kW/ 400 V; 2.4 A to 8 A Option: Brake control modules xB1 to 4 Control modules 2DI, 2DI (LC) COM High feature direct soft starter: electronic switching; electronic overload protection; unfused; up to 7.5 kW/ 400 V; 2.4 A up to 16 A Option: Brake control modules xB1 to 4 Control modules 2DI, 2DI (LC) COM
DS1e-x 2.4 to 8 A high feature1)
3RK1301-0BB10-0AA3
5.2
DS1e-x 2.4 to 16 A high feature1)
3RK1301-0CB10-0AA3
5.2
DSS1e-x 0.3 to 3 A high feature1)
3RK1301-0AB20-0AA3
5.2
3RK1301-0BB20-0AA3
5.2
3RK1301-0CB20-0AA3
5.2
1)
Communication option using the 2DI COM control module and the Switch ES Motor Starter software via the device interface on the front of the device Switching to the manual operation local mode is possible with the 2DI LC COM control module, beginning with revision level 02.
4-17

STEP 7 version 5.2
Product label RS1e-x 0.3 to 3 A high feature1)
Product brief High feature reversing starter mechanical switching; electronic overload protection; unfused; up to 1.1 kW/400 V; 0.3 A to 3 A Option: Brake control modules xB1 to 4 Control modules 2DI, 2DI (LC) COM High feature reversing starter: mechanical switching; electronic overload protection; unfused; up to 3 kW/400 V; 2.4 A to 8 A Option: Brake control modules xB1 to 4 Control modules 2DI, 2DI (LC) COM High feature reversing starter: mechanical switching; electronic overload protection; unfused; up to 7.5 kW/400 V; 2.4 A up to 16 A Option: Brake control modules xB1 to 4 Control modules 2DI, 2DI (LC) COM
RS1e-x 2.4 to 8 A high feature1)
3RK1301-0BB10-1AA3
5.2
RS1e-x 2.4 to 16 A high feature1)
3RK1301-0CB10-1AA3
5.2
xB1 xB2 DM-V15

1
Not configurable, so not included in GSD/HW Config.
) Communication option using the 2DI COM control module and the Switch ES Motor Starter software via the device interface on the front of the device Switching to the manual operation local mode is possible with the 2DI LC COM control module, beginning with revision level 02.
4-18
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
4.8
4.8.1
Diagnostics
Diagnostics and monitoring through the user program
Diagnostics and monitoring for ET 200S motor starters take place via the user program and/or the diagnostic channel of the PROFIBUS-DP bus system. You will find details of diagnostic analysis and demo programs using STEP 5 and STEP 7 in the SIMATIC ET 200S Distributed I/O System manual, Section 6.6. The S7 blocks FB125 and FC125 are available for diagnostic analysis in the user program. The S7 blocks and the accompanying descriptions are available as free downloads from: http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/de/387257 http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/de/5362473 In the following tables you will find the respective error types and their meanings as a supplement to the channel-based diagnostics.
Power module fault types

Power modules PM-D PM-D F2 PM-D F3 PM-D F4 PM-D F5 F-CM 1)
1) 1) 1) 1)
Fault type 01001: Fault
Meaning Module fault has occurred
Remedy Replace the module
PM-D F1 1)
Check whether EMERGENCY STOP was unlatched with ON circuit jumpered 10001: No supply voltage U1 or U2 not measurable or too low Correct the process wiring. Check the voltage supply
PM-D PM-D F1 1) PM-D F2 1) PM-D F3 1) PM-D F4 1) PM-D F5 1) F-CM 1) PM-D F X1 PM-D PM-D PM-D PM-D PM-D F1 F2 F3 F4 F5
1) 1) 1) 1) 1)
11000: Actuator shutdown
Safety relay OFF
Press ON button to acknowledge
PM-D F1 1) PM-D F2 1)
11001: Safety-oriented shutdown
EMERGENCY STOP actuated or crossconnection has occurred between the lines of the EMERGENCY STOP
Rectify the cause of the shutdown e. g. reset EMERGENCY STOP rec, tify cross-connection.
) Fault type is represented correctly only as of release status 5 of the IM 151.
Table 4-4: Power module fault types
4-19
Expansion module fault types

Expansion modules Brake control xB3 xB4 Fault type 00100: Fault Meaning Brake overload Remedy Rectify overload
Table 4-5: Expansion module fault types
Motor starter fault types

The table below is applicable for the standard motor starters, up to 5.5 kW.
Motor starters Direct starters DS DS-x DS-x1 Reversing starters RS RS-x RS-x1 Fault type 01001: Fault 11000: Actuator shutdown Meaning Contactor jammed or welded Circuit breaker tripped Remedy Replace the module. Check the contactor Rectify the cause of the shutdown and reset. Check the components
Table 4-6: Fault types for motor starters up to 5.5 kW
4-20
GWA-4NEB950007202-09

The table below is applicable to high feature/fail-safe motor starters up to 7.5 kW.
Motor starters Direct starters DS1e-x, DSS1e-x F-DS1e-x Reversing starters RS1e-x F-RS1e-x Fault type 00001: Short-circuit (F1) 1) 00100: Overload (F4) 00111: Upper limit violated (F7) 01000: Lower limit violated (F8) 01001: Fault (F9) 10000: Parameterization error (F16) 11000: Actuator shutdown (F24) Meaning/cause Starter protection switch tripped Thermal motor model overload Ie upper current limit violated Remedy Rectify short-circuit.
Allow the motor to cool down Check the motor's current consumption Check the set current limits
Ie lower current limit violated
Internal failure/device fault Switching element defective Invalid parameter value
Switch supply voltage U1 off and on; replace the motor starter if the fault persists. Check parameter values.
Asymmetry Motor blocked Residual current detected or in conjunction with another type of fault in this table EMERGENCY STOP
Check phases L1 to L3. Clear stalled rotor. Check main phases L1 to L3 for interruption.
11001: Safety-oriented tripping (F25) 2)

1
Remove the cause of the emergency stop
) modified behavior of the starter circuit-breaker for motor starters with the order number ...AA3 with product status E02 and product status E05 for fail-safe motor starters. If the starter circuit-breaker is switch to the O/TRIPPED state with the starter (DI 0.0 and DI 0.1 = 0) turned off, then the diagnosis short circuit will not be generated. During powerup, a starter circuit-breaker in the O/TRIPPED position also does not generate the diagnosis short circuit. If the starter circuit-breaker is tripped (by a short-circuit or by switching to the the position iO/TRIPPED) with the motor (DI 0.0 and DI 0.1 = 1) driven, then up until now the diagnosis short-circuit was generated. 2 ) is only applicable to F-DS1e-x, F-RS1e-x
Table 4-7: Fault types for motor starters up to 7.5 kW
4-21

Motor starters Direct starters DS1e-x, DSS1e-x F-DS1e-x Reversing starters RS1e-x F-RS1e-x 00101 Overload switching element (F5) Fault type 11010: External fault (F26) Meaning/cause Remedy
Input tripping Eliminate the external fault Input tripping limit (withdraw from limit position, for position example) Process image error Start in opposite direction of (RS1e-x only: simultarotation neous actuation of Actuate in only one direction of motor clockwise and rotation. motor counterclockwise). Thermal motor model is at >178 % load. Shutdown as device protection if "Thermal motor model" parameter setting = warning. DSS1e-x startup current overshoot I>5xIe Check system configuration
Increase starting time Reduce starting voltage.
Table 4-7: (cont.)Fault types for motor starters up to 7.5 kW
Note The group error bit is deleted when the cause of tripping has been eliminated and the signal acknowledged with "Trip Reset" (DO 0.3 or by turning the knob on the starter protection switch from 1 to 0 and back to 1). Exception - device fault: This can only be acknowledged by switching the supply voltage off/on (module replacement is recommended).
Note (Only for F-DS1e-x and F-RS1e-x). An emergency stop always generates an error of the type F24 and F25. An emergency stop does not have to be acknowledged on the motor starter with a Trip Reset.
4-22
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Commissioning and diagnostics 4.8.2 Diagnosis by LEDs

The LEDs on the power modules and on the direct and reversing starters display the status of the relevant modules.
Note If a power module (PM-D, PM-D F1 to 5, PM-D F X1, F-CM) returns a diagnostic message of the type "Error" or "Sensor or load voltage missing", the diagnostic messages of the modules downstream from the power module as far as the next power module are suppressed.
4.9
4.9.1
LED indicators
Diagnosis of the PM-D power module
SF PWR CON
Group error Power U1 Contactor U2
Red Green Green
LEDs SF 1) Off Red Red Red Red PWR Green Green Off Green Off CON Green Green Green Off Off
Status/Cause/Remedy
Normal operation Group error No supply voltage U1 for electronic components No supply voltage U2 for contactors No supply voltages U1 and U2
1) Status of the LEDs in this form only when group diagnostics activated Table 4-8: LED status and error displays on the PM-D power module
4-23
Commissioning and diagnostics 4.9.2 Diagnosis of the PM-D F1 power module
SF PWR CON STAT
Group error Power (electronics supply U1) Contactor (contactor supply U 2) Status indicator for safety relay
Red Green Green Red/green
LEDs SF 1) PWR CON STAT
Safety relay
EMERGENCY STOP switch Not actuated

2)
ON button
Status/Cause/Remedy
Off Red Red
Green Green Green
Green Green Green
Green Green Off
On On Off
Once actuated
2)
Normal operation Bus fault Safety relay switched off. Press the ON button to start. Switch-on not possible: Reset EMERGENCY STOP . If the status LED goes red again there is a cross-circuit in the EMERGENCY STOP system (rectify the external fault) or the power module is defective. (Replace the device). EMERGENCY STOP unlatched and ON circuit closed or power module defective: replace the device. No supply voltage U1 for electronics. No supply voltage U2 for motor starter. No supply voltages U1, U2
Not actuated actuated
Not actuated
2)
Red
Green
Green
Red
Off
Red
Green
Green
Red
Off
Not actuated
2)
Red Red Red

1 2
Off Green Off
Green Off Off
Red
2)
Off
2)
2)
2)
2)
2)
Red
Off
2)
2)
) Status of the LEDs in this form only when group diagnostics is activated ) Not relevant
Table 4-9: LED status and error displays on the SIGUARD PM-D F1 power module
4-24
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
SF PWR CON STAT
LEDs SF 1) Off PWR Green CON Green STAT Green
Safety relay
Protective door switch Closed
ON button
Status/Cause/Remedy
On
Once actuated (jumpered)

2)
Normal operation
Red Red
Green Green
Green Green
Green Off
On Off
2)
Bus fault Safety relay switched off. Press the ON button to start. Switch-on not possible: close protective doors. If the status LED goes red again there is a cross-circuit in the sensor system (rectify the external fault) or the power module is defective. (Replace the device). Power module defective: replace the device. No supply voltage U1 for electronics. No supply voltage U2 for motor starter. No supply voltages U 1, U2
Closed
Not actuated
2)
Red
Green
Green
Red
Off
Open
Red Red Red Red
Green Off Green Off

2) Not relevant
Green Green Off Off
Red Red
2)
Off Off
2)
Closed
2)
2)
2)
2)
2)
Red
Off
2)
2)
1) Status of the LEDs in this form only when group diagnostics is activated
4-25
SF PWR CON STAT
LEDs SF 1) Off Red Red Red Red Red Red PWR Green Green Green Green Off Green Off
2) Not relevant
Safety relay STAT Green Green Off Red Red

2)
Status/Cause/Remedy
CON Green Green Green Green Green Off Off
On On On/off Off Off

2)
Normal operation Bus fault Timeout or safety relay switched off. Power module defective: replace the device. No supply voltage U1 for electronics. No supply voltage U2 for motor starter. No supply voltages U1, U2
Red
Off
1) Status of the LEDs in this form only when group diagnostics is activated
4-26
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
SF PWR CON STAT
LEDs SF 1) Off Red Red Red Red Red Red

1 2
Safety relay STAT Green Green Off Red Red

2)
Status/Cause/Remedy
PWR Green Green Green Green Off Green Off
CON Green Green Green Green Green Off Off
On On Off Off Off

2)
Normal operation Bus fault Safety relay switched off. Power module defective: replace the device. No supply voltage U1 for electronics. No supply voltage U2 for motor starter. No supply voltages U1, U2
Red
Off
) Status of the LEDs in this form only when group diagnostics is activated ) Not relevant
4-27
SF PWR STAT
Group error Power (electronics supply U1) Status indicator for safety relay
Red Green Red/green
LEDs SF 1) Off Red Red Red Red PWR Green Green Green Green Off STAT Green Green Off Red Red On On Off Off Off
Safety relay
Status/Cause/Remedy
Normal operation Bus fault Safety relay switched off. Power module defective: replace the device. No supply voltage U1 for electronics.
1) Status of the LEDs in this form only when group diagnostics is activated Table 4-13: LED status and error displays on the SIGUARD PM-D F5 power module
4.9.7
Diagnosis of the PM-X connection module

LED SF Off Red Status Normal operation Group error
Table 4-14: Diagnosis of the PM-X connection module
4-28
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Commissioning and diagnostics 4.9.8 Diagnosis of the PM-D F X1 fail-safe power/expansion module
SF PWR SGx
Group error Power (electronics supply U1) Status display for SG1 to SG6
Red Green Green
LEDs SF 1) Off Red Red PWR Green Green Off Green Off SGx
Status/Cause/Remedy
Normal operation Bus fault No supply voltage U1 for electronic components. Emergency stop not activated Normal operation Emergency stop on SGx bus Bus not wired (unused) Wire break at SGx input
) Status of the LEDs in this form only when group diagnostics is activated
Table 4-15: Status and error displays with LEDs on the fail-safe PM-D F X1 power/expansion module
4-29
Commissioning and diagnostics 4.9.9 Diagnosis of the fail-safe F-CM contact replicator
SF PWR STAT
Group error Power (electronics supply U1) Status indicator for safety relay
Red Green Red/green
LEDs SF 1) Off Red Red Red Red PWR Green Green Green Green Off STAT Green Green Off Red Red On On Off Off Off
Safety relay
Status/Cause/Remedy
Normal operation Bus fault Safety relay switched off. F-CM defective: replace the device. No supply voltage U1 for electronic components.
1) Status of the LEDs in this form only when group diagnostics is activated Table 4-16: Status and error displays with LEDs on the fail-safe F-CM contact replicator
4-30
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Commissioning and diagnostics 4.9.10 Diagnosis of the standard DS, DS-x, DS1-x, RS, RS-x and RS1-x motor starters
SF C-STAT
Group error Contactor status
Red Red/green/ yellow
LEDs Status/Cause/Remedy SF 1) C-STAT Operating status Off Off Yellow Off Motor on (clockwise or counterclockwise in the case of the RS, RS-x, and RS1-x) Motor off Device fault Red Green Contactor jammed or coil defective (cannot be switched on) In the case of a DS1-x and RS1-x, the limit switch might be actuated in conjunction with xB3 or xB4 Red Red Red Off Contactor welded Contactor defective System fault Red Red Off Yellow Circuit breaker tripped, contactor opened Circuit breaker tripped, contactor closed General fault via bus Red Off/yellow Header module sets group error
1) Status of the LEDs in this form only when group diagnostics is activated Table 4-17: LED status and error displays on the standard motor starters (5.5 kW)
4-31
Commissioning and diagnostics 4.9.11 Diagnosis of the high feature DS1e-x, RS1e-x and DSS1e-x motor starters Fail-safe F-DS1e-x and F-RS1e-x motor starters
Red
Group error
SF
DEVICE
Device status
Red/ green/ yellow
Red/ green/ yellow Green
Contactor status Safety group
C-STAT
SGx
(Only with F-DS1e-x and F-RS1e-x)
LEDs Status/Cause/Remedy SF 1) C-STAT Device Operating status Control by bus Off Yellow Green Motor on (clockwise or counterclockwise in the case of the RS1e-x and F-RS1e-x) Motor off Manual operation local Control using the 2DI/-2DI COM/-2DI LC COM control module Off Flickering yellow3) Flickering green3) Green Motor on (clockwise or counterclockwise in the case of the RS1e-x and F-RS1e-x) Motor off
Off
Off
Green
Off
Green
Soft starting/coasting down (only with DSS1e-x) Off Flashing yellow2) Green Motor is in soft start
1) Status of the LEDs in this form only when group diagnostics is activated 2) Flash frequency: 0.5 Hz 3) Flicker frequency: 8 to 10 Hz Table 4-18: LED status and error displays for DS1e-x, RS1e-x, DSS1e-x, F-DS1e-x and F-RS1e-x
4-32
GWA-4NEB950007202-09

LEDs SF 1) C-STAT Device Group error Category: Device fault Red Red Red Current flow without switch-on command (e.g. contactor welded, connection through thyristor) Safety shutdown due to faults in the fail-safe area Electronics defective, self-test fault (e.g. contactor control defective) Fault in the fail-safe area (defective electronic component) Category: System fault Red Green Yellow No current flow despite switch-on command (residual current detected) (e.g. contactor jammed, coil defective, no 400 V incoming supply, no load connected) Starter protection switch tripped Overload, thermal motor model Overload, switch element Motor blocked Asymmetry Current limit violated Shutdown on account of input action (e.g.: limit position shutdown by xB3, xB4 or 2DI/ -2DI COM/-2DI LC COM control module) Process image error Faulty parameter assignment Safety shutdown (SGx/U2 is missing) General warning Category: System fault Off Yellow Flashing yellow2) No power flow despite on command (residual current detected) (e.g. contactor stuck, defective coil, 400 V incoming supply missing, no load connected) Overload of thermal motor model Asymmetry Current limit violated General warning on input action (e.g. by the 2DI/-2DI COM/-2DI LC COM control module) Status/Cause/Remedy
Red
Off
Red
Red
Off
Yellow
1) Status of the LEDs in this form only when group diagnostics is activated 2) Flash frequency: 0.5 Hz 3) Flicker frequency: 8 to 10 Hz Table 4-18: (cont.)LED status and error displays for DS1e-x, RS1e-x, DSS1e-x, F-DS1e-x and F-RS1e-x
4-33

Only for F-DS1e-x and F-RS1e-x
LEDs Status/Cause/Remedy SGx Off Flashing green 1) Green Not parameterized and Emergency stop on mechanically selected bus No emergency stop and not configured or emergency stop and configured No emergency stop and configured
1) Flash frequency: 0.5 Hz Table 4-19: LED status and error displays for F-DS1e-x and F-RS1e-x
Note If two different SGx LEDs are flashing, the configuration does not correspond to the mechanically selected SG bus. Check the mechanical selection or the configuration. Running light on all SGx LEDs: Fault in the decoder for the SG bus. Remedy: replace the motor starter
4-34
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Commissioning and diagnostics 4.9.12 Diagnosis of xB3, xB4 brake control modules
SF 2 6 STAT
Group error Input limit switch, clockwise rotation Input limit switch, counterclockwise rotation Circuit state of brake
Red Green Green Yellow
LEDs SF 1) Off 2 Green 6 Green STAT Off
Status/Cause/Remedy
Limit switch 4) not activated Brake is active, motor braked Limit switch 4) not activated Brake released Limit switch 4) for clockwise rotation operated, brake active motor braked Limit switch 4) for counterclockwise rotation operated, brake active motor braked Brake overload motor braked Bus fault
Off Off
Green Off
Green Green
Yellow Off
Off
Green
Off
Off
Red Red
1
x 2) x 2)
x 2) x 2)
Yellow
3)
) Status of the LEDs in this form only when group diagnostics is activated 2 ) Circuit state is irrelevant 3) Depends on parameterization in motor starter (response to CPU/master STOP, see Sections 8.2.2, 8.3.4, 8.4.5, 9.2.2, 9.3.4) 4) With normally closed contact function
Table 4-20: LED status and fault displays for xB3, xB4
Note Brake control modules xB1 and xB2 are not active modules and therefore cannot issue diagnostic information.
4-35
4.10
4.10.1
Process image
Process image of the standard DS, DS-x, DS1-x, RS, RS-x, and RS1-x motor starters
Input signals
DI 0.0 0 1 Readiness for operation Contactor jammed or welded (device fault) Ready for operation, no problems DI 0.1 0 1 Return message from contactor Off On (clockwise/counterclockwise rotation in the case of RS, RS-x, RS1-x) Not set
DI 0.2 0 1
Circuit breaker Switched on (ON) Tripped (OFF)
DI 0.3
Output signals for DS, RS

DO 0.0 0 Signal to contactor Motor off Clockwise rotation off (in the case of RS) Motor on Clockwise rotation on (in the case of RS) Not set DO 0.1 0 Signal to contactor (RS only) Counterclockwise rotation off (RS only) Counterclockwise rotation on (RS only) Not set
DO 0.2
DO 0.3
Output signals in the case of DS-x, DS1-x, RS-x, RS1-x

DO 0.0 0 Signal to contactor Motor off Clockwise rotation off (in the case of RS-x, RS1-x) Motor on Clockwise rotation on (in the case of RS-x, RS1-x) Drive for expansion module (e.g. brake control) No drive (e.g. brake control - brake active - motor braked) Drive (e.g. brake control - brake released - motor unbraked) DO 0.1 0 Signal to contactor (RS-x, RS1-x only) Counterclockwise rotation off (RS-x, RS1-x only) Counterclockwise rotation on (RS-x, RS1-x only) Not set
DO 0.2
DO 0.3
4-36
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Commissioning and diagnostics 4.10.2 Process image of the high feature DS1e-x, RS1e-x, and DSS1e-x motor starters Fail-safe F-DS1e-x and F-RS1e-x motor starters
Input signals
DI 0.0 0 1 DI 0.1 0 1 DI 0.2 Ready (automatic) Starter cannot be operated by host/PLC Starter can be operated by host Motor on 1) Off On (clockwise/counterclockwise rotation) Group error (If one or more faults described in Table 4-7 occur, "Group error" is reported irrespective of whether the "Group diagnosis" parameter (see Sections 8.3.4, 8.4.5, 9.3.4) is set to "Disable" or "Enable"). 0 1 DI 0.3 0 1 DI 0.4 0 1 DI 0.5 0 1 DI 0.6 0 1 DI 0.7 0 1
1 2
DI 1.0
Motor current Iact 5) Bit 0
DI 1.1
Motor current Iact5) Bit 1
DI 1.2
No faults Fault General warning No warning Warning Input 1 2)

4)
DI 1.3
DI 1.4
Motor current Iact 5) Bit 4 Motor current Iact 5) Bit 5
Input 2 2)
4)
DI 1.5
Input 3 3)
4)
DI 1.6 0 1 DI 1.7 0 1
Manual operation local No manual operation local Manual operation local Ramp operation (for soft starter) Not active Active
Input 4 3)
4)
) Signal is 1 if the motor current is >18.75% of the set rated current ) From the expansion module, e.g. brake control xB3,4 (optional) 3 ) From the 2DI/-2DI COM/-2DI LC COM control module (optional) 4 ) See the following section on input behavior 5 ) See Section 8.5.2 See Section 8.5 for description of parameters
4-37
Input behavior
Inputs 1 to 4 of the fail-safe F-DS1e-x and F-RS1e-x motor starters behave in accordance with the motor starter profile of the PNO (PROFIBUS User Organisation). Inputs 1 to 4 of the high feature DS1e-x, DSS1e-x, and RS1e-x motor starters with order numbers ending in ...AA2 to version E03 behave differently to those with order numbers ending in ...AA2 as of version E04 and order numbers ending in ...AA3 when you parameterize the normally closed contact function in the process input image (PII). There is no variation in behavior for the parameterization of the inputs for the normally open contact function. The table below presents an overview of the differences:
Input parameterized for Order numbers ending in ...AA2 and up to version E03 Order numbers ending in ...AA2 and as of version E04 or order numbers ending in ...AA3
NO LED PII NC LED PII

Table 4-21: Input behavior
1 0 Not active
Not active
Active
1 0 Active
Active
Not active
1 0
Important If you replace a motor starter with a version up to E03 and an order number ending in ...AA2 with a motor starter with version E04 or above and an order number ending in ...AA2 or ...AA3, make sure you note the differences in input behavior in the user program of the PLC when you parameterize the normally closed contact function.
4-38
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Output signals
DO 0.0 0 1 DO 0.1 0 1 DO 0.2 Motor cw Motor off Motor on Motor ccw (for RS1e-x, F-RS1e-x) Motor off Motor on Drive for expansion module (e.g. brake control) No drive (e.g. brake control - brake active - motor braked) Drive (e.g. brake control - brake released - motor unbraked) Trip Reset (edge 0 > 1) Trip Reset inactive Trip Reset active Emergency start Not active Active Self-test (edge 0 > 1) (F-DS1e-x, F-RS1e-x only) Not active Active Not supported DO 1.6 Not used DO 1.5 Not used DO 1.4 Not used DO 1.3 Not used DO 1.2 Not used DO 1.1 Not used DO 1.0 Not used
DO 0.3 0 1 DO 0.4 0 1 DO 0.5 0 1 DO 0.6
DO 0.7
Not used
DO 1.7
Not used
4-39
Commissioning and diagnostics 4.10.3 Process image of xB3 and xB4 brake control modules
Input signals
DI 0.0 0 1 Input 1 No current flow Current flow present DI 0.1 0 1 Input 2 No current flow Current flow present
Output signals
DO 0.0 0 1 Reserved DO 0.1 0 1 Reserved -
4-40
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
4.11
Features
Switch ES Motor Starter

The diagnostics and commissioning tool Switch ES Motor Starter (version 2.0 and above) offers: Structured and tool-supported configuration of low-voltage switching devices Quick diagnosis
Local commissioning and monitoring on site such as: Parameter assignment during operation of the programmable controller and control system Observation Diagnostics and testing Factory setting Read individual phase currents as direct values Residual current detection A parameterization block can be set Integrated online help Read statistics and measured values
Application
The diagnostic and commissioning tool Switch ES Motor Starter is suitable for the following motor starters: High feature motor starters with order numbers ending in ...AA3 Fail-safe motor starters
The connection between the PC or programming device and the motor starter is set up using a LOGO! PC cable and 2DI COM/-2DI LC COM control module (see Section 4.5/4.6 for a description) that is installed on the corresponding motor starter. You can find additional information on the software in the online help.
Order numbers
You will require the following order numbers: LOGO! PC cable: 6ED1057-1AA00-0BA0 Diagnostics and commissioning tool Switch ES Motor Starter: 3ZS1 310-0CC20-0YA0 2DI COM control module: 3RK1 903-0CH10 or the control module 2DI LC COM: 3RK1 903-0CH20
4-41
4-42
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
General technical specifications
5
Page 5-1 5-2
Section 5.1 5.2
Subject Shipping and storage conditions Mechanical and climatic environmental conditions
5.1
Shipping and storage conditions

The shipping and storage conditions for motor starters meet the requirements of IEC 61131, part 2. The following information is for modules shipped and stored in their original packaging.
Type of condition Free fall Temperature Temperature variation Air pressure Relative humidity 0.35 m from -40 C to +70 C 20 K/h from 1080 to 660 hPa (corresponds to an altitude of -1000 to 3500 m) from 5 to 95 %, without condensation Permissible range
Shipping and storage conditions
Insulation resistance
Circuits with rated voltage Ue against other circuits or ground 0 V < Ue < 50 V 300 V < Ue < 600 V Test voltage in accordance with IEC 61131, part 2 500 VDC 2.6 kVDC to ground
5-1
General technical specifications
5.2
Mechanical and climatic environmental conditions

The preferred installation position is horizontal on a vertical wall. Note also the information in Section 3.4 on derating.
Installation position
Mechanical environmental conditions

Oscillations tested in accordance with IEC 60068, part 2-6 (sine) Oscillation type: - 10 Hz < f < 58 Hz - 58 Hz < f < 150 Hz Oscillation time: frequency sweeps with a rate of change of 1 octave a minute constant amplitude: 0.15 mm constant acceleration: 2 g 10 frequency sweeps per axis in each of the 3 axes arranged vertically in relation to each other
Shock tested in accordance with IEC 60068, part 2-27 (right angle) Type of shock: Intensity of shock: Direction of shock: half sine 5 g peak value, 11 ms duration 3 shocks in the +/ directions in each of the 3 axes arranged vertically in relation to each other
Climatic environmental conditions

Temperature Temperature variation Permissible rated current Relative humidity Air pressure from 5 to 95 % from 1080 to 795 hPa corresponds to an altitude of -1000 to 2000 m test: 10 ppm; 4 days 1 ppm; 4 days See installation rules in Section 3.2 ff.
Contaminant concentration
SO2 : < 0.5 ppm rel. humidity < 60 %, no condensation H2S: < 0.1 ppm rel. humidity < 60 %, no condensation
5-2
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Terminal modules
6
Subject Page 6-2 6-4 6-6 6-14
Section 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4
Assignment of the terminal modules TM-P15 S27-01 terminal module for PM-D power module Terminal modules for motor starters Power bus
6-1
Terminal modules
6.1
Assignment of the terminal modules

The following tables show which power modules, motor starters, expansion modules, and fail-safe modules you can use with the various terminal modules. You can find information on the terminal modules in the following chapters: Chapter 10 for the safety integrated SIGUARD system Chapter 11 for expansion modules such as the brake control module Chapter 12 for fail-safe modules
Power modules TM-P15 S27-01 ... -B0 3RK1903 PM-D SIGUARD PM-D F1 SIGUARD PM-D F2 SIGUARD PM-D F3 SIGUARD PM-D F4 SIGUARD PM-D F5 SIGUARD PM-X
Table 6-1: Assignment of the terminal modules for power modules
Terminal modules TM-PF30 S47 ... -B1 -1AA00 ... -C0 -1AC10 ... -C1 -1AC00 ... -D0 -1AD10 -1AB00 TM-X15 S27-01
-0AA00 X
-1AA10
X X
X X X X X X X X
6-2
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Terminal modules
Motor starters TM-DS45 -S32 TM-DS45 -S31 3RK1903 Standard DS, DS-x, and DS1-x direct starters High feature DS1e-x direct starter High feature DSS1e-x direct soft starter Standard RS, RS-x, RS1-x reversing starters High feature RS1e-x reversing starter -0AB00 -0AB10 X
Terminal modules TM-RS90 -S32 TM-RS90 -S31 -0AC00 -0AC10 TM-DS65 -S32 TM-DS65 -S31 -0AK00 -0AK10 TM-RS130 -S32 TM-RS130 -S31 -0AL00 -0AL10
X X X X
Table 6-2: Assignment of the terminal modules for motor starters
Fail-safe modules
Terminal modules TM-FDS65 TM-FRS130 TM-PFX30 TM-FCM30 -S32 -S32 S47-G1 -S47 TM-FDS65 TM-FRS130 TM-PFX30 -S31 -S31 S47-G0
3RK1903 Fail-safe F-DS1e-x direct starter Fail-safe F-RS1e-x reversing starter PM-D F X1 power/expansion module F-CM contact replicator
-3AC00 -3AC10 X
-3AD00 -3AD10
-3AE00 -3AE10
-3AB10
X X X
PM-D F PROFIsafe power module see the ET 200S Distributed I/O System, Fail-Safe Modules manual
Table 6-3: Assignment of the terminal modules for fail-safe modules
6-3
Terminal modules
6.2
Features
TM-P15 S27-01 terminal module for PM-D power module

The terminal module consists of a support and a terminal block. TM-P15 S27-01 terminal module for PM-D power module Connection by screw-type terminal Prewiring of the terminal module AUX1 cable fed through without terminals
Terminal block
Support
Color coding labels

1. You can apply the color coding labels in the opening provided next to the terminal directly from the strip. 2. Push the color coding labels onto the terminal module with your finger.
Looping the potentials through

Terminals 1/8, 2/9, 4/11, 5/12, 6/13 and 7/14 are bridged in the terminal module and can be used to loop the potentials through.
Terminal assignment
The following table illustrates the terminal assignment of the TM-P15 S27-01 terminal module:
View Terminal 1/8
1 8
Meaning
L+ M A1+ A2AUX2 AUX3 AUX1
2/9 4/11 5/12
U1: Power supply for electronic components URATED = 24 VDC U2: Power supply for contactor URATED = 24 VDC for SIGUARD (see Section 10.6.6) for SIGUARD (see Section 10.6.6) Fed through without terminals
1 1 1 2
6/13 7/14
6 1 3 1 4
Table 6-4: Terminal assignment of the TM-P15 S27-01 terminal module for the PM-D power module
6-4
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Terminal modules
Technical specifications - TM-P15 S27-01

Dimensions and weight Installation dimensions W x H x D (mm) Depth with power module (mm) Weight (g) Insulation voltages and rated currents Insulation voltage Rated operating voltage Rated operating current Connection cross-sections Single-core (mm2) Finely stranded with wire end ferrule (mm2) AWG cables, single- or multi-core Wiring Tool required Tightening torque (Nm)
Table 6-5: Technical specifications - TM-P15 S27-01
15 x 196.5 x 102 117.5 approx. 175
500 V 24 VDC 10 A
1 x (0.14 to 2.5) to IEC 60947 1 x 2.5 1 x (0.14 to 1.5) to IEC 60947
1 x (18 to 22)
Standard screwdriver, size 1 0.4 to 0.7
6-5
Terminal modules
6.3
6.3.1
Terminal modules for motor starters

TM-DS45 terminal modules for standard DS, DS-x and DS1-x direct starters
Features
TM-DS45... terminal modules for standard DS, DS-x and DS1-x direct starters
with TM-DS45-S32 power bus infeed with TM-DS45-S31 power bus throughfeed
Connection by screw-type terminals Prewiring possible AUX1 cable fed through without terminals Expansion possible with PE/N terminal block
TM-DS45 terminal modules
To load max. 5.5 kW / 12 A

-S
32
Infeed max. 40 A
-S
31
L2
Supply voltage U1 for electr. components AUX1 Supply voltage U2 for contactors Coding
L3 L1 N
Terminal block for power bus Terminal blocks PE/N PE
Warning In the case of the last terminal module for motor starters in a load group, the open contacts must be sealed with caps so that they are safe from touching (push the caps on firmly) before the power bus is commissioned (L1, L2, L3, N, PE). This prevents the contacts being touched and removes the danger of an electric shock (400 VAC).
Figure 6-1: TM-DS45 terminal modules for standard DS, DS-x and DS1-x direct starters
Important Install the PE/N terminal blocks before connecting the terminal modules for motor starters.
6-6
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Terminal modules 6.3.2 TM-DS65 terminal modules for the high feature DS1e-x direct starter and the high feature DSS1e-x direct soft starter
Features
TM-DS65... terminal modules for the high feature DS1e-x direct starter and the high feature DSS1e-x direct soft starter
with TM-DS65-S32 power bus infeed with TM-DS65-S31 power bus throughfeed
Connection by screw-type terminals Prewiring possible AUX1 cable fed through without terminals Expansion possible with PE/N terminal block Fail-safe-kit functionality is integrated
TM-DS65 terminal modules

Supply voltage U1 for electr. components To load max. 7 kW / 16 A .5 Infeed max. 50 A
32 -S
-S
31
AUX1 L2 RF1, 2 Supply voltage U2 for contactors L3 L1 N Terminal blocks PE/N PE Warning In the case of the last terminal module for motor starters in a load group, the open contacts must be sealed with caps so that they are safe from touching (push the caps on firmly) before the power bus is commissioned (L1, L2, L3, N, PE). This prevents the contacts being touched and removes the danger of an electric shock (400 VAC).
Figure 6-2: TM-DS65 terminal modules for DS1e-x high feature direct starter and DSS1e-x soft starter
AUX2, 3 Coding Terminal block for power bus
6-7
Terminal modules 6.3.3 TM-FDS65 terminal modules for fail-safe F-DS1e-x direct starters
Features
TM-FDS65 terminal modules for fail-safe F-DS1e-x direct starters
with TM-FDS65 S32 power bus infeed with TM-FDS65 S31 power bus throughfeed
Connection by screw-type terminals Prewiring possible AUX1 cable fed through without terminals Coding connector for SG1 to SG6 Expansion possible with PE/N terminal block The fail-safe modules are identified by yellow labeling strips.
TM-FDS65 terminal modules

Coding connector for SG1 to SG6 To load max. 7 kW / 16 A .5 Infeed max. 50 A
32
Supply voltage U1 for electronic components

-S
-S
31
AUX1 L2 SG1/2 SG3/4 SG5/6 L3 Coding L1 N Terminal blocks PE/N PE Warning In the case of the last terminal module for motor starters in a load group, the open contacts must be sealed with caps so that they are safe from touching (push the caps on firmly) before the power bus is commissioned (L1, L2, L3, N, PE). This prevents the contacts being touched and removes the danger of an electric shock (400 VAC).
Figure 6-3: TM-FDS65 terminal modules for fail-safe F-DS1e-x direct starters
Terminal block for power bus
6-8
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Terminal modules 6.3.4 Technical specifications, TM-DS45 and TM-DS65/TM-FDS65

TM-DS45 45 x 264 x 100 306 127 152 TM-DS65/TM-FDS65 65 x 290 x 100 332 150 -
Dimensions and weight Installation dimensions W x H x D (mm) Height with PE/N terminal block (mm) Depth with motor starter (mm) Depth with motor starter and fail-safe kit (safety integrated SIGUARD system) (mm) Depth with motor starter and control module 2DI (mm) Weight (g) Shock protection Degree of protection as per IEC 60529
approx. 305
173 approx. 400
IP20, (IP00 in terminal area of L1 - L3, T1 - T3, N and PE)
Rated voltages, currents and frequencies for the power bus Rated insulation voltage Ui Rated operating voltage Ue Rated impulse strength Uimp 6 kV Rated operating current Ie Rated frequency Connection cross-sections Single-core (mm2) Finely stranded with wire end ferrule (mm2) 2 x (1 to 2.5) or 2 x (2.5 to 6) 1 x 10 or 2 x (1 to 2.5 ) or 2 x (2.5 to 6) in acc. with IEC 60947 2 x (14 to 10) 40 A 50/60 Hz 50 A 690 V 500 VAC
AWG cables, single- or multi-core With 3-phase feed-in terminal, if necessary Single-core or multi-core (mm2) Finely stranded with wire end ferrule (mm2) AWG cables, single- or multi-core Wiring Tool required Tightening torque (Nm)
1 x 2.5 to 25 1 x 2.5 to 25 1 x 12 to 4
Standard screwdriver, size 2 and Pozidriv 2 2.0 to 2.5
Table 6-6: Technical specifications - TM-DS45 and TM-DS65/TM-FDS65
6-9
Terminal modules 6.3.5 TM-RS90 terminal modules for RS, RS-x, RS1-x standard reversing starters
Features
TM-RS90... terminal modules for RS, RS-x, RS1-x standard reversing starters
with TM-RS90-S32 power bus infeed with TM-RS90-S31 power bus throughfeed
Connection by screw-type terminal Prewiring possible AUX1 cable fed through without terminals Expansion possible with two PE/N terminal blocks
TM-RS90 terminal modules

To load max. 5.5 kW / 12 A
-S
32
3 -S
Infeed max. 40 A
L2 Terminal blocks PE/N L3 L1
Supply voltage U1 for electr. modules AUX1 Supply voltage U2 for contactors Coding
N
PE Terminal block for power bus
Figure 6-4: TM-RS90 terminal modules for RS, RS-x, RS1-x standard reversing starters
6-10
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Terminal modules 6.3.6 TM-RS130 terminal modules for RS1e-x high feature reversing starter
Features
TM-RS130... terminal modules for RS1e-x high feature reversing starter
with TM-RS130-S32 power bus infeed with TM-RS130-S31 power bus throughfeed
Connection by screw-type terminal Prewiring possible AUX1 cable fed through without terminals Expansion possible with two PE/N terminal blocks Fail-safe-kit functionality is integrated
TM-RS130 terminal modules

To load max. 7 kW / 16 A .5
3 -S
Supply voltage U1 for electronic modules
-S
31
AUX1 Infeed max. 50 A L3 L1 L2 RF1, 2 Supply voltage U2 for contactors AUX2, 3 Coding Terminal blocks PE/N PE
Figure 6-5: TM-RS130 terminal modules for RS1e-x high feature reversing starter
6-11
Terminal modules 6.3.7 TM-FRS130 terminal modules for fail-safe F-RS1e-x reversing starters
Features
TM-FRS130 terminal modules for fail-safe F-RS1e-x reversing starters
with TM-FRS130 S32 power bus infeed with TM-FRS130-S31 power bus throughfeed
Connection by screw-type terminal Prewiring possible AUX1 cable fed through without terminals Coding connector for SG1 to SG6 Expansion possible with two PE/N terminal blocks The fail-safe modules are identified by yellow labeling strips.
TM-FRS130 terminal modules

To load max. 7 kW / 16 A .5 Coding connector for SG1 to SG6
3 -S
Supply voltage U1 for electronic modules
-S
31
Infeed max. 50 A
AUX1 L2 SG1/2 SG3/4 L3 L1 SG5/6 Coding Terminal blocks PE/N PE
Figure 6-6: TM-FRS130 terminal modules for fail-safe F-RS1e-x reversing starters
6-12
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Terminal modules 6.3.8 Technical specifications - TM-RS90 and TM-RS130/TM-FRS130

TM-RS90 90 x 264 x 100 306 127 152 TM-RS130/TM-FRS130 130 x 290 x 100 332 150 -
Dimensions and weight Installation dimensions W x H x D (mm) Height with PE/N (mm) Depth with motor starter (mm) Depth with motor starter and fail-safe kit (safety integrated SIGUARD system) (mm) Depth with motor starter and control module 2DI (mm) Weight (g) Shock protection Degree of protection as per IEC 60529
approx. 600
173 approx. 800
IP20, (IP00 in terminal area of L1 - L3, T1 - T3, N and PE)
Rated voltages, currents and frequencies for the power bus Rated insulation voltage Ui Rated operating voltage Ue Rated impulse strength Uimp 6 kV Rated operating current Ie Rated frequency Connection cross-sections Single-core (mm2) Finely stranded with wire end ferrule (mm2) 2 x (1 to 2.5) or 2 x (2.5 to 6) 1 x 10 or 2 x (1 to 2.5 ) or 2 x (2.5 to 6) in acc. with IEC 60947 2 x (14 to 10) 40 A 50/60 Hz 50 A 690 V 500 VAC
AWG cables, single- or multi-core With 3-phase feed-in terminal, if necessary Single-core or multi-core (mm2) Finely stranded with wire end ferrule (mm2) AWG cables, single- or multi-core Wiring Tool required Tightening torque (Nm)
1 x 2.5 to 25 1 x 2.5 to 25 1 x 12 to 4
Standard screwdriver, size 2 and Pozidriv 2 2.0 to 2.5
Table 6-7: Technical specifications - TM-RS90 and TM-RS130/TM-FRS130
6-13
Terminal modules
6.4
Features
Power bus
The power bus consists of components that have fixed links to the terminal modules for the motor starters. The power bus distributes the power in a load group. The maximum current-carrying capacity at 60 C is:
40 A for standard motor starters in terminal modules with an installation width of 45 mm or 90 mm 50 A for high feature/fail-safe motor starters in terminal modules with an installation width of 65 mm or 130 mm
The wiring is done automatically when the terminal module is installed. Terminal blocks with an installation width of 45 or 90 mm and 65 or 130 mm
with power bus infeed (for a load group) and motor connection with power bus throughfeed and motor connection
Power bus: 3 pins (L1, L2, L3), expandable to 5 pins with PE/N terminal block.
View
Terminal module Opening for padlock to prevent installation of Motor starters
Motor connection Power bus Infeed
PE/N terminal block (not in delivery package)
Figure 6-7: TM-DS45 terminal block - example for DS, DS-x, DS1-x standard direct starters
6-14
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Terminal modules
PE/N terminal block accessories

A PE/N terminal block can be added to the power bus. Terminal blocks with installation widths of 45 and 65 mm are available as follows: with infeed at the beginning of a new load group (i.e. contacts on the right only). This terminal block is supplied with caps for N and PE with throughfeed (i.e. with contacts on the right and left)
PE N PE PE N N
PE
Installation width 45 mm for standard motor starters
PE
PE
PE
PE PE N
PE N
Installation width 65 mm for high feature motor starters

PE PE
with infeed
Figure 6-8: PE/N terminal block
with throughfeed
6-15
Terminal modules
Load group
All the motor starters supplied via a single power bus infeed are referred to as a load group. A load group does not have to be identical to a potential group. Within a group of motor starters supplied by the same power module, an additional power bus infeed may be required to ensure that the rated operating current (aggregate current) of the terminal modules is not exceeded. The aggregate current of the power bus is: 40 A for terminal modules with an installation width of 45 or 90 mm (for standard motor starters) 50 A for terminal modules with an installation width of 65 or 130 mm (for high feature/fail-safe motor starters)
Current flow via the power bus

The following diagram illustrates the current flow via the power bus:
To load max. 12 A 1) or 16 A 2)
T1
T2
T3
T1
T2
T3
T1
T2
T3
L2
L2
L2
L1
L2
L3 L3 L3 L3
L1
L1
L1
Infeed max. 40 A 1) or 50 A 2)
1) 2)
For installation width 45/90 mm For installation width 65/130 mm
Standard motor starter High feature/fail-safe motor starter
Figure 6-9: Current flow in the power bus
6-16
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
PM-D power module
7
Subject Page 7-2 7-3 7-4
Section 7.1 7.1.1 7.1.2
PM-D power module for motor starter Parameters Technical specifications - PM-D
7-1
PM-D power module
7.1
Features
PM-D power module for motor starter

A new potential group begins with the power module - together with the associated terminal module. The motor starters of a potential group are connected to the right of the power module. The power module conducts the voltages for supplying the electronic components to the voltage buses of the terminal modules. It does this for all the motor starters in a potential group. The PM-D monitors the voltages U1 (PWR) voltage supply for electronics and U2 (CON) voltage supply for contactor. Voltage failures are displayed and reported. Caution Power modules can be neither inserted nor removed during operation.
View
LEDs:
SF Group error
PWR (power) (U1) CON (contactor) (U2)
Figure 7-1: Power module PM-D
7-2
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
PM-D power module 7.1.1 Parameters

The following table indicates the parameter that can be set for the PM-D power module.
Parameters Action, value range Disable Enable Factory setting Applicability
Group diagnosis
Disable
Module
Table 7-1: Parameters for the PM-D power module
Group diagnosis: This parameter enables diagnostic messages (error types are listed in Section 4.8).
Note The "disable group diagnosis" parameter also suppresses the LEDs for faults.
7-3
PM-D power module 7.1.2 Technical specifications - PM-D

Dimensions and weight Installation dimensions W x H x D (mm) (incl. terminal module) Weight (g) Voltages, currents, potentials Rated control supply voltage Us Rated operating current Ie Recommended upstream short-circuit protection: Fuse Circuit breaker Insulation between U1 and U2 tested with Supply of: Motor starters Motor starters for safety integrated SIGUARD system Electronic modules Ex[i] modules Power draw from the backplane bus Status, interrupts, diagnostics Interrupts Diagnostic functions: Group error/device fault Monitoring of supply voltage for electronic components U1 (PWR) Monitoring of supply voltage for contactors U2 (CON) Diagnostic information readable
Table 7-2: Technical specifications - PM-D
15 x 196.5 x 117.5 approx. 65
20.4 to 28.8 VDC up to 60 C 10 A
gL/gG 10 A 10 A, trip characteristic B 500 V
yes no no no 10 mA
None yes red SF LED green PWR LED green CON LED yes
7-4
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Direct starters and soft starters
8
Page 8-2 8-4 8-4 8-7 8-8 8-11 8-11 8-14 8-19 8-20 8-22 8-26 8-26 8-31 8-32 8-39 8-42 8-44 8-46 8-46 8-48 8-49 8-56 8-56 8-57
Section 8.1 8.2 8.2.1 8.2.2 8.2.3 8.3 8.3.1 8.3.2 8.3.3 8.3.4 8.3.5 8.4 8.4.1 8.4.2 8.4.3 8.4.4 8.4.5 8.4.6 8.5 8.5.1 8.5.2 8.5.3 8.5.4 8.5.5 8.6 Overview
Subject
Standard direct starters DS, DS-x, DS1-x Features Parameters Technical specifications High feature DS1e-x direct starter Fail-safe F-DS1e-x direct starter Features Additional features of the F-DS1e-x Module replacement Parameters Technical specifications High feature direct soft starter DSS1e-x Physical principles Application and use Features Notes on configuration Parameters Technical specifications Description of the fixed values and parameters Permanently set values Actual motor current User-definable parameters Emergency start Trip Reset Factory setting
8-1
8.1
Overview
Three versions of the ET 200S motor starters are available: Standard series (code: DS1-x) High feature series, characterized by properties that boost system availability and improve diagnosis (code for direct starters: DS1e-x, for direct soft starters: DSS1e-x). A distinction is made between the following:
If there is no communication interface at the front, the order number ends in: ...AA2 If there is a communication interface at the front, the order number ends in: ...AA3 and the 2DI COM control module is used for the Switch ES Motor Starter software (version 2.0 and above) If there is a communication interface at the front, the order number ends in: ...AA3 beginning with revision level E02 via the 2DI COM/-2DI LC COM control module for the Switch ES Motorstarter software (beginning with version 2.0)
Fail-safe series that ensures safe shutdown of the motor starter after an emergency stop instruction by means of the mechanically selected SG bus (code: F-DS1e-x). A distinction is made between the following:
This series has a communication port at the front for the 2DI COM control module using the Switch ES Motor Starter software (version 2.0 and above). with a front side communications interface beginning with revision level E05 via the control module 2DI COM/-2DI LC COM for the Switch ES Motorstarter software (beginning with version 2.0)
All motor starters have full protection against short-circuit and overload. The high feature/fail-safe motor starter has integrated electronic overload protection, which means that only two device versions are needed to cover the current range up to 16 A. They also have more extensive diagnosis and additional parameters for system control and monitoring. The high feature motor starter series with installation widths of 45 mm and 90 mm and 65 mm and 130 mm can only be used in conjunction with the ET 200S SIGUARD components for safety applications up to category 4. The fail-safe motor starter series (F-DS1e-x and F-RS1e-x) is suitable for use in safety applications in conjunction with fail-safe power modules (PM-D PROFIsafe and PM-D F X1) up to SIL3/category 4.
Warning If the circuit breaker or starter protection switch is switched on again after being tripped by an overload or a short circuit, and there is a pending ON signal for the contactor, the motor starts up.
Caution High EMC interference can occur when operating three-phase AC motors in a star circuits. Interference exceeding the IEC limit values can cause malfunctions or electronics failure. If high EMC interference is expected we recommend motors with EMC suppressor circuits. (Exception: soft-start motors must not be operated with an EMC suppressor circuit).
8-2
GWA-4NEB950007202-09

The table below presents an overview of the properties of the direct and soft starters.
DS1-x 45 5.5 S00 DS1e-x F-DS1e-x 65 7.5 S0 DSS1e-x
Feature Installation width [mm] for power rating up to [kW] Integrated switching devices for SIRIUS components of the size Short-circuit protection with 3RV circuit breaker with instantaneous overcurrent release Short-circuit protection with 3RV starter protection switch with instantaneous overcurrent release Overload protection with thermal overload release integrated into circuit breaker Programmable electronic overload protection Switching function Rated operating current Rated operating voltage Parameterizable Tripping class CLASS Asymmetry recognition Residual current detection Parameterizable current limits Anti-blocking function with rapid shutdown Type of coordination (2 at 400 V) Use with SIGUARD up to safety category Use up to SIL (IEC 61 508) Tripping class (DIN V 19 250) Up to category (EN 954-1) Extra safety auxiliary switch Compatible expansion modules (brake control modules) Free inputs through control module 2DI Can the 2DI COM control module be used? Can the 2DI LC COM control module be used? Can Switch ES Motor Starter software be used? Derating necessary at top end of performance range? Diagnosis, fault types see Section
1) Does not apply to F-DS1e-x 2) Only applies to F-DS1e-x 3) As of order numbers ending in ...AA3 and with F-DS1e-x
X X X X mechanical 0.14 - 12 A 500 V no 10 no no no 2 (up to 1.6 A) 4 1) 3 2) 5, 6 2) 4 with failsafe kit 1 no no no no yes yes 2) 4.8 integral xB1, 3 yes yes 3) yes 4) yes 3) no 2 10, 20 yes yes yes yes 1 1 yes 10A, 10 electronic 0.3 - 16 A 480 V
xB1 to 4
4) beginning with order numbers ending with ...AA3 and beginning with revision level E02, as well for
F-DS1e-x beginning with revision level E05

Table 8-1: Overview of direct starters and soft starters
8-3
8.2
8.2.1
Standard direct starters DS, DS-x, DS1-x

Features
ET 200S standard direct starters DS ... Are motor starters for a single direction of rotation that can be can be used in the ET 200S distributed I/O device. Are suitable for switching and protecting three-phase loads up to 5.5 kW at 400 and 500 VAC Are available with setting ranges of 0.14 - 0.2 A to 9 - 12 A Are equipped with electromechanical SIRIUS switchgear. The contactor coils are controlled directly via integrated outputs. The switching states of circuit breaker and contactor are indicated via integrated inputs. Available diagnostic information of the direct starter:
overload or short-circuit tripping/disconnection of the motor starter fault at the motor starter
The circuit state and status are displayed via LEDs. Integrated disconnection functions via circuit breaker Upgradable with fail-safe kit 1 for safety system applications
Important A suppressor circuit for the contactor coils is already integrated in the motor starter. Additional suppressor circuits connected to the contactor are not permissible.
8-4
GWA-4NEB950007202-09

ET 200S standard direct starters DS-x ... (see Figure 8-2) Have the same features as the DS standard direct starters Have an expansion interface (DO 0.2) for driving an additional module (e.g. brake control module xB1 to xB4) In the case of the xB3 and xB4 only the brake function is supported; the inputs have no effect. ET 200S standard direct starters DS1-x ... (see Figure 8-2) Have the same features as the DS-x standard direct starters The inputs of brake control module xB3 or xB4 (e.g. limit-position switches) act directly on the contactor and brake drive circuit (see Section 11.3.3 for signal response). Notes Input 1 (limit switch, clockwise rotation) acts directly on the contactor of the DS1-x and on the drive circuit of the brake control module. Input 2 (limit switch, counterclockwise rotation) acts only on the drive circuit of the brake control module. The series DS and DS-x standard direct starters have been discontinued.
8-5
View
Scale for set current Toggle switch Opening for test overload tripping SF Group error C-STAT contactor status Channel for connecting lead to auxiliary switch block Caution Aperture only for single pin aux. switch block
Important Additional suppressor circuits are not permissible. For control unit only (see Section 4.3) Figure 8-1: Standard DS, DS-x and DS1-x direct starters
Circuit breaker
LEDs
Relevant to safety integrated SIGUARD system
Sketched circuit diagram

1L1 3L2 5L3
DI0.0 DI 0.1 DI0.2
Readiness for operation Contactor ON Circuit-breaker tripped
Input point 1 expansion module (only for DS1-x) (e. g. brake control xB3, 4 limit switch clockwise) Logic Input point 2 expansion module (only for DS1-x) (e. g. brake control xB3, 4 limit switch counter-clockwise) DO0.0 Motor on DO0.2 K1 Brake (only for DS-x, DS1-x)
K1
Output to Expansion module (only for DS-x, DS1-x) (e.g. brake control modules xB1 to 4 drive for brake)
Figure 8-2: Sketched circuit diagram - DS, DS-x, DS1-x standard direct starters
2T1 4T2 6T3
8-6
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
8.2.2
Parameters
The following table indicates the parameters that can be set for the direct starter.
Action, value range Disable Enable Disconnect Keep circuit state
Parameters Group diagnosis Behavior at CPU/ Master STOP
Factory setting Disable Disconnect
Applicability Module Module
Table 8-2: Parameters for the DS, DS-x, DS1-x standard direct starters
8-7
8.2.3
Technical specifications
Dimensions and weight Installation dimensions W x H x D (mm) Reversing starter incl. terminal module Height with PE/N block Depth with fail-safe kit (safety integrated SIGUARD system) Weight Reversing starter incl. terminal module Direct starter incl. PE/N terminal block Module-specific data Assignment type
45 x 264 x 120 306 144.5
1.0 kg 1.1 kg Type 1 to Ie < 12 A, IEC 60947-4-1, DIN VDE 0660, Part 102 Type 2 to Ie < 1.6 A
Pollution severity At 400 V At 500 V Safety class Degree of protection Heat loss Pv 1)
at Ie
3, IEC 60664 (IEC 61131) 2, IEC 60664 (IEC 61131) I, IEC 60536 (VDE 0106, Part 1) IP20, IEC 60529 < 1.25 A approx. 9 W 1.6 to 6.3 A approx. 10 W 8 to 12 A approx. 11 W
Control circuit 24 VDC (20.4 to 28.8 VDC) Rated operating voltage for electronic components: U1 Reverse polarity protection yes 24 VDC (20.4 to 28.8 VDC) Rated operating voltage for contactor: U2 Reverse polarity protection yes Power input approx. 20 mA From electronic component supply: U1 approx. 100 mA From contactor supply: U2 From the backplane bus 10 mA Main circuit Rated operating voltage Ue In accordance with DIN VDE 0106, Part 1014 IEC 60947-1, EN 60947-1 500 VAC Protective separation between main and auxiliary circuits 400 V UL, CSA 600 VAC 500 VAC Rated insulation voltage Ui 6 kV Rated impulse strength Uimp Rated frequency 50/60 Hz 1) for motor starter and terminal module depending on the rated operating current I e (upper setting range).
Table 8-3: Technical specifications - DS, DS-x, DS1-x standard direct starters
8-8
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Technical specifications - circuit breaker, contactor

Circuit breaker Tripping class max. rated operating current Adjustment ranges Thermal overload release Instantaneous overcurrent release Minimum tripping current in the event of phase failure (= 100 % current asymmetry) Rated short-circuit breaking capacity to Ie = 12 A Mechanical life Electrical life Contactor Rated operating current Ie at 60 C AC-1 AC-2, AC-3 - At 400 V - At 500 V AC-4 at 400 V Max. permissible output of the threephase induction motors at 500 VAC Positively driven operation - auxiliary contacts, contactor Mechanical life Contactor Contactor with safety functionality Electrical life Surge suppression Operating times in the case of DC operation (total break time = contact parting delay + arcing time) At 0.85 to 1.1 x Us - Closing time - Contact parting time Arcing time At 1.0 x Us - Closing time - Contact parting time 12 A 12 A 9A 4.1 A 5.5 kW yes Class 10 12 A 0.14 - 0.2 A to 9 - 12 A fixed setting at 12 x Ie 0.85 x I e
50 kA at 400 V > 100,000 operating cycles 100,000
30 million operating cycles 10 million operating cycles see graphic Zener diodes integrated
25 to 100 ms 20 to 50 ms 10 to 15 ms typ. 25 ms typ. 20 ms
Table 8-4: Technical specifications DS... - circuit breaker, contactor, auxiliary switch block
8-9
Electrical service life

107 8 6 4
Operating cycles at 400 V
2 106 8 6 4 2 105 8 6 4 2 104 8 6 4 2 103 2 3 4 5 6 10 9 12 4 5,5 20 30 40 50 60 80 100 200 Ia(A) 400 Ie(A) PN (kW)
Ia = Breaking current Ie = Rated operating current PN = Rated power of three-phase motors At 400 V
8-10
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
8.3
8.3.1
High feature DS1e-x direct starter Fail-safe F-DS1e-x direct starter

Features
ET 200S high feature DS1e-x direct starter ET 200S fail-safe F-DS1e-x direct starter Are motor starters for a single direction of rotation that can be can be used in the ET 200S distributed I/O device. Are suitable for switching and protecting three-phase loads up to 7.5 kW at 400 and 500 VAC Are available in 3 setting ranges with 0.3 - 3 A, 2.4 - 8 A, 2.4 - 16 A Are equipped with electromechanical SIRIUS switchgear (starter protection switch, contactor) Have parameterizable electronic overload protection Upper and lower current limits can be defined and monitored for system and process supervision The motor starter can be parameterized for warning or shutdown as the response to an overload event or if a current limit is violated The integral protective mechanism recognizes a blocked motor and triggers a rapid shutdown Integrated residual current detection Integrated asymmetry detection The as-is current is measured and the information transmitted to analyzers The contactor coils are controlled directly via integrated outputs. The switching status of the starter protection switch is registered by means of an auxiliary switch Detection of the circuit state of the contactor on the basis of current flow evaluation Detection of the circuit state in the case of the F-DS1e-x using an auxiliary switch block as well Available diagnostic information on the direct starter (see Table 4-7) Circuit state and motor-starter status are indicated by LEDs Integrated disconnection function by means of starter protection switch In DS1e-x: Auxiliary switch block for the ET 200S SIGUARD (F kit) already integrated In the case of the F-DS1e-x: Fail-safe selective shutdown integrated The motor starters can be expanded using front-mounted standard SIRIUS accessories (e.g. auxiliary switch block, time relay) for contactor size S0 Have an expansion interface (DO 0.2) at the side for driving an expansion module (e.g. brake control module xB1 to 4)
8-11

The 2 parameterizable inputs (DI 0.4 and DI 0.5, e.g. limit-position switches) of the expansion interface (expansion module, e.g. brake control module xB3 and xB4) act directly on contactor and brake drive The 2DI/-2DI COM/-2DI LC COM control modules, which are connected to the front, provide another 2 parameterizable inputs (DI 0.6 and DI 0.7) Factory setting possible using the rotary switch of the starter protection switch (see Section 8.6) Communication interface at the front for DS1e-x and DSS1e-x with order numbers ending in: ...AA3 and in the case of the F-DS1e-x, via the 2DI COM control module for the Switch ES Motor Starter software (version 2.0 and above) with the 2DI LC COM control module for the operating mode Manual operation local mode for DS1e-x and DSS1e-x with order numbers ending with: ...AA3 beginning with revision level E02 as well as for F-DS1e-x beginning with revision level E05.
View of the high feature DS1e-x direct starter
Rotary switch SF group error DEVICE device status C-STAT contactor status
Starter protection switch
LEDs
Slot for 2DI/-2DI COM/-2DI LC COM control modules with transparent cover sealable Aperture for SIRIUS standard accessories
Latch indicator
Figure 8-3: High feature DS1e-x direct starter
8-12
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Sketched circuit diagram of the high feature DS1e-x direct starter

1L1 3L2 5L3
DI0.0 DI 0.1 DI0.2 DI0.3
Ready from host/PLC Motor ON/current flow Group error General warning
Input 1 expansion module DI0.4 Input 2 expansion module DI0.5 Logic Input 3 control module 2DI/-2DI COM/-2DI LC COM (IN 3) DI0.6 Input 4 control module 2DI/-2DI COM/-2DI LC COM (IN 4) DI0.7 DI 1.0 - 1.5 Motor current Iact DI 1.6 DO0.0 DO0.2 DO0.3 DO0.4 K1 Manual operation local Motor cw Brake Trip Reset Emergency start
Output to expansion module (e.g. brake control modules xB1 to xB4 drive for brake)
K1
Auxiliary switch for return circuit in safety integrated SIGUARD system 2T1 4T2 6T3
Figure 8-4: Sketched circuit diagram of high feature DS1e-x direct starter
More detailed descriptions: Input signals, in Section 4.10 Output signals, in Section 4.10 Motor current Iact, in Section 8.5.2 Inputs/actions, in Section 8.5.3 Emergency start, in Section 8.5.4 Trip Reset, in Section 8.5.5
8-13
8.3.2
Additional features of the F-DS1e-x

Additional features that only apply to the F-DS1e-x fail-safe direct starters are: 6 safety groups (SG1 to SG6) can be set using coding connectors in the terminal module The safety groups are supplied via a fail-safe power module with overvoltage protection (PM-D F PROFIsafe, PM-D F X1) 2 processors that monitor one another and that control the safety function Safe shutdown after an emergency stop by means of the mechanically selected SG bus The motor starter is safely shut down if the two processors produce varying results A shunt release for the starter protection switch is integrated to ensure a safe shutdown in the event of one of the contactors being welded. This feature is also useful in non-fail-safe mode to ensure shutdown is still possible when a contactor is welded (fault-tolerant mode, see note) It is possible to test the shunt release/starter protection switch via the bus (DO 0.5) Backup of the U1 operating voltage using a capacitor to ensure a safe shutdown in the event of U1 failure Monitoring of the functioning of the capacitor for storing U1 Redundant configuration of the fail-safe components in the motor starter The fail-safe modules are identified by yellow labeling strips.
Note A fail-safe motor starter can also be used in non-fail-safe mode with a PM-D power module. To do this, the coding for the safety group in the terminal module of the fail-safe motor starter must be set to SG3 and the U1 and U 2 supply voltages must have the same potential.
Safety note When you use expansion modules (brake modules xB1 to xB4, 2DI/-2DI COM/2DI LC COM control modules), you must ensure that these modules are not fail-safe modules with fail-safe technology.
8-14
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Safety note
Expansion module Non-fail-safe mode xB1 xB2 xB3 xB4 2DI control module 2DI COM control module 2DI LC COM control module
1
Operating mode SIL1/ cat. 1, 2 X X X 1) X 1) X 1) SIL2/ cat. 3 X X X 1) X 1) X 1) X 1) SIL3/ cat. 4 X X
X X X X X
) No feedback to the fail-safe technology may occur through the input point, i.e. cross-circuits to the sensor wiring should be prevented (cross-circuit secure wiring should be laid).
Safety note Only applies in fail-safe mode (fail-safe technology) The F-DS1e-x can only be operated in the potential group of a PM-D F PROFIsafe or PM-D F X1 that safely limits the voltage to within the SIMATIC range.
Safety note Cyclic test of the F-DS1e-x - Shunt release/starter protection switch Request self-test (DO 0.5) Starter protection switch must be in "Trip" position Turn starter protection switch to "0" Starter protection switch must remain in "0" position by itself Turn starter protection switch to "1" Starter protection switch must remain in "1" position by itself - Contactor Execute on/off cycle with the emergency stop command using the mechanically selected SG bus(DO 0.0 - motor clockwise rotation must be on "1") The tests must be carried out at commissioning and cyclically every 3 to 6 months at the latest (intermittent operation).
8-15
Safety note Only one SG bus can be selected in the terminal module for each motor starter.
Safety note You must only use the F-DS1e-x motor starter to control motors that do not constitute a danger to persons or to the environment if they suddenly shut down.
Important After U1 has been applied, the F-DS1e-x requires approximately 30 s until the internal self-test is completed. DI 0.0 ready is then set in the process image via the host/PLC. Once the internal self-test is completed, the selected SG bus is monitored.
8-16
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
View of the fail-safe F-DS1e-x direct starter

Rotary switch SF group error DEVICE device status C-STAT switching status contactor Starter protection switch
LEDs
Safety group SG1 to SG6 Slot for 2DI/-2DI COM/-2DI LC COM control modules with transparent cover sealable Aperture for SIRIUS standard accessories Latch indicator
Figure 8-5: Fail-safe F-DS1e-x direct starter
8-17
Sketched circuit diagram of the fail-safe F-DS1e-x direct starter

1L1 3L2 5L3 SG1 to 6 DI0.0 DI 0.1 DI0.2 DI0.3 Mechanical selection of the safety group Ready from host/PLC Motor ON/current flow Group error General warning
Input 1 expansion module DI0.4 Input 2 expansion module DI0.5 Logic Input 3 control module 2DI/-2DI COM/-2DI LC COM (IN 3) DI0.6 Input 4 control module 2DI/-2DI COM/-2DI LC COM (IN 4) DI0.7 DI 1.0 - 1.5 Motor current Iact DI 1.6 DO0.0 DO0.2 DO0.3 DO0.4 DO 0.5 K1 Manual operation local Motor cw Brake Trip Reset Emergency start Self-test
Output to expansion module (e.g. brake control modules xB1 to 4 drive for brake)
K1
Auxiliary switch for circuit state monitoring
Figure 8-6: Sketched circuit diagram of the fail-safe F-DS1e-x direct starter
2T1 4T2 6T3
8-18
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
8.3.3
Module replacement
If a module has to be replaced, an acceptance test is not necessary. With the F-DS1e-x, however, it is necessary to repeat the safety function test (see cyclic test).
Warning If there is a pending On signal for the contactor, the motor starts up independently. This applies to a F-DS1e-x motor starter after the self-test if there is not an emergency stop on the selected SG bus.
8-19
8.3.4
Parameters
The parameters are described in detail in Section 8.5. The table below lists the actions and value ranges that can be set with the various parameters for the DS1e-x and F-DS1e-x direct starters.
Parameters Action, value range Increment 10 mA 0.3 to 3 A (0.05 to 1.1 kW) 2.4 to 8 A (1.1 to 3 kW) 2.4 to 16 A (1.1 to 7.5 kW) Shutdown without restart Shutdown with restart Warning CLASS 10 CLASS 20 Increment 1 s 0 to 255 s 0 = deactivated Warning Disconnect Increment 3.125 % 18.75 to 100 % 1) Increment 3.125 % 50 to 150 % 1) Warning Disconnect 2) Warning Disconnect Use dummy value Keep last value Disable Enable Factory setting GSD/device 0.3/3 A 2.4/8 A 2.4/16 A Module Applicability Module
Rated operating current Range 1 Range 2 Range 3
Response to overload - thermal motor model
Shutdown without restart
Tripping class Idle time Cancellation of the thermal overload module for operational switching Response to current limit violation Lower current limit Upper current limit Response to residual current detection Response to asymmetry Behavior at CPU/Master STOP Group diagnosis
1 2
CLASS 10 0
Module Module
Warning 18.75 % 112.5 % Disconnect Disconnect Use dummy value = disconnect Disable
Module Module Module Module Module Module Module
) Of the rated operational current ) Possible in the case of the DS1e-x direct starter with an order number ending in ...AA3 and in the case of the F-DS1e-x
Table 8-5: Parameters for the high feature DS1e-x direct starter and the fail-safe F-DS1e-x direct starter
8-20
GWA-4NEB950007202-09

Action, value range NC NO
Parameters Input 1, 2 - signal level (x interface, expansion module) Input 3, 4 - signal level (2DI control module, 2DI COM control module, 2DI LC COM control module) (See Section 8.5) Input 1 to 4 - action
Factory setting NO
Applicability Module
NO only NO only NO only Safety group 4)

3
No action Shutdown without restart Shutdown with restart Shutdown at limit position, clockwise rotation Shutdown at limit position, counterclockwise rotation General warning 3) Manual operation local 3) Emergency start 3) Motor cw 3) Motor ccw 3) Not assigned SG1 to SG6
No action
Module
Not assigned
Module
) Also possible with inputs 1 and 2 with DS1e-x direct starters with order numbers ending in ...AA3, as well as with F-DS1e-x 4 ) Only with F-DS1e-x
Table 8-5: (cont.)Parameters for the high feature DS1e-x direct starter and the fail-safe F-DS1e-x direct starter
8-21
8.3.5
Direct starters Dimensions and weight Installation dimensions W x H x D (mm) Reversing starter incl. terminal module Height with PE/N block Depth with brake control module 2DI Weight Reversing starter incl. terminal module Direct starter incl. PE/N terminal block Module-specific data Assignment type (up to Ie < 16 A at 400 V) Pollution severity At 400 V At 500 V Type 2 65 x 290 x 150 332 173 1.6 kg 1.7 kg DS1e-x F-DS1e-x
3, IEC 60664 (IEC 61131) 2, IEC 60664 (IEC 61131) I, IEC 60536 (VDE 0106, Part 1) IP20, IEC 60529 at Ie 0.3 to 3 A 2.4 to 8 A 2.4 to 16 A SIL tripping class category approx. 9 W approx. 10 W approx. 18 W 3 5, 6 4
Safety class
Degree of protection Heat loss Pv 1)
Maximum attainable safety classes: IEC 61508 DIN V 19250 EN 954-1
4 2)
Safety parameters: Low demand PFDAVG (10a) Test interval 3 months Test interval 6 months High demand/continuous mode PFH Test interval 3 months 1/hr Test interval 6 months 1/hr Proof test interval years 3.5 x 10-5 8.0 x 10-5 8.1 x 10-10 1.8 x 10-9 10
1)
for motor starter and terminal module as a function of rated operating current Ie (upper setting range). 2 ) With the safety integrated SIGUARD system (see Chapter 10)
Table 8-6: Technical specifications of the high feature DS1e-x direct starter and the fail-safe F-DS1e-x direct starter
8-22
GWA-4NEB950007202-09

Direct starters Control circuit 24 VDC Rated operating voltage for electronic com(20.4 to 28.8 VDC) ponents: U1 Reverse polarity protection Rated operating voltage for contactor: U2 Reverse polarity protection Power input From electronic component supply: U1 From contactor supply: U2 Pick-up: (for 80 ms) Pick-up: (for 800 ms) Hold-in: Hold-in: From SG1 to SG6 Pick-up: (for 200 ms) Hold-in: Test function of the shunt release/ starter protection switch (50 ms) from U1 From the backplane bus Main circuit Rated operating voltage Ue In accordance with DIN VDE 0106, Part 1014 IEC 60947-1, EN 60947-1 Protective separation between main and auxiliary circuits UL, CSA Rated insulation voltage Ui Rated impulse strength Uimp Rated frequency yes 24 VDC (20.4 to 28.8 VDC) 1) yes approx. 40 mA 1.7 A 2) 250 mA 3) max. 350 mA 2) max. 150 mA 3) approx. 250 mA approx. 55 mA approx. 100 mA (21.6 to 26.4 VDC) DS1e-x F-DS1e-x
approx. 1.5 A approx. 30 mA
500 VAC 400 V 600 VAC 500 VAC 6 kV 50/60 Hz
1) for motor starters with order numbers ending with ...AA3 beginning with revision level
E02 the frame potential for the safety power supply U2 connected to the electronics power supply U1. Connect the frame potential of U1 and U2 to the power module in order to prevent high compensating current. 2 ) for motor starters with order numbers ending with ...AA2 or ...AA3 and revision level E01 3 ) for motor starters with order numbers ending with ...AA3 beginning revision level E02
Table 8-6: (cont.)Technical specifications of the high feature DS1e-x direct starter and the fail-safe F-DS1e-x direct starter
8-23
Technical specifications - starter protection switch, contactor

Direct starters Starter protection switch Rated operating current Instantaneous overcurrent release Rated short-circuit breaking capacity to Ie = 16 A (motor starter) Mechanical life Electrical life Contactor Rated operating current Ie at 60 C AC-1 AC-2, AC-3 - At 400 V - At 500 V AC-4 at 400 V Max. permissible output of the threephase induction motors at 500 VAC Positively driven operation - auxiliary contacts, contactor Mechanical life Contactor Electrical life Switching frequency Surge suppression Operating times in the case of DC operation (total break time = contact parting delay + arcing time) At 0.85 to 1.1 x U s - Closing time (ms) - Contact parting time (ms) Arcing time (ms) At 1.0 x Us - Closing time (ms) - Contact parting time (ms) 16 A 16 A 11 A 9A 7.5 kW yes 3/8/16 A Fixed setting at 13 x Ie max 50 kA at 400 V > 100,000 operating cycles 100,000 operating cycles DS1e-x F-DS1e-x
10 million operating cycles see graphic 80/hr Zener diodes integrated
25 to 100 20 to 50 10 to 15 typ. 25 typ. 20
50 to 170 40 to 100 10 to 15 typ. 50 typ. 40
Table 8-7: Technical specifications of the DS1e-x and F-DS1e-x - starter protection switch and contactor
8-24
GWA-4NEB950007202-09

107 8 6 4
2 106 8 6 4 2 105 8 6 4 2 104 8 6 4 2 103 1 2 3 1,1 4 5 6 8 3 10 12 20 16 7,5 30 40 50 60 80 100 200 Ia(A) 400 Ie(A) PN (kW)
8-25
8.4
High feature direct soft starter DSS1e-x

The electrical properties of the DSS1e-x high feature direct soft starter are exactly the same as those of the SIRIUS soft starter 3RW30. The same power electronics are used.
8.4.1
Physical principles
Starting current
Three-phase current asynchronous motors have a high inrush current I(starting). This inrush current can be between three and fifteen times as high as the rated operating current, depending on the type of motor. A figure between seven and eight times the rated operating current can be postulated as typical.
I IStartup
Irated I0 (idle) nrated nsyn n
M Mstartup Mdip
Mpull-out Mmotor Mload Maccel Mrated Mmotor Mload nrated nsyn n
Figure 8-7: Typical current and torque curve of a three-phase asynchronous motor
8-26
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Reducing the starting current

There are various ways of reducing the starting current: by star delta starter by frequency converter by soft starter
Star delta starter

After a certain delay, the motor windings are switched from a star to a delta configuration. Motor current for star starting is only about 1/3 of that required for delta starting (motor torque, too, is reduced to approximately 1/3 of the delta torque). Disadvantages: 6 motor cables are necessary Occurrence of switching surges (in the current and torque transients) Startup cannot be matched to the system environment Installation is relatively complicated and time-consuming Contactor switching calls for an extra time relay or PLC programming More space needed in the control cabinet
I
IAd
Starting current in d
MAd Starting current for */d start IA*= 1/3 IA d
Mmotor atd
Mload
Mmotor at* =1/3 MAd MA*
n nsyn *nrated
n nsyn *nrated
Figure 8-8: Current and torque curves for star-delta starting
8-27
Soft starter
With a soft starter, motor voltage is increased from a selectable starting voltage to the rated voltage by phase firing within a defined starting time. Motor current is proportional to the motor voltage, so the starting current is reduced by the factor of the defined starting voltage. The illustration below shows how the DSS1e-x soft starter works:
UL1- L3
L2
M 3~
G1
UL2- L3 L1 L3
Figure 8-9: Phase firing of the supply voltage by semiconductor elements in the DSS1e-x soft starter
Example: Starting voltage 50 % of Ue => starting current equals 50 % of the motor starting current for direct-on-line starting. A soft starter also reduces motor torque. This is the reason why a soft-started motor does not jerk into action. The relationship is as follows: motor torque is proportional to the square of motor voltage.
8-28
GWA-4NEB950007202-09

Example: Starting voltage 50 % of Ue => starting torque 25 % of the starting torque for direct-on-line starting. Advantages: Less space needed in the control cabinet No protective circuitry (e.g. filter elements) needed for compliance with radio interference suppression requirements Lower installation costs Straightforward system startup Only 3 motor feeder cables, half as many as are needed for a star delta starter Local adjustments make the unit easy to configure in accordance with system requirements. Disadvantages: Long-term speed settings not possible. Lower torque at reduced voltage
I Istartup Istartup x 0.7 Istartup x 0.5 100 % Usystem 70 % Usystem 50 % Usystem Mstartup x 0.49
Mstartup
M 100 % Usystem Mstartup 70 % Usystem
50 % Usystem
0.25 x
nsyn
nsyn n
Figure 8-10: Current and torque curves for a soft starter
8-29
8.4.2
Application and use
Areas of application and criteria for selection

The ET 200S DSS1e-x soft starters are an alternative to star delta starters and frequency converters (comparison and advantages, see Section 8.4.1). The most important advantages are soft starting and soft rundown, interruptionfree switching without current spikes that could interfere with the supply system, and the compact size. Many drives that needed frequency converters in the past, can be changed to soft-start operation with the DSS1e-x, if the applications do not call for variations in speed.
Applications
Typical applications include, for example: Conveyor belts, conveyor systems: smooth starting smooth slowing, Rotary pumps, piston-type pumps avoidance of pressure surges service life of the piping system is extended Agitators, mixers: reduced starting current Fans: less strain on gearing and drive belts
Drive for a motor with electromechanical brake

An electromechanical brake with infeed from the main voltage (L1/L2/L3) should not be connected directly to the output of the soft starter. An internally powered electromechanical brake should be supplied via a separate contactor.
Important Do not use a soft starter to supply an internally powered brake (xB2, 4).
8-30
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
8.4.3
Features
ET 200S high feature direct soft starters DSS1e-x Are motor starters for a single direction of rotation that can be can be used in the ET 200S distributed I/O device. Are suitable for switching and protecting three-phase loads up to 7.5 kW at 400 VAC Are available in 3 setting ranges with 0.3 - 3 A, 2.4 - 8 A, 2.4 - 16 A Are equipped with electromechanical SIRIUS switchgear (starter protection switch) to monitor short circuits and for line protection The 2-phase power electronics from the SIRIUS 3RW30 soft starter are integrated When the motor starts the power thyristors of the soft starter are jumpered by integrated relays in the current ranges 2.4 - 8 A and 2.4 - 16 A Have parameterizable electronic overload protection Upper and lower current limits can be defined and monitored for system and process supervision The motor starter can be parameterized for warning or shutdown as the response to an overload event or if a current limit is violated The integral protective mechanism recognizes a blocked motor and triggers a rapid shutdown Integrated residual current detection Integrated asymmetry detection The as-is current is measured and the information transmitted to analyzers The soft starter is controlled directly via integrated outputs The switching status of the starter protection switch is registered by means of an auxiliary switch The switching status of the soft starter is registered by means of current flow analysis Local adjustments by potentiometers for
starting time starting voltage coasting down time
Available diagnostic information of the soft starter (see Table 4-7) Circuit state and motor-starter status are indicated by LEDs Integrated disconnection functions by means of starter protection switch Have an expansion interface (DO 0.2) at the side for driving an expansion module (e.g. brake control module xB1, 3) The 2 parameterizable inputs (DI 0.4 and DI 0.5, e.g. limit-position switches) of the expansion interface (expansion module, e.g. brake control module xB3 and xB4) act directly on soft-starter and brake drive The control module 2DI/-2DI COM/-2DI LC COM (connectable at front) provides another 2 parameterizable inputs (DI 0.6 and DI 0.7) with the control module 2DI LC COM for the operating mode manual operation local for DSS1e-x with order numbers ending with: ...AA3 beginning with revision level E02.
8-31
View
Rotary switch SF group error DEVICE device status C-STAT switching status soft starter
LEDs
Slot for 2DI/-2DI COM/-2DI LC COM control modules with transparent cover sealable Coasting down time Starting voltage Starting time
Latch indicator
Figure 8-11: High feature direct soft starter DSS1e-x
8-32
GWA-4NEB950007202-09

1L1 3L2 5L3
DI0.0 DI 0.1 DI0.2 DI0.3
Input 1 expansion module DI0.4 Input 2 expansion module DI0.5 Logic Input 3 control module 2DI/-2DI COM/-2DI LC COM (IN 3) DI0.6 Input 4 control module 2DI/-2DI COM/-2DI LC COM (IN 4) DI0.7 DI 1.0 - 1.5 Motor current Iact DI 1.6 DI1.7 DO0.0 DO0.2 DO0.3 DO0.4 Drive Manual operation local Ramp operation Motor cw Brake Trip Reset Emergency start
only on version 2.4 - 8 A 2.4 - 16 A 2T1 4T2 6T3
Figure 8-12: Sketched circuit diagram - high feature direct soft starter DSS1e-x
Caution Phase L1 is not looped through the semiconductors in the DSS1e-x. Always switch off the starter protection switch before commencing work on the output.
8-33
Settings
The devices can be set locally as follows (see Figure 8-10): By means of 3 potentiometers for setting: Starting time in the range from 0 to 20 sec. Starting voltage in the range from approx. 30 to 100 % of rated voltage for motor Coasting down time in the range from 0 to 20 sec.
Soft starting function

Torque-reduced start for three-phase asynchronous motors: Triggering is two-phase, which means that the current is kept low throughout the run-up phase. Current peaks such as those that occur in a star-delta start at the changeover from star to delta are prevented by continuous voltage management. Transient current peaks (inrush peaks) are automatically avoided in each switchon procedure by a special control function of the power semiconductors.
Soft rundown function

The integrated soft rundown function prevents the drive coming to an abrupt halt when the motor is switched off.
Warning The soft coasting down time set locally on the soft starter is also effective in controlling the brake or shutdown function via one of the parameterizable inputs (for example, the 2DI control module or the xB1 or xB4 brake control module) for an additional 1 to 2 seconds. Following a shutdown function without a motor brake, therefore, the immediate standstill of the motor is delayed. Following a shutdown function with a motor brake, the soft coasting down and time delay work against the halted motor.
8-34
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Time ramp
The illustration below shows the time ramp of the DSS1e-x for parameterized ramp operation (DI 1.7 = 1): U UN Us tR on
DSS1e-x: time ramp Figure 8-13: Time ramp/timing diagram, DSS1e-x
tR off
Changing settings
The potentiometer settings are scanned before each switching operation ("ON" or "OFF"). If, for example, the setting of the potentiometer for starting time is changed while the motor is running up, the change does not come into effect until the next start.
Starting voltage
The starting voltage should be set to a value at which the motor starts rapidly.
Ramp time (Start time)

The ramp time should be set such that the motor can run up within the time defined in this way. If the star time for star-delta starting is known, the ramp time can be set to this value.
Coasting down time (Stop time)

The "Stop time" potentiometer is for setting the duration of the voltage ramp for coasting down. This parameter can be used to make motor run-down longer than it would be if the motor were merely to coast to a stop. The motor coasts to a stop on its own if this potentiometer is set to a value of 0.
8-35
Cyclic duration factor CD

The cyclic duration factor CD in % is the ratio between load duration and freewheeling duration for loads that are switched frequently on and off. This factor can be calculated with the aid of the formula below:
ts + tb ED = -----------------------ts + tb + tp
In this formula: CD ts tb tp cyclic duration factor [%] starting time [s] operating time [s] idle time [s]
The illustration below shows the procedure.

Ie
ts
tb
tp
Figure 8-14: Cyclic duration factor CD
8-36
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Switching frequency
It is essential to comply with the maximum permissible switching frequency in order to avoid exposing the devices to thermal overload. The "response to overload - thermal motor model" parameter has to be deactivated (shutdown without restart). It is also necessary to deactivate the idle time for cooling in the thermal motor module by selecting the default = 0 = deactivated (see Section 8.5.3, Idle time). The table below presents an overview of switching frequencies per hour in accordance with the influencing factors.
3RK1301-0AB20-0AA2 (0.3 to 3 A) CLASS 10A Device orientation Ambient temperature Ie = 3 A, CD = 30%, start 3 x Ie/2 s Ie = 3 A, CD = 70%, start 3 x Ie/2 s CLASS 10 Device orientation Ambient temperature Ie = 3 A, CD = 30%, start 3 x Ie/4 s Ie = 3 A, CD = 70%, start 3 x Ie/4 s 3RK1301-0BB20-0AA2 (2.4 to 8 A) CLASS 10A Device orientation Ambient temperature Ie = 8 A, CD = 30%, start 3 x Ie/2 s Ie = 8 A, CD = 70%, start 3 x Ie/2 s 3RK1301-0CB20-0AA2 (2.4 to 16 A) CLASS 10A Device orientation Ambient temperature Ie = 3 A, CD = 30%, start 3 x Ie/2 s Ie = 3 A, CD = 70%, start 3 x Ie/2 s Ie = 8 A, CD = 30%, start 3 x Ie/2 s Ie = 8 A, CD = 70%, start 3 x Ie/2 s Ie = 16 A, CD = 30%, start 3 x Ie/2 s Ie = 16 A, CD = 70%, start 3 x Ie/2 s 40 C 240 180 80 60 35 25 vertical 50 C 200 150 70 50 25 14 60 C 160 120 60 40 12 6 horizontal 40 C 160 120 60 40 12 6 40 C 80 60 vertical 50 C 70 50 60 C 60 40 horizontal 40 C 60 40 40 C 120 80 vertical 50 C 100 70 60 C 80 60 horizontal 40 C 80 60 40 C 240 180 vertical 50 C 200 150 60 C 160 120 horizontal 40 C 160 120
Table 8-8: Switching frequency for DSS1e-x soft starter
8-37
8.4.4
Notes on configuration
In order for a motor to reach its rated speed, motor torque at any given time during run-up must be greater than the torque needed by the load, as otherwise a stable operating point would be reached before the motor achieved its rated speed (the motor would "drag to a stop"). The difference between motor torque and load torque is the accelerating torque that is responsible for the increase in the speed of the drive. The lower the accelerating torque, the longer is the time the motor needs to run up to its operating speed.
Starting torque
Reducing the terminal voltage of a three-phase asynchronous motor reduces the motor's starting current and the starting torque. Current is directly proportional to voltage, whereas voltage is proportional to the square root of motor torque. Example: Motor = 5.5 kW, rated current = 11.4 A, starting current = 6.3 x rated current, motor torque = 36 Nm, starting torque = 2.4 x rated torque Settings for the soft starter: starting voltage 50% of rated voltage for motor The reductions are thus as follows: Starting current is reduced to half the starting current for a direct start: 50 % of (6.3 x 11.4 A) = 36 A Starting torque is reduced to 0.5 x 0.5 = 25 % of the starting torque for a direct start: 25 % of 2.4 x 36 Nm = 21.6 Nm
Notes On account of the ratio between starting voltage and torque, it is important to ensure that starting voltage is not too low. This applies particularly for a pronounced saddle torque, the lowest motor torque that occurs during run-up to rated speed. Disconnection is immediate if the current through the soft starter exceeds five times the current setting. This can happen during the starting and rundown phases in particular. If this happens you should increase the starting time or the coasting down time, as applicable, and also reduce the starting voltage, if necessary.
8-38
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Mmotor M
Mstartup Mmotor with SIRIUS soft starter MB MB = accelerating torque of the motor Mstartup
with SIRIUS soft starter
Mload
Ue
US
tR
Figure 8-15: Load and motor torques and motor terminal voltage for operation with soft starter
Criteria for selection

Note In the case of the ET 200S DSS1e-x high feature direct soft starters, the soft starter has to be selected on the basis of the rated current for motor (rated current of the soft starter must be rated current for motor).
The 3 potentiometers on the starter are for setting the starting voltage, the starting time and the coasting down time. The soft starter is correctly set when the motor starts smoothly and runs up rapidly to its rated speed. The ramp time can be set to any value up to 20 seconds.
8-39
Starting time
In order to obtain optimum operating conditions for the DSS1e-x soft starter, the setting for the starting time should be approx. 1 s longer than the resultant motor run-up time, in order to ensure that the internal jumpering contacts do not have to carry the starting current. This protects the internal jumpering contacts and increases their service life. Longer starting times increase the thermal load on the devices and the motor unnecessarily and lead to a reduction in the permissible switching frequency.
Site altitude
If site altitude is above 1000 m, the following are necessary: A reduction in the rated current for thermal reasons A reduction in rated voltage on account of the diminished dielectric strength
The diagram below plots the reductions in rated current and rated operating voltage as a function of site altitude:
105 100 95 90 85 80 75 70 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 Ue reduction Ie reduction
3000
3500
4000
Site altitude in m
Figure 8-16: Reductions as a function of site altitude
8-40
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
8.4.5
Parameters
Parameter assignment
Define the parameters for the IM 151 interface module with the STEP 7 parameterization software or COM PROFIBUS. To do this, you need the "SIEM806A.GSD" or "SIEM806B.GSD" device master file (see Section 6.1 in the SIMATIC ET 200S Distributed I/O System manual).
Parameters
The parameters are described in detail in Section 8.5. The table below lists the actions and value ranges that can be set with the various parameters for the DSS1e-x soft starter.
Parameters Rated operating current Range 1 Range 2 Range 3 Action, value range Increment 10 mA 0.3 to 3 A (0.05 to 1.1 kW) 2.4 to 8 A (1.1 to 3 kW) 2.4 to 16 A (1.1 to 7.5 kW) Shutdown without restart Shutdown with restart Warning CLASS 10A CLASS 10 only for 0.3 - 3 A Increment 1 s 0 to 255 s 0 = deactivated Factory setting GSD/device 0.3/3 A 2.4/8 A 2.4/16 A Module Applicability Module
Tripping class
CLASS 10A
Module
Idle time Cancellation of the thermal overload module for operational switching Response to current limit vio- Warning lation Disconnect Lower current limit Increment 3.125 % 18.75 to 100 % 1) Upper current limit Increment 3.125 % 50 to 150 % 1) Response to residual current Warning detection Disconnect 2) Response to asymmetry Warning Disconnect Behavior at CPU/Master Use dummy value STOP Keep last value Group diagnosis Disable Enable
1) Of the rated operational current
Module
2) Possible in the DSS1e-x direct soft starter with an order number ending in ...AA3 Table 8-9: Parameters for DSS1e-x high feature direct soft starter
8-41

Parameters Input 1, 2 - signal level (x interface, expansion module) Input 3, 4 - signal level (2DI control module, 2DI COM control module, 2DI LC COM control module) (See Section 8.5) Input 1 to 4 - action
Factory setting NO
NO only NO only NO only

3
No action Shutdown without restart Shutdown with restart Shutdown at limit position, clockwise rotation Shutdown at limit position, counterclockwise rotation General warning 3) Manual operation local 3) Emergency start 3) Motor cw 3) Motor ccw 3)
No action
Module
) Also possible at input 1 and 2 for DSS1e-x direct soft starters with order numbers ending in ...AA3
Table 8-9: (cont.)Parameters for DSS1e-x high feature direct soft starter
8-42
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
8.4.6
Dimensions and weight Installation dimensions W x H x D (mm) Reversing starter incl. terminal module Height with PE/N block Depth with brake control module 2DI Weight Reversing starter incl. terminal module Direct starter incl. PE/N terminal block Module-specific data Assignment type Pollution degree at 400 V Safety class Degree of protection at Ie Heat loss Pv 1)
65 x 290 x 150 332 173 1 kg 1.1 kg
Type 1 to Ie < 16 A, IEC 60947-4-1, DIN VDE 0660, Part 102 3, IEC 60664 (IEC 61131) I, IEC 60536 (VDE 0106, Part 1) IP20, IEC 60529 0.3 to 3 A approx. 12 W 2.4 to 8 A approx. 9 W 2.4 to 16 A approx. 16 W
Site altitude see Figure 8-15 Control circuit 24 VDC (20.4 to 28.8 VDC) Rated operating voltage for electronic components U1 Reverse polarity protection yes 24 VDC (20.4 to 28.8 VDC) 2) Rated operating voltage for contactor U2 Reverse polarity protection yes Power input approx. 40 mA From electronic component supply U1 approx. 30 mA From soft-starter supply U2 From the backplane bus approx. 30 mA Main circuit Rated operating voltage Ue In accordance with DIN VDE 0106, Part 1014 IEC 60947-1, EN 60947-1 480 VAC UL, CSA 480 VAC 500 VAC Rated insulation voltage Ui 4 kV Rated impulse strength Uimp Rated frequency 50/60 Hz 1) for motor starter and terminal module depending on the rated operating current I e (upper setting range). 2) for motor starters with order numbers ending with ...AA3 beginning with revision level E02 the
frame potential for the safety power supply U2 connected to the electronics power supply U1. Connect the frame potential of U1 and U2 to the power module in order to prevent high compensating current.
Table 8-10: Technical specifications - DSS1e-x high feature direct soft starter
8-43
Technical specifications - starter protection switch, soft starter

Starter protection switch Rated operating current Instantaneous overcurrent release Rated short-circuit breaking capacity to Ie = 16 A (motor starter) Mechanical life Electrical life Soft starter Rated operating current Ie at 60 C AC-53a AC-53b Max. permissible output of the threephase induction motors at 400 VAC 3A 8/16 A 7.5 kW 3/8/16 A Fixed setting at 13 x I e max 50 kA at 400 V > 100,000 operating cycles 100,000 operating cycles
Table 8-11: Technical specifications DSS1e-x - starter protection switch, soft starter
8-44
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
8.5
Description of fixed values and parameters

All the parameters of the high feature/fail-safe motor starters are described in this section. A distinction is drawn between the permanently set values (fixed values) and the parameters that can be changed by the user.
8.5.1
Permanently set values
Recovery time
Recovery time is the time defined for cooling after which a reset is possible following an overload trip. Losses of voltage occurring before this time expires prolong the recovery time accordingly. The recovery time is set to 90 s and cannot be changed. Trip Reset signals received during the recovery time (DO 0.3) have no effect.
Starting current protection

The DSS1e-x high feature direct soft starters have integrated starting current protection of 5 times Ie. This protects the semiconductors against overload. If the starting current protection limit is exceeded it is advisable to change the parameterization, for example a lower starting voltage and a longer starting ramp time.
Short-circuit protection
The instantaneous overcurrent release of the starter protection switch is set to 13 x Ie max of the applicable current range; this setting cannot be changed.
8-45
Principle of anti-blocking function

The principle on which anti-blocking protection is based (the interaction of blocking current and blocking time, in other words) is illustrated below:
Case 1: Motor continues to operate I Blocking current Stalled rotor Stalled rotor released within blocking time
Motor continues to operate

Motor current t Blocking time Case 2: Motor is shut down I Blocking current Stalled rotor Stalled rotor when blocking time elapses persists
Motor current
Motor is shut down
t Blocking time
Figure 8-17: Principle of anti-blocking function
Blocking current
The motor starter detects a blockage if the blocking current is exceeded. This starts the blockage monitoring time, the duration of which depends on the blocking time. The motor starter shuts down if the blockage is still present after the blocking time expires. The blocking current is a percentage of the rated operational current. The blocking current is set to 800 % of the rated operational current and cannot be changed.
Blocking time
Time for which a blockage can persist without initiating a shutdown. The motor starter shuts down if the blockage is still present after the blocking time expires. The blocking time is set to 1 second and cannot be changed.
8-46
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
8.5.2
Actual motor current

The maximum current in the starter is returned for analysis by the process image. Current is measured for all 3 phases and the highest value is obtained. The 6-bit value returned indicates the motor-current ratio Iact/Irated (Irated = parameterized rated operating current). The value is shown with one place to the left of the decimal point (DI 1.5) and five places after the decimal point (DI 1.0 to DI 1.4). The maximum possible ratio of Iact/Irated is therefore 1.96875 (approx. 197 %). Resolution is 1/32 per bit (3.125 %).
DI 1.5 20 1 0 1 1 1 DI 1.4 2-1 0.5 0 0 0 1 DI 1.3 2-2 0.25 0 0 1 1 DI 1.2 2-3 0.125 0 0 1 1 DI 1.1 2-4 0.0625 0 0 0 1 DI 1.0 2-5 0.03125 Total=1.96875 0 0 0 1 Iact = 0 Iact = Irated x 1 Iact = Irated x 1.375 Iact = Irated x 1.96875
Table 8-12: Actual motor current
Iact = rated operational current Irated x value (DI 1.0 to DI 1.5)
8-47
8.5.3
User-definable parameters
Rated operational current

This is the parameter for the rated operational current that the feeder (switchgear and motor) can carry without interruption (nominal current for motor). The value that can be set depends on the current range (e.g. 0.3 to 3; 2.4 to 8; 2.4 to 16 A). The current range itself depends on the device version can cannot be parameterized. Default: The motor starter's rated operational current is set ex-works to the maximum value. This means that the motor can be tested without connection to the field bus and the starter does not trip. Correct motor protection might not necessarily be ensured under certain circumstances during this time. In the GSD file the rated operational current is preset to the minimum value for safety reasons. This value has to be parameterized as part of the configuration procedure. If it is not parameterized the motor starter could trip on account of an overload when the motor is started for the first time. The increment within a range is 10 mA.

The motor's winding temperature is mapped from the measured motor currents and the device parameters "rated operational current" and "CLASS". The data that indicates whether the motor is overloaded or working within its normal operating range is derived from this temperature. This device parameters is used to determine how the motor starter reacts to an overload: Shutdown without restart Warning After an overload, the shutdown command cannot be reset using a reset command (Trip Reset, DO 0.3) until the recovery time (=90 s) has elapsed. Shutdown with restart Danger Shutdown with restart means that if a switch-on command is pending the motor starter switches on automatically (auto-reset) when the recovery time (= 90 s) elapses.
8-48
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Tripping class (electronic overload protection)

The tripping class (CLASS) defines the maximum time to disengagement within which a protective device must trip from cold at 7.2 times the rated operational current (motor protection to IEC 60947). The tripping characteristics plot time to disengagement as a function of operating current.
1000 Time to disengagement [s]
100
20 10 8 3 1 1 7 10 Current * Ie [A] CLASS 20 CLASS 10 CLASS 10A
Figure 8-18: Tripping class
Note The options for the tripping classes depend on the starter and on the current range:
Motor starters DS1e-x RS1e-x F-DS1e-x F-RS1e-x Current range 0.3 to 3 A 2.4 to 8 A 2.4 to 16 A 0.3 to 3 A DSS1e-x 2.4 to 8 A 10A 2.4 to 16 A 10A/10 10/20 CLASS
8-49
Idle time
Idle time is a time defined for cooling of the motor model following operational shutdown, in other words not after overload trips. When this time elapses the "thermal motor model" of the motor starter is set to 0 %. This permits frequent motor starts (jogging). In the case of motor protection to IEC 947, starts like this would result in a trip, depending on the CLASS setting. Cooling with and without idle time is graphed below:
Motor On
Off Motor heats Without idle time t
Tripping limit Overload tripping
t With idle time
Tripping limit No overload tripping t Idle time Idle time
Figure 8-19: Idle time
The idle time can be set to a value in the range between 0 and 255 seconds.
Danger If the idle time is changed (0 = deactivated), motor protection is no longer in accordance with the requirements of IEC 947 (CLASS 10A, 10, 20). This means that the corresponding degree of system protection might not be maintained under certain circumstances. Parallel protective measures are recommended.
Note The motor must be designed for jog-mode operation of this nature, as overloading could otherwise cause permanent damage.
8-50
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Current limits
The motor current and the current limits can be used to derive information on a number of system states:
System state System becomes more inert, for example on account of damaged bearings System becomes freer, for example because the processing material in the system has been used up. System is blocked! Current value Current is higher or lower than usual Protection by: Current limits
Very high current flowing
Blocking protection
Upper/lower current limit An upper and/or a lower current limit can be set. DS1e-x, RS1e-x, F-DS1e-x, F-RS1e-x: The current limits are not active for startup bridging until the CLASS time has elapsed (e.g. after 10 seconds in the case of CLASS 10). DSS1e-x: The current limits are not active for start jumpering until the ramp time and CLASS time have elapsed. Range for lower current limit: 18.75 % to 100 % of the rated operational current Range for upper current limit: 50 % to 150 % of the rated operational current The motor starter can be parameterized for warning or shutdown as the response to violation of the current limits. Examples: "Substance for mixing too thick", i.e. current overshoots the upper current limit. "No-load operation, because drive belt broken", i.e. current undershoots the lower current limit.
8-51

Response to residual current detection Residual current is detected if the motor current is <18.75% of the set rated operational current. As of order numbers ending in ...AA3 for high feature motor starters and the F-DS1e-x and F-RS1e-x, the following responses can be parameterized for residual current detection: Warning Disconnect
Response to current limit violation This device parameters is used to determine how the motor starter reacts to a current limit violation: Warning Disconnect
Asymmetry
Higher asymmetric current consumption is the reaction of a three-phase asynchronous motor to slight asymmetry in the supply voltage. This causes an increase in temperature in the stator and rotor windings. The asymmetry limit is a percentage by which motor current can vary in the individual phases. Asymmetry has occurred when the difference between the lowest and the highest phase currents is greater than 30 %. The datum for evaluation is the maximum phase current in one of the three phases. Response to asymmetry This device parameters is used to determine how the motor starter reacts to asymmetry: Warning Disconnect
8-52
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Inputs
Inputs is a device function that can be used to have the motor starter perform various actions that can be parameterized. The signals at the digital inputs are evaluated for this purpose. Inputs 1 and 2 (DI 0.4, DI 0.5) are actuated via the expansion interface for expansion modules (e.g. brake control module xB3 and xB4). Inputs 3 and 4 (DI 0.6, DI 0.7) can be wired directly with switching elements or sensors (PNP) through the 2DI/-2DI COM/-2DI LC COM control module (description, see Sections 4.4, 4.5 and 4.6).
Input, n level This device parameter is used to define the input logic. Range: NC contact/NO contact: NC contact actuated = 0 signal active NO contact actuated = 1 signal active Note "Input n - action is emergency start, motor cw and motor ccw": input n level can only be parameterized for NO contacts.
8-53

Input n action A variety of actions can be triggered by an input signal. The actions that can be parameterized are as follows:
Input n action No action Shutdown without restart Shutdown with restart Shutdown at limit position, clockwise rotation Shutdown at limit position, counterclockwise rotation Description No direct action at the motor starter. Evaluation and processing by the process image are possible. Results in the shutdown of motor and brake. Acknowledgment necessary after the cause of the shutdown has been rectified (input status). Results in the shutdown of motor and brake. Automatic acknowledgment after the cause of the shutdown has been rectified (input status). Motor and brake output are shut down irrespective of the direction of rotation. The brake output can be switched on again after "brake OFF" and motor OFF" have been set. Shutdown at limit position, clockwise rotation Motor switch-on is possible only with the counter-command "motor ccw". Shutdown at limit position, counterclockwise rotation Motor switch-on is possible only with the counter-command "motor cw". The "General Warning" message is issued. The motor starter is not shut down. Control is possible only by "input 3 or 4 - action: motor cw and motor ccw". Control by field bus (automatic operation) is not possible. Automatic operation is not possible until the manual operation local mode has been canceled and "Input 3 or 4 - action: motor cw or motor ccw" is no longer active. Description, see Section 8.5.4. The motor starter must be in the "manual operation local" mode for these actions. Motor cw: switches motor and brake output on and off (clockwise rotation). Motor ccw: switches motor and brake output on and off (counterclockwise rotation). Permissible only as NO contact.
General warning Manual operation local
Emergency start Motor cw
Motor ccw
Table 8-13: Description of actions
8-54
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
8.5.4
Emergency start
Emergency start (DO 0.4) enables a restart despite an internal shutdown command. An emergency start is possible if the motor cw or motor ccw commands are pending for the motor but there is no emergency stop 1). The motor is switched on even if the reason for the shutdown persists. Note the control of the expansion module if, for example, there is a brake.
Emergency start is not possible when There are no motor cw or motor ccw commands A device fault has occurred ("self-test error") The motor starter's self-protective function has tripped ("switching element overload") U1/U2 is missing The anti-blocking function has tripped A process image error has occurred There is an emergency stop 1) The thermal motor model continues to function when there is an emergency start.
1
) Only in the case of F-DS1e-x and F-RS1e-x (open at emergency stop by means of the mechanically selected SG bus or starter protection switch).
8.5.5
Trip Reset
Trip Reset acknowledges all the currently pending acknowledgable errors in the starter. An error can be acknowledged if it has been eliminated or no longer exists. The Trip Reset can be triggered by: The user application via the DO 0.3 process image (see Section 4.9.2) The knob switch on the starter protection switch (see Section 4.1) By the local device interface using the Switch ES software (only applies to high feature motor starters with order numbers ending in ...AA3 and to all fail-safe motor starters).
8-55
8.6
Factory setting
We recommend you use the factory setting (default setting) in the following instances: Incorrect parameter assignment If ET 200S motor starters that have already been parameterized are to be used in other systems.
Note If you do not, in certain circumstances some operating mechanisms may start up due to the existing parameter assignment.
You can reset parameterized motor starters to their factory setting without any additional tools. A parameter assignment block set by the Switch ES parameter assignment software is removed in the process. You can find the parameters for the factory setting in the sections below: In Section 8.3.4 for DS1e-x and F-DS1e-x In Section 8.4.5 for DSS1e-x In Section 9.3.4 for RS1e-x and F-RS1e-x
Motor starter variants

The following motor starters can be reset: Variants of high feature motor starters - DS1e-x - DSS1e-x - RS1e-x with order numbers ending in ...AA3. Variants of fail-safe motor starters - F-DS1e-x - F-RS1e-x
Factory setting options

You can install the factory setting for a motor starter in the following instances: In an ET 200S system that is in operation Outside a system with an appropriate terminal module and a power module for the voltage U1.
8-56
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Procedure
To reset the factory setting, proceed as follows: 1. Warning Connect the motor starter on an appropriate terminal module so that a connected drive cannot start up as a result of the unknown parameter assignment of the motor starter. Do not use a terminal module that has an expansion module directly to the right of it (brake module xB3 and xB4 with inputs). You cannot install a 2DI/-2DI COM/-2DI LC COM control module on this motor starter. Note the mechanical coding when you install the motor starter on the terminal module. 2. For this procedure, apply the voltage U1 outside a system via a power module. It is not necessary for the supply to come via the Profibus-DP and the power bus. 3. Turn the knob of the starter protection switch within the specified time window of 2 to 4 seconds to ON and OFF, as illustrated in the timing diagram below, and check the LEDs on the motor starter. Initialization sequence Rotary switch ON OFF
2 to 4s 2 to 4s 2 to 4s 2 to 4s 2 to 4s 2 to 4s 3s
Start sequence
Starting the factory setting

Factory setting restored LED indicators: for 5 s SF Off C-STAT Off DEVICE flickers red
LED indicators: SF Off C-STAT Off DEVICE flashes red
Figure 8-20: Factory setting
The initialization sequence prevents the factory setting being reset inadvertently. The factory setting is initialized at the beginning of the start sequence. The LEDs indicate the following behavior: SF off C-STAT off DEVICE flashes red Once the factory setting has been restored, the LEDs respond as follows for 5 seconds: SF off C-STAT off DEVICE flickers red
8-57
8-58
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Reversing starters
9
Subject Page 9-2 9-4 9-4 9-7 9-8 9-11 9-11 9-14 9-19 9-20 9-22
Section 9.1 9.2 9.2.1 9.2.2 9.2.3 9.3 9.3.1 9.3.2 9.3.3 9.3.4 9.3.5 Overview
Standard reversing starters RS, RS-x, RS1-x Features Parameters Technical specifications High feature RS1e-x reversing starter Fail-safe F-RS1e-x reversing starter Features Additional features of the F-RS1e-x Module replacement Parameters Technical specifications
9-1
Reversing starters
9.1
Overview
Three versions of the ET 200S motor starters are available: Standard series (code: RS1-x) High feature series, characterized by properties that boost system availability and improve diagnosis (code: RS1e-x). A distinction is made between the following:
If there is no communication interface at the front, the order number ends in: ...AA2 If there is a communication interface at the front, the order number ends in: ...AA3 and the 2DI COM control module is used for the Switch ES Motor Starter software (version 2.0 and above) If there is a communication interface at the front, the order number ends in: ...AA3 beginning with revision level E02 via the 2DI COM/-2DI LC COM control module for the Switch ES Motorstarter software (beginning with version 2.0)
Fail-safe series that ensures safe shutdown of the motor starter after an emergency stop instruction by means of the mechanically selected SG bus (code: F-RS1e-x). A distinction is made between the following:
This series has a communication interface at the front via the 2DI COM control module for the Switch ES Motor Starter software (version 2.0 and above). with a front side communications interface beginning with revision level E05 via the control module 2DI COM/-2DI LC COM for the Switch ES Motorstarter software (beginning with version 2.0)
All motor starters have full protection against short-circuit and overload. The high feature/fail-safe motor starter has integrated electronic overload protection, which means that only two device versions are needed to cover the current range up to 16 A. They also have more extensive diagnostics and additional parameters for system control and monitoring. The high feature motor starter series with installation widths of 45 mm and 90 mm and 65 mm and 130 mm can only be used in conjunction with the ET 200S SIGUARD components for safety applications up to category 4. The fail-safe motor starter series (F-DS1e-x and F-RS1e-x) is suitable for use in safety applications in conjunction with fail-safe power modules (PM-D PROFIsafe and PM-D F X1) up to SIL3/category 4.
Warning If the circuit breaker or starter protection switch is switched on again after being tripped as a result of an overload or a short circuit, and there is a pending On signal for the contactor, the motor starts up.
9-2
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Reversing starters
The table below presents an overview of the properties of the reversing starters.
RS1-x 90 5.5 S00 X X X X mechanical 0.14 - 12 A no 10 yes no no no 2 (up to 1.6 A) 4 1) 3 2) 5, 6 2) 4 with failsafe kit 2 no no no no yes 4.8 integral yes yes yes 2 0.3 - 16 A yes 10, 20 500 V RS1e-x F-RS1e-x 130 7.5 S0
Feature Installation width [mm] for power rating up to [kW] Integrated switching devices for SIRIUS components of the size Short-circuit protection with 3RV circuit breaker with instantaneous overcurrent release Short-circuit protection with 3RV starter protection switch with instantaneous overcurrent release Overload protection with thermal overload release integrated into circuit breaker Programmable electronic overload protection Switching function Rated operating current Rated operating voltage Parameterizable Tripping class CLASS Asymmetry recognition Residual current detection Parameterizable current limits Anti-blocking function with rapid shutdown Type of coordination (2 at 400 V) Use with SIGUARD up to safety category Use up to SIL (IEC 61 508) Tripping class (DIN V 19 250) Up to category (EN 954-1) Extra safety auxiliary switch Compatible expansion modules (brake control modules) Free inputs through control module 2DI Can the 2DI COM control module be used? Can the 2DI LC COM control module be used? Can Switch ES Motor Starter software be used? Derating necessary at top end of performance range? Diagnosis, fault types see Section
1 2
xB1 to 4 yes Yes 3) Yes 4) Yes 3) Yes 2)
) Does not apply to F-RS1e-x ) Only applies to F-RS1e-x 3 ) As of order numbers ending in ...AA3 and with F-RS1e-x 4 ) beginning with order numbers ending with ...AA3 and beginning with revision level E02, as well for F-RS1e-x beginning with revision level E05
Table 9-1: Overview of reversing starters
9-3
Reversing starters
9.2
9.2.1
Standard reversing starters RS, RS-x, RS1-x

Features
ET 200S - RS ... standard reversing starters Are motor starters for two directions of rotation that can be can be used in the ET 200S distributed I/O device. Are suitable for switching and protecting three-phase loads up to 5.5 kW at 400 and 500 VAC Are available with setting ranges of 0.14 - 0.2 A to 9 - 12 A Are equipped with electromechanical SIRIUS switchgear. The contactor coils are controlled directly via integrated outputs. The switching states of circuit breaker and contactor are indicated via integrated inputs. Available diagnostic information of the reversing starter:
overload or short-circuit tripping/disconnection of the motor starter fault at the motor starter
The circuit state and status are displayed via LEDs. Mechanical locking of clockwise/counterclockwise rotation Integrated disconnection functions via circuit breaker Upgradable with fail-safe kit 2 for safety system applications
Important A suppressor circuit for the contactor coils is already integrated in the motor starter. Additional suppressor circuits connected to the contactor are not permissible.
Important When switching over from clockwise rotation to counterclockwise rotation and vice versa, a switch-over interval of >200 ms must be adhered to. Please take into account this idle time in your user program.
9-4
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Reversing starters
ET 200S motor starters, RS-x ... standard reversing starters (see Figure 9-2) Have the same features as the RS standard reversing starters Have an expansion interface (DO 0.2) for driving an additional module (e.g. brake control module xB1 to 4) In the case of the xB3 and xB4 only the brake function is supported; the inputs have no effect. ET 200S motor starters, RS1-x ... standard reversing starters (see Figure 9-2) Have the same features as the RS-x standard reversing starters The inputs of brake control module xB3 or xB4 (e.g. limit-position switches) act directly on the contactor and brake drive circuit (see Section 11.3.4 for signal response). Notes Input 1 (limit switch, clockwise rotation) acts directly on the contactor for clockwise rotation of the RS1-x and on the drive circuit of the brake control module. Input 2 (limit switch, counterclockwise rotation) acts directly on the contactor for counterclockwise rotation of the RS1-x and on the drive circuit of the brake control module. The series RS and RS-x standard reversing starters have been discontinued.
9-5
Reversing starters
View
Scale for set current Toggle switch Opening for test overload tripping SF Group error C-STAT contactor status Channel for connecting lead to auxiliary switch block Caution Apertures only for single pin aux. switch block
Important Additional suppressor circuits are not permissible. For control unit only (see Section 4.3)
Circuit breaker
LEDs
Relevant to safety integrated SIGUARD system
Figure 9-1: RS, RS-x, RS1-x standard reversing starters

1L1 3L2 5L3
DI 0.0 DI 0.1 DI 0.2
Readiness for operation Contactor ON Circuit-breaker tripped
Input point 1 expansion module (only for RS1-x) (e. g. brake control xB3, 4 limit switch clockwise) Logic Input point 2 expansion module (only for RS1-x) (e. g. brake control xB3, 4 limit switch DO 0.0 DO 0.1 DO 0.2 K1 K2 K1 K2 Motor CW Motor CCW Brake (only for RS-x, RS1-x)
Output to Expansion module (only for RS-x, RS1-x) (e.g. brake control modules xB1 to 4 drive for brake)
Figure 9-2: Sketched circuit diagram - RS, RS-x, RS1-x standard reversing starters
2T1 4T2 6T3
9-6
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Reversing starters
9.2.2
Parameters
The following table indicates the parameters that can be set for the reversing starter.
Action, value range Disable Enable Disconnect Keep circuit state
Parameters Group diagnosis Behavior at CPU/ Master STOP
Factory setting Disable Disconnect
Applicability Module Module
Table 9-2: Parameters for the RS, RS-x, RS1-x standard reversing starters
9-7
Reversing starters
9.2.3
Dimensions and weight Installation dimensions W x H x D (mm) Reversing starter incl. terminal module Height with PE/N block Depth with fail-safe kit (safety integrated SIGUARD system) Weight Reversing starter incl. terminal module Reversing starter incl. PE/N terminal block Module-specific data Assignment type
90 x 264 x 120 306 144.5
1.6 kg 1.8 kg Type 1 to Ie < 12 A, IEC 60947-4-1, DIN VDE 0660, Part 102 Type 2 to Ie < 1.6 A 3, IEC 60664 (IEC 61131) 2, IEC 60664 (IEC 61131) I, IEC 60536 (VDE 0106, Part 1) IP20, IEC 60529 approx. 9 W approx. 10 W approx. 11 W
Pollution severity At 400 V At 500 V Safety class Degree of protection Heat loss Pv 1)
at Ie
< 1.25 A 1.6 to 6.3 A 8 to 12 A
Control circuit 24 VDC (20.4 to 28.8 VDC) Rated operating voltage for electronic components: U1 Reverse polarity protection yes 24 VDC (20.4 to 28.8 VDC) Rated operating voltage for contactor: U2 Reverse polarity protection yes Power input approx. 20 mA From electronic component supply: U1 approx. 100 mA From contactor supply: U2 From the backplane bus 10 mA Main circuit Rated operating voltage Ue In accordance with DIN VDE 0106, Part 1014 500 VAC IEC 60947-1, EN 60947-1 Protective separation between main and 400 V auxiliary circuits UL, CSA 600 VAC 500 VAC Rated insulation voltage Ui Rated impulse strength Uimp 6 kV Rated frequency 50/60 Hz 1 ) for motor starter and terminal module as a function of rated operating current Ie (upper setting range).
Table 9-3: Technical specifications - RS, RS-x, RS1-x standard reversing starters
9-8
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Reversing starters
Technical specifications - circuit breaker, contactor

Circuit breaker Tripping class Max. rated operating current Adjustment ranges Thermal overload release Instantaneous overcurrent release Rated short-circuit breaking capacity to Ie = 12 A Mechanical life Electrical life Contactor Rated operating current Ie at 60 C AC-1 AC-2, AC-3 - At 400 V - At 500 V AC-4 at 400 V Max. permissible output of the threephase induction motors at 400 VAC Positively driven operation - auxiliary contacts, contactor Mechanical life Contactor Contactor with safety functionality Electrical life Surge suppression Operating times in the case of DC operation (total break time = contact parting time + arcing time) At 0.85 to 1.1 x U s - Closing time - Contact parting time Arcing time At 1.0 x U s - Closing time - Contact parting time 12 A 12 A 9A 4.1 A 5.5 kW yes Class 10 12 A 0.14 - 0.2 A to 9 - 12 A fixed setting at 12 x I e 50 kA at 400 V > 100 000 operating cycles 100 000
30 million operating cycles 10 million operating cycles see graphic Zener diodes integrated
25 to 100 ms 20 to 50 ms 10 to 15 ms typ. 25 ms typ. 30 ms
Table 9-4: Technical specifications RS... - circuit breaker, contactor, auxiliary switch block
9-9
Reversing starters

107 8 6 4
2 106 8 6 4 2 105 8 6 4 2 104 8 6 4 2 103 2 3 4 5 6 10 9 12 4 5,5 20 30 40 50 60 80 100 200 Ia(A) 400 Ie(A) PN (kW)
9-10
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Reversing starters
9.3
9.3.1
High feature RS1e-x reversing starter Fail-safe F-RS1e-x reversing starter

Features
ET 200S high feature RS1e-x reversing starter ET 200S fail-safe F-RS1e-x reversing starter Are motor starters for two directions of rotation that can be can be used in the ET 200S distributed I/O device. Are suitable for switching and protecting three-phase loads up to 7.5 kW at 400 and 500 VAC Are available in 3 setting ranges with 0.3 - 3 A, 2.4 - 8 A, 2.4 - 16 A Are equipped with electromechanical SIRIUS switchgear (starter protection switch, contactor) Have parameterizable electronic overload protection Upper and lower current limits can be defined and monitored for system and process supervision The motor starter can be parameterized for warning or shutdown as the response to an overload event or if a current limit is violated The integral protective mechanism recognizes a blocked motor and triggers a rapid shutdown Integrated residual current detection Integrated asymmetry detection The as-is current is measured and the information transmitted to analyzers The contactor coils are controlled directly via integrated outputs. The switching status of the starter protection switch is registered by means of an auxiliary switch Detection of the circuit state of the contactor on the basis of current flow evaluation Detection of the circuit state in the F-RS1e-x using an auxiliary switch block as well Available diagnostic information of the direct starter (see Table 4-7) Circuit state and motor-starter status are indicated by LEDs Mechanical locking of clockwise/counterclockwise rotation Integrated disconnection function by means of starter protection switch In the case of the RS1e-x: Auxiliary switch block for the ET 200S SIGUARD (F kit) already integrated In the case of the F-RS1e-x: Fail-safe selective shutdown integrated The motor starters can be expanded with front-mounted standard SIRIUS accessories (e.g. auxiliary switch, time relay) for contactor size S0 Have an expansion interface (DO 0.2) at the side for driving an expansion module (e.g. brake control module xB1 to 4)
9-11
Reversing starters
The 2 parameterizable inputs (DI 0.4 and DI 0.5, e.g. limit-position switches) of the expansion interface (expansion module, e.g. brake control module xB3, 4) act directly on contactor and brake drive The 2DI/-2DI COM/-2DI LC COM control modules (connected to the front) provide another 2 parameterizable inputs (DI 0.6 and DI 0.7) Factory setting possible using the rotary switch of the starter protection switch (see Section 8.6) Communication interface at the front for the RS1e-x with order numbers ending in: ...AA3 and in the case of the F-RS1e-x, via the 2DI COM control module for the Switch ES Motor Starter software (version 2.0 and above) with the 2DI LC COM control module for the operating mode Manual operation local mode for RS1e-x with order numbers ending with: ...AA3 beginning with revision level E02 as well as for F-RS1e-x beginning with revision level E05.
View of the high feature RS1e-x reversing starter
Rotary switch
SF group error DEVICE device status C-STAT contactor status
LEDs
Slot for 2DI/-2DI COM/-2DI LC COM control modules with- transparent cover sealable Aperture for SIRIUS standard accessories
Latch indicator
Figure 9-3: High feature RS1e-x reversing starter
9-12
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Reversing starters
Sketched circuit diagram of the high feature RS1e-x reversing starter

1L1 3L2 5L3
DI0.0 DI 0.1 DI0.2 DI0.3
Input 1 expansion module DI0.4 Input 2 expansion module DI0.5 Logic Input 3 control module 2DI/-2DI COM/-2DI LC COM (IN 3)
DI0.6
Input 4 control module 2DI/-2DI COM/-2DI LC COM (IN 4) DI0.7 DI 1.0 - 1.5 Motor current Iact DI 1.6 DO0.0 DO0.1 DO0.2 DO0.3 DO0.4 K1 K2 Manual operation local Motor cw Motor ccw Brake Trip Reset Emergency start
K2
K1
Auxiliary switch for return circuit in safety integrated SIGUARD system
Figure 9-4: Sketched circuit diagram - high feature RS1e-x reversing starter
2T1 4T2 6T3
9-13
Reversing starters
9.3.2
Additional features of the F-RS1e-x

Additional features that only apply to the fail-safe F-RS1e-x reversing starters are: 6 safety groups (SG1 to SG6) can be set using coding connectors in the terminal module The safety groups are supplied via a fail-safe power module with overvoltage protection (PM-D F PROFIsafe, PM-D F X1) 2 processors that monitor one another and that control the safety function Safe shutdown after an emergency stop by means of the mechanically selected SG bus The motor starter is safely shut down if the two processors produce varying results A shunt release for the starter protection switch is integrated to ensure a safe shutdown in the event of one of the contactors being welded. This feature is also useful in non-fail-safe mode to ensure a shutdown is still possible when a contactor is welded (fault-tolerant mode, see note) It is possible to test the shunt release/starter protection switch via the bus (DO 0.5) Storage of the U1 operating voltage using a capacitor to ensure a safe shutdown in the event of U1 failure Monitoring of the functioning of the capacitor for the U1 Redundant configuration of the fail-safe components in the motor starter The fail-safe modules are identified by yellow labeling strips.
Note A fail-safe motor starter can also be used in non-fail-safe mode with a PM-D power module. To do this, the coding for the safety group in the terminal module of the fail-safe motor starter must be set to SG3 and the U1 and U2 supply voltages must have the same potential.
Safety note When you use expansion modules (brake modules xB1 to xB4, 2DI/-2DI COM/2DI LC COM control modules), you must ensure that these modules are not fail-safe modules with fail-safe technology.
9-14
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Reversing starters
Safety note
Expansion module Non-fail-safe mode xB1 xB2 xB3 xB4 2DI control module 2DI COM control module 2DI LC COM control module
1
Operating mode SIL1/ cat. 1, 2 X X X 1) X 1) X 1) SIL2/ cat. 3 X X X 1) X 1) X 1) X 1) SIL3/ cat. 4 X X
X X X X X
) No feedback to the fail-safe technology may occur through the input point, i.e. cross-circuits to the sensor wiring should be prevented (cross-circuit secure wiring must be laid, also in case of failure).
Safety note Only applies to fail-safe mode (fail-safe technology) The F-RS1e-x can only be operated in the potential group of a PM-D F PROFIsafe or PM-D F X1 that safely limits the voltage to within the SIMATIC range.
Safety note Cyclic test of the F-RS1e-x - Shunt release/starter protection switch Request self-test (DO 0.5) Starter protection switch must be in "Trip" position Turn starter protection switch to "0" Starter protection switch must remain in "0" position by itself Turn starter protection switch to "1" Starter protection switch must remain in "1" position by itself - Contactor Execute ON/OFF cycle with the emergency stop command using the mechanically selected SG bus. Execute the test for clockwise rotation (DO 0.0 - motor cw - must be on "1"), then execute the test for counterclockwise rotation (DO 0.1 - motor ccw must be on "1"). The tests must be executed at commissioning and cyclically at least every 3 to 6 months (intermittent operation).
9-15
Reversing starters
Safety note Only one SG bus can be selected in the terminal module for each motor starter.
Safety note You must only use the F-RS1e-x motor starter to control motors that do not constitute a danger to persons or to the environment if they suddenly shut down.
Important After U1 has been applied, the F-RS1e-x requires approximately 30 s until the internal self-test is completed. DI 0.0 ready is then set in the process image via the host/PLC. Once the internal self-test is completed, the selected SG bus is monitored.
9-16
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Reversing starters
View of the fail-safe F-RS1e-x reversing starter

Rotary switch Starter protection switch
SF group error DEVICE dvice status C-STAT contactor status LEDs Safety group SG1 to SG6 Slot for 2DI/-2DI COM/-2DI LC COM control modules with transparent cover salable Aperture for SIRIUS standard accessories
Latch indicator
Figure 9-5: Fail-safe F-RS1e-x reversing starter
9-17
Reversing starters
Sketched circuit diagram of the fail-safe F-RS1e-x reversing starter

1L1 3L2 5L3 SG1 to 6 DI0.0 DI 0.1 DI0.2 DI0.3 Mechanical selection of the safety group Ready from host/PLC Motor ON/current flow Group error General warning
Input 1 expansion module DI0.4 Input 2 expansion module DI0.5 Logic Input 3 control module 2DI/-2DI COM/-2DI LC COM (IN 3)
DI0.6
Input 4 control module 2DI/-2DI COM/-2DI LC COM (IN 4) DI0.7 DI 1.0 - 1.5 Motor current Iact DI 1.6 DO0.0 DO0.1 DO0.2 DO0.3 DO0.4 DO 0.5 K1 K2 Manual operation local Motor cw Motor ccw Brake Trip Reset Emergency start Self-test
K2
K1
Auxiliary switch for circuit state monitoring
Figure 9-6: Sketched circuit diagram of the fail-safe F-RS1e-x reversing starter
2T1 4T2 6T3
9-18
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Reversing starters
9.3.3
Module replacement
If a module has to be replaced, an acceptance test is not necessary. With the F-RS1e-x, however, it is necessary to repeat the safety function test (see cyclic test).
Warning If there is a pending On signal for the contactor, the motor starts up automatically. This applies to a F-RS1e-x motor starter after the self-test if there is not an emergency stop on the selected SG bus.
9-19
Reversing starters
9.3.4
Parameters
The parameters are described in detail in Section 8.5. The table below lists the actions and value ranges that can be set with the various parameters for the RS1e-x and F-RS1e-x reversing starters.
Parameters Action, value range Increment 10 mA 0.3 to 3 A (0.05 to 1.1 kW) 2.4 to 8 A (1.1 to 3 kW) 2.4 to 16 A (1.1 to 7.5 kW) Shutdown without restart Shutdown with restart Warning CLASS 10 CLASS 20 Increment 1 s 0 to 255 s 0 = deactivated Factory setting GSD/device 0.3/3 A 2.4/8 A 2.4/16 A Module Applicability Module
Rated operating current Range 1 Range 2 Range 3
Tripping class
CLASS 10 0
Module Module
Idle time Cancellation of the thermal overload module for operational switching Response to current limit vio- Warning lation Disconnect Lower current limit Increment 3.125 % 18.75 to 100 % 1) Upper current limit Increment 3.125 % 50 to 150 % 1) Response to residual current Warning detection Disconnect 2) Response to asymmetry Warning Disconnect Behavior at CPU/Master Use dummy value STOP Keep last value Group diagnosis Disable Enable
1) Of the rated operational current
2) Possible in the case of the RS1e-x reversing starter with an order number ending in ...AA3 and in the
case of the F-RS1e-x

Table 9-5: Parameters for the high feature RS1e-x reversing starter and the fail-safe F-RS1e-x reversing starter
9-20
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Reversing starters
Parameters Input 1, 2 - signal level (x interface, expansion module) Input 3, 4 - signal level (2DI control module, 2DI COM control module, 2DI LC COM control module) (see Section 8.5) Input 1 to 4 - action
Factory setting NO
NO only NO only NO only Safety group 4)

3
No action Shutdown without restart Shutdown with restart Shutdown at limit position, clockwise rotation Shutdown at limit position, counterclockwise rotation General warning 3) Manual operation local 3) Emergency start 3) Motor cw 3) Motor ccw 3) Not assigned SG1 to SG6
No action
Module
Not assigned
Module
) Also possible with inputs 1 and 2 for RS1e-x reversing starters with order numbers ending in ...AA3, as well as with F-RS1e-x 4 ) Only with F-RS1e-x
Table 9-5: (cont.)Parameters for the high feature RS1e-x reversing starter and the fail-safe F-RS1e-x reversing
9-21
Reversing starters
9.3.5
Reversing starters Dimensions and weight Installation dimensions W x H x D (mm) Reversing starter incl. terminal module Height with PE/N block Depth with brake control module 2DI Weight Reversing starter incl. terminal module Reversing starter incl. PE/N terminal block Module-specific data Assignment type (up to Ie < 16 A at 400 V) Pollution severity At 400 V At 500 V Type 2 130 x 290 x 150 332 173 2.2 kg 2.3 kg RS1e-x F-RS1e-x
3, IEC 60664 (IEC 61131) 2, IEC 60664 (IEC 61131) I, IEC 60536 (VDE 0106, Part 1) IP20, IEC 60529 at Ie 0.3 to 3 A 2.4 to 8 A 2.4 to 16 A SIL tripping class category approx. 9 W approx. 10 W approx. 18 W 3 5, 6 4
Safety class
Degree of protection Heat loss Pv 1)
Maximum attainable safety classes: 3) IEC 61508 DIN V 19250 EN 954-1
4 2)
Safety parameters: Low demand PFDAVG (10a) Test interval 3 months Test interval 6 months High demand/continuous mode PFH Test interval 3 months 1/hr Test interval 6 months 1/hr Proof test interval years 3.5 x 10-5 8.0 x 10-5 8.1 x 10-10 1.8 x 10-9 10
1)
for motor starter and terminal module depending on the rated operating current Ie (upper setting range). 2 ) With the safety integrated SIGUARD system (see Chapter 10)
Table 9-6: Technical specifications - high feature RS1e-x reversing starter, fail-safe F-RS1e-x reversing starter
9-22
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Reversing starters
Reversing starters Control circuit 24 VDC Rated operating voltage for electronic com(20.4 to 28.8 VDC) ponents U1 Reverse polarity protection Rated operating voltage for contactor U2 Reverse polarity protection Power input From electronic component supply U1 From contactor supply U2 Pick-up: (for 80 ms) Pick-up: (for 800 ms) Hold-in: Hold-in: From SG1 to SG6 Pick-up: (for 200 ms) Hold-in: Test function of the shunt release/ starter protection switch (50 ms) from U1 From the backplane bus Main circuit Rated operating voltage Ue In accordance with DIN VDE 0106, Part 1014 IEC 60947-1, EN 60947-1 Protective separation between main and auxiliary circuits UL, CSA Rated insulation voltage Ui Rated impulse strength Uimp Rated frequency yes 24 VDC (20.4 to 28.8 VDC) 1) yes approx. 40 mA 1.7 A 2) 250 mA 3) max. 350 mA 2) max. 150 mA 3) approx. 250 mA approx. 55 mA approx. 100 mA (21.6 to 26.4 VDC) RS1e-x F-RS1e-x
approx. 1.5 A approx. 30 mA
500 VAC 400 V 600 VAC 500 VAC 6 kV 50/60 Hz
1) for motor starters with order numbers ending with ...AA3 beginning with revision level
E02 the frame potential for the safety power supply U2 connected to the electronics power supply U1. Connect the frame potential of U1 and U2 to the power module in order to prevent high compensating current. 2 ) for motor starters with order numbers ending with ...AA2 or ...AA3 and revision level E01 3 ) for motor starters with order numbers ending with ...AA3 beginning revision level E02
Table 9-6: (cont.)Technical specifications - high feature RS1e-x reversing starter, fail-safe F-RS1e-x reversing starter
9-23
Reversing starters
Technical specifications - starter protection switch, contactor

Reversing starters Starter protection switch Rated operating current Instantaneous overcurrent release Rated short-circuit breaking capacity to Ie = 16 A (motor starter) Mechanical life Electrical life Contactor Rated operating current Ie at 60 C AC-1 AC-2, AC-3 - At 400 V - At 500 V AC-4 at 400 V Max. permissible output of the threephase induction motors at 500 VAC Positively driven operation - auxiliary contacts, contactor Mechanical life Contactor Electrical life Switching frequency Surge suppression Operating times in the case of DC operation (total break time = contact parting time + arcing time) At 0.85 to 1.1 x Us - Closing time (ms) - Contact parting time (ms) Arcing time (ms) At 1.0 x Us - Closing time (ms) - Contact parting time (ms) 16 A 16 A 11 A 9A 7.5 kW yes 3/8/16 A Fixed setting at 13 x Ie max 50 kA at 400 V > 100 000 operating cycles 100 000 operating cycles RS1e-x F-RS1e-x
10 million operating cycles see graphic 80/hr Zener diodes integrated
25 to 100 20 to 50 10 to 15 typ. 25 typ. 20
50 to 170 40 to 100 10 to 15 typ. 50 typ. 40
Table 9-7: Technical specifications of the RS1e-x and F-RS1e-x - starter protection switch and contactor
9-24
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Reversing starters

107 8 6 4
2 106 8 6 4 2 105 8 6 4 2 104 8 6 4 2 103 1 2 3 1,1 4 5 6 8 3 10 12 20 16 7,5 30 40 50 60 80 100 200 Ia(A) 400 Ie(A) PN (kW)
Ia = Breaking current Ie = Rated operating current PN = Rated power of three-phase motors at 400 V
9-25
Reversing starters
9-26
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Safety integrated SIGUARD system
10
Page 10-2 10-4 10-13 10-20 10-21 10-25
Section 10.1 10.2 10.3 10.4 10.5 10.6 Features
Subject
Terminal modules TM-PF30 S47 and TM-X15 S27-01 Power modules PM-D F1 to 5 Connection module PM-X ET 200S with safety integrated SIGUARD system Safety integrated system configurations
10-1
10.1
Features
ET 200S SIGUARD integrates the following functions in contacting form: EMERGENCY STOP function for categories 2-4 (EN 954-1) Protective-door monitoring for categories 2-4 (EN 954-1) Integration into existing safety systems Standard motor starters with installation widths of 45/90 mm require a failsafe kit 1 or 2 for applications of safety category 2 or higher. High feature motor starters with installation widths of 65/90 mm incorporate the fail-safe functionality High feature direct soft starters can be used up to safety category 1 Fail-safe motor starters are suitable for SIGUARD up to category 1.
Layout of the ET 200S SIGUARD

The illustration below shows how an ET 200S SIGUARD application with monitored start for EMERGENCY STOP with a contactor for category 4 to EN 954-1 has to be wired, the configuration illustrated here by way of example shows standard motor starters with installation widths of 45/90 mm.
A1 PM-D F1 A2 DS A3 DS A4 RS A5
PM-X Termin. module
Q1
Power switch
PLC
Master
IM 151
Profibus-DP
TM-PF30 S47-B1
F kit 1
F kit 1
F kit 2
TM-X15 S27-01
Terminating cover
K1
Infeed contactor
Figure 10-1: External wiring of the SIGUARD EMERGENCY STOP circuit (category 4) EN 954-1
10-2
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
L+ U1 M
1 8 2 9
A1
6 13 7 14 22 23 24 17 27 25 26 28
OUT+ OUT13 ON 14
A5
1 RF 121 2 RF 222 K1
A1+ U2 A2-
4 11 5 12
11 21 EM. STOP 12 22
6 7
AUX2 A1 K1 A2 AUX3
1L1 400V AC 1L2 1L3
Q1
21
K1
1L1 3L2 5L3 22
A2
A3
A4
E Fault E A F kit 1 Fault E A
E Fault F kit 1 E A
E F kit 2 A E 2T1 4T2 6T3
E 2T1 4T2 6T3 2T1 4T2 6T3
N PE
N PE M 3~
N PE
M 3~
M 3~ E = integrated input for programming A = integrated output for programming = line for external wiring
Figure 10-1: (cont.) External wiring of the SIGUARD EMERGENCY STOP circuit (category 4) EN 954-1
N PE
10-3
10.2
10.2.1
Terminal modules TM-PF30 S47 and TM-X15 S27-01

Terminal modules are needed for wiring the PM-D F1 to 5 power modules and the PM-X connection modules in the safety integrated SIGUARD system. The following table shows which power modules you can use with the various terminal modules. You can find information on the terminal modules in the following chapters: Chapter 6 for the PM-D power module and all motor starters Chapter 11 for expansion modules such as the brake control module Chapter 12 for fail-safe modules
Power modules Terminal modules for safety integrated SIGUARD system
TM-PF30 S47 -B0 1) PM-D F1 PM-D F2 PM-D F3 PM-D F4 PM-D F5 PM-X

1
TM-X15 S27-01 -C1 3) -D0
-B1 2) X X
-C0 1)
X X
X X
X X X X
) For suitable power module in subordinate, cascaded safety groups (potential subgroup). 2 ) For suitable power module in higher-order or standalone safety group (potential group). 3 ) For expansion with suitable power module in separate ET 200S stations (potential subgroup).
Table 10-1: Assignment of the terminal modules for SIGUARD modules
Color coding labels


Terminals 1/8, 2/9, 4/11, etc. are bridged in the terminal module and can be used to loop the potentials through (through-connection terminals).
10-4
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
10.2.2
Features
The following features apply only for the TM-PF30 S47 terminal modules TM-PF30 S47-B terminal modules for PM-D F1/F2 power modules TM-PF30 S47-C terminal modules for PM-D F3/F4 power modules TM-PF30 S47-D0 terminal modules for PM-D F5 power modules The terminal module consists of a support and a terminal block. Connection by screw-type terminals Start of a group of motor starters with safety integrated system (see also Section 10.6) Prewiring possible AUX1 cable fed through without terminals
10.2.3
Models
There are two TM-PF30 S47-B terminal-module models: TM-PF30 S47-B0 (can be used to the right of a B0, B1, C1) Terminal module for potential subgroup, sensor connection; for example, emergency stop, protective door (see Sections 10.6.3, 10.6.4, 10.6.9). TM-PF30 S47-B1 (is required at the start of a potential group) Terminal module for potential group, with infeed U1, U2, sensor connection, with terminating cover (see Sections 10.6.1 - 10.6.4, 10.6.7 - 10.6.16).
There are two TM-PF30 S47-C terminal module models: TM-PF30 S47-C0 (can be used to the right of a B0, B1, C1) Terminal module for potential subgroup, U2 infeed (function, see Section 10.6.11, 10.6.12). TM-PF30 S47-C1 (can be used to continue a potential group in a new row) Terminal module for potential group, U1, U2 infeed, with terminating cover (function, see Section 10.6.13).
The TM-PF30 S47-D0 terminal module is suitable for: connecting up to 4 external floating safety circuits (see Sections 10.6.14 and 10.6.15 for details).
10-5
10.2.4
View of the TM-PF30 S47 terminal modules
-B0
-B1
-C0
-C1
-D0
Figure 10-2: View of the TM-PF30 S47 terminal modules
10-6
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
10.2.5
Terminal assignments
TM-PF30 S47-B0
Terminal 1/8 Meaning View Terminal 17/24
2 2
Meaning
Not used
Throughfeed terminal, floating ON ON Ch 1 Ch 1 Channel 1 for EMERGENCY STOP or protective door Channel 2 for EMERGENCY STOP or protective door ON button
2/9 3/10 4/11 5/12
Not used Not used Not used Not used

1 7
2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6
22 23 25 26
6/13 7/14
OUT+ OUT-
Drive for other safety integrated devices with 24 VDC / 50 mA Fed through without terminals
1 3 1 4
2 7 2 8
27 28
Ch 2 Ch 2
AUX1
Table 10-2: Terminal assignment of the TM-PF30 S47-B0 terminal module
TM-PF30 S47-B1
Terminal 1/8 L+ Meaning View Terminal 17/24
1 8 2 2 2 3 1 7 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 7 2 8
Meaning
U1: Power supply for electronic components URATED = 24 VDC
Throughfeed terminal, floating ON ON Ch 1 Ch 1 Channel 1 for EMERGENCY STOP or protective door Channel 2 for EMERGENCY STOP or protective door ON button
2/9 3/10 4/11 5/12
M A1+ A2Not used U2: Contactor supply URATED = 24 VDC
22 23 25
26
6/13 7/14
OUT+ OUT-
Drive for other safety integrated devices with 24 VDC / 50 mA Fed through without terminals
27 28
Ch 2 Ch 2
AUX1
Table 10-3: Terminal assignment of the TM-PF30 S47-B1 terminal module
10-7
TM-PF30 S47-C0
Terminal 1/8 2/9 3/10 4/11 5/12 6/13 7/14 A1+ A2OUT+ OUTAUX1 Meaning Not used Not used Not used U2: Contactor supply URATED = 24 VDC Drive for other safety integrated devices with 24 VDC / 50 mA Fed through without terminals
4 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4
View
Terminal 17/24 22 23 25 26 27 28 -
Meaning Not used Not used Not used Not used
Table 10-4: Terminal assignment of the TM-PF30 S47-C0 terminal module
TM-PF30 S47-C1
Terminal 1/8 2/9 3/10 4/11 5/12 L+ M A1+ A2Meaning U1: Power supply for electronic components URATED = 24 VDC Not used U2: Contactor supply URATED = 24 VDC
4 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 2 7 2 8
View
Terminal 17/24 RF1 RF2 IN+
Meaning Not used Feedback loop Not used
2 2 2 3
22 23 25 26 27
Drive from PM-D F1 to 4 OUT+ Drive from PM-D F1 to 4 OUT-
6/13 7/14 -
OUT+ Drive for other safety integrated devices with 24 VDC / 50 mA OUTAUX1 Fed through without terminals
28
IN-
Table 10-5: Terminal assignment of the TM-PF30 S47-C1 terminal module
10-8
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
TM-PF30 S47-D0
Terminal 1/8 2/9 3/10 4/11 5/12 6/13 7/14 OUT 1.1 Enabling circuit 1 OUT 1.2 OUT 2.1 Enabling circuit 2 OUT 2.2 AUX1 Fed through without terminals
5 11 29 12 30 12 41 2 6 2 7 2 8 4 11 18 2 5
Meaning Not used Not used Not used
View
Terminal 15/22 16/23 17/24 18/25 19/26 20/27 21/28 OUT 3.1
Meaning Not used Not used Not used Enabling circuit 3 OUT 3.2 OUT 4.1 Enabling circuit 4 OUT 4.2
Table 10-6: Terminal assignment of the TM-PF30 S47-D0 terminal module
10.2.6
Technical specifications of the TM-PF30 S47 terminal modules

Dimensions and weight Installation dimensions W x H x D (mm) Depth with power module (mm) Weight (g) Insulation voltages and rated currents Insulation voltage Rated operating voltage Rated operating current Connection cross-sections Single-core (mm2) Finely stranded with wire end ferrule (mm2) AWG cables, single- or multi-core Wiring Tool required Tightening torque (Nm) Standard screwdriver, size 1 0.4 to 0.7 1 x (0.14 to 2.5) 1 x (0.14 to 1.5) to IEC 60947 500 V 24 VDC 10 A 30 x 102 x 196.5 117.5 approx. 350
1 x (18 to 22)
Table 10-7: Technical specifications of the TM-PF30 S47 terminal modules
10-9
10.2.7 Features
TM-X15 S27-01 terminal module
TM-X15 S27-01 terminal module for PM-X connection module The terminal module consists of a support and a terminal block. Termination of a group of motor starters with safety integrated system for connection of an external infeed contactor with auxiliary contact and switched supply voltage (see also Section 10.6.1) Connection of a group of motor starters with safety integrated system to an external safety combination; only in conjunction with TM-P15 S27-01 (see also Section 10.6.6) Connection by screw-type terminals Prewiring possible AUX1 cable fed through without terminals
Models
Both the above applications are covered by a single model.
View of TM-X15 S27-01
Figure 10-3: TM-X15 S27-01 terminal module
10-10
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Terminal assignment
The following table illustrates the terminal assignment of the TM-X15 S27-01 terminal module for the PM-X connection module.
View Terminal 1 2 RF 1 RF 2 Meaning Connection of the auxiliary switch to infeed contactor for monitoring the switch position (RF = feedback loop)
6 7
6
AUX2 AUX3 AUX1
Connect to A1+ of the infeed contactor Connect to A2- of the infeed contactor Fed through without terminals
Table 10-8: Terminal assignment of the TM-X15 S27-01 terminal module for the PM-X connection module
Color coding labels

Important If there is no infeed contactor connected to the PM-X connection module, jumper the feedback loop with terminals 1 and 2.
10-11
Technical specifications - TM-X15 S27-01 terminal module

Dimensions and weight Installation dimensions W x H x D (mm) Depth with connection module (mm) Weight (g) Insulation voltages and rated currents Insulation voltage Rated operating voltage Rated operating current Connection cross-sections Single-core (mm2) Finely stranded with wire end ferrule (mm2) AWG cables, single- or multi-core Wiring Tool required Tightening torque (Nm) Standard screwdriver, size 1 0.4 to 0.7 1 x (0.14 to 2.5) 1 x (0.14 to 1.5) to IEC 60947 500 V 24 VDC 10 A 15 x 102 x 196.5 117.5 approx. 175
1 x (18 to 22)
Table 10-9: Technical specifications - TM-X15 S27-01
10-12
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
10.3
Features
Power modules PM-D F1 to 5
Feature 1 Basic units are Basic unit required for Suitable for applications up to safety category (EN 954-1). (PM-D F3 to 5: max. is the category of the basic unit F1, F2). Emergency stop circuit with monitored start. Protective-door circuit with automatic start. Expansion with delay from 0.5 to 30 s (steplessly variable). Cover for time setting takes a lead seal. For integrating other ET 200S rails in an emergency stop circuit. 2-channel sensor polling. All inputs cross-circuit-proof. Two enabling circuits as normally-open contacts (for shutting down the motor starters). Four enabling circuits as normally-open contacts (floating, for any use). One output for driving plug-in devices (max. 50 mA). X X X X X X X X 4 X X 4 X
PM-D F 2 X X 3 X 4 X 4 3 4 5
X X X
X X
X X
X X
Each time the emergency stop device runs an emergency stop cycle, the switch- X ing elements of the motor starters are checked to ensure that they open and close correctly. Each time the protective door is actuated, the switching elements of the motor starters are checked to ensure that they open and close correctly. A short-circuit in the sensor circuit triggers the internal electronic fuse. The device is again fully operational as soon as the short-circuit has been rectified. X X X X
Welded contacts in any release circuits are detected and prevent the device from X restarting. Welded contacts in any release circuits are detected and prevent the PM-D F1/ F2 basic device from restarting. Two redundant internal safety relays protect the contactor supply U2 (CON). Plug-in for TM-PF30 S47-B0 and ...-B1. Plug-in for TM-PF30 S47-C0 and ...-C1. Plug-in for TM-PF30 S47-D0 The power module conducts the voltages for supplying the electronic compoX nents to the voltage buses of the terminal modules. It does this for all the motor starters in a potential group. Monitoring of the U1 (PWR) and U2 (CON) voltages (U2 not in the case of PM-D F5). Voltage failures are displayed and reported.
Table 10-10: Features of the SIGUARD PM-D F1 to 5 power modules
X X X X X X X X X
X X X
X X
10-13
Caution Power modules can be neither inserted nor removed during operation.
Connect only floating contacts to: - the ON circuit (terminals 22/23) - the sensor circuits (terminals 25/26 and 27/28) - the feedback circuit.
Views
PM-D F SIGUARD SF
LEDs:
SF Group error
PM-D F3 SIGUARD SF
LEDs:
SF Group error
PWR CON STAT
PWR (power) (U1) CON (contactor) (U2) STAT status indicator for safety relay
PWR CON STAT

12 6 0,5 30s 24
PWR (power) (U1) CON (contactor) (U2) STAT status indicator for safety relay Delay 0.5 to 30 s
3RK1903-1BD00
PM-D F1, F2, F4 power modules

PM-D F5 SIGUARD SF
PM-D F3 power module
LEDs:
SF Group error
PWR STAT
PWR (power) (U1) STAT status indicator for safety relay
3RK1903-1BF00
PM-D F5 power module

Figure 10-4: Views of the SIGUARD PM-D F1 to 5 power modules
10-14
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Mechanical coding of the modules

When the module is first inserted, the terminal module is mechanically coded (two coding elements) to ensure that, in the event of a fault, it can only be replaced by a module with identical functions. Note the configured structure when installing, and identify the terminal modules with the labeling strips.
10.3.1
Parameters
The following table indicates the bus parameter that can be set for the PM-D F1 to 5 power modules.
Group diagnosis
Disable
Module
Table 10-11: Parameters for SIGUARD PM-D F1 to 5 power modules
Process and diagnosis telegrams

None
10-15
10.3.2
Electrical configuration
Block circuit diagram for PM-D F1, F2

The illustration below is a basic circuit diagram of the SIGUARD power modules, using the PM-D F1, emergency stop with monitored start by way of example. PM-D F2, protective door with automatic start.
L+ 1/8 ON ON CH1 CH1 CH2 CH2 22 23 25 26 27 28 A1+ 4/11
PTC fuse
Chnl. 1
PTC fuse
PSU Control logic
Chnl. 2
RF 2/9 M 7/14 OUT -
ET 200S Bus
VA2- VA2+ AUX2 AUX3 5/12 A26/13 OUT +
Figure 10-5: Basic circuit diagram of the SIGUARD PM-D F1, F2 power modules with TM-PF30 S47-B1
Explanation
OUT +/- is a safe output for driving other safety integrated devices (e. g. PM-D F3, F4). The procedure for commissioning is as follows: Connect the supply voltage U1 to the L+ and M terminals. Connect the supply voltage U2 to the A1+ and A2- terminals. PM-D F1: The emergency stop circuits connected to the CH1 and CH2 terminals must be closed. PM-D F2: Terminals 22-23 (ON) must be jumpered for autostart mode. The protective-door circuits connected to the CH1 and CH2 terminals must be closed. The system starts up: PM-D F1: As soon as the ON button at the ON terminals is pressed. The emergency stop circuits and the ON button are monitored for cross-circuit during operation. Permanent jumpering of the ON terminals is not permissible. As soon as the ON terminals are closed. The protective door circuits are monitored for cross-circuit during operation.
PM-D F2:
If two or more safety integrated modules are cascaded, the total reaction time of 200 ms must be borne in mind.
10-16
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Block circuit diagram for PM-D F3, F4

The illustration below is a basic circuit diagram of the SIGUARD PM-D F3, F4 power modules.
L+ 1) 1/8 IN+ 1) IN- 1) 27 28 A1+ 4/11 OUT 7/14 RF 1) 22
applicable only for PM-D F3 PSU Control logic Ch. 2 Ch. 1
PTC fuse
RF
2/9 M 1)
1)
ET 200S Bus 5/12 A2-
VA2- AUX3
VA2+ AUX2 6/13 OUT +
RF 23 RF 1)
RF
only present in the case of TM-PF30 S47-C1
with TM-PF30 S47-C1
in the case of the S47-C0
Figure 10-6: Basic circuit diagram of the SIGUARD PM-D F3, F4 power modules with TM-PF30 S47-C1 or C0
Explanation
IN +/- is the input for safe driving by an upline safety integrated device (e. g. PM-D F1 to 4). OUT +/- is a safe output for driving other safety integrated devices (e. g. PM-D F3, F4). The procedure for commissioning is as follows: Connect the supply voltage U1 to the L+ and M terminals 1). Connect the supply voltage U2 to the A1+ and A2- terminals. The PM-D F3/F4 power module must be integrated via the RF1 and RF2 terminals into the feedback circuit of the PM-D F1/F2 basic device 1). Connect the drive of the upline safety integrated device (e.g. PM-D F1 to 4) to the IN+/- terminals 1).
1
) Applicable to TM-PF30 S47-C1 only.
PM-D F3 only: The PM-D F3 power module shuts down when the preset time has elapsed. If two or more safety integrated modules are cascaded, the total reaction time of 200 ms must be borne in mind.
10-17
Block circuit diagram for PM-D F5

The illustration below is a basic circuit diagram of the SIGUARD PM-D F5 power module. .
OUT OUT OUT OUT 1.1 2.1 3.1 4.1 4/ 11 A1+ A26/ 18/ 20/ 13 25 27 RF
PSU
L+
Ch. 1 Control logic Ch. 2
ET 200S Bus
RF 5/ 12 7/ 19/ 14 26 21/ 28
OUT OUT OUT OUT 1.2 2.2 3.2 4.2

Figure 10-7: Block circuit diagram of the SIGUARD PM-D F5 power module
Explanation
The ET 200S expansion module PM-D F5 can be used only in conjunction with a PM-D F1 to 4. The PM-D F5 can be installed at any position between a PM-D F1 to 4 and the associated PM-X. The procedure for commissioning is as follows: The U1 and U 2 supply voltages are carried by the internal wiring. Connect the floating enabling circuits to the OUT 1.1 - OUT 4.2 terminals. The PM-D F5 power module is integrated via the internal wiring into the feedback circuit of the PM-D F1, F2 basic device.
10-18
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
10.3.3
Technical specifications - PM-D F1 to 5

Dimensions and weight Installation dimensions W x H x D (mm) (incl. terminal module) 30 x 196.5 x 117.5 Weight (g) approx. 190 Module-specific data Mechanical life 10 x 106 switching cycles > 200 000 switching cycles at Ie Electrical life Ambient temperature 0 to 60 C Degree of protection IP20 Utilization category DC-13 Control times Minimum command duration, PMD F1, F2 200 ms Switch-on delay, PM-D F3 to 5 < 150 ms Recovery time - PM-D F1, F2 <1s - PM-D F3 to 5 < 50 ms Release time: - PM-D F1, F2, F4 30 ms - PM-D F5 15 ms - PM-D F3 0.5 to 30 s (steplessly adjustable) Setting precision 15 % referenced to end of scale value Voltages, currents, potentials Control circuit U1 (PWR): 20.4 to 28.8 VDC up to 60 C Rated control supply voltage Us Power consumption 2.4 W Recommended short-circuit protection (gG)gL 2 A Loadability of OUT+/24 VDC / 50 mA (PTC fuse) Switched auxiliary circuit U2 (CON), PM-D F1 to 4 or floating enabling circuits, PM-D F5: 20.4 to 28.8 VDC up to 60 C Rated control supply voltage Us Rated operating current Ie 13 to 24 VDC 4A 3 A, PM-D F5 Thermal continuous current Ith Recommended short-circuit protection for enabling circuits 5A 3 A, PM-D F5 Cartridge fuses: NH type 3NA, DIAZED type 5SB NEOZED type 5SE Operating class (gG) gL 6 A yes no no 10 mA
Supply of: Motor starters Electronic modules Ex[i] modules Power input From the backplane bus Connection Cable length for emergency stop and ON buttons Conductor cross-section Standards, approvals See the "SIGUARD and SIMATIC S5-95F safety integrated systems" application manual BG UL, CSA certification SUVA certification
Table 10-12: Technical specifications - PM-D F1 to 5
max. 1000 m 2 x 1.5 mm2
yes yes planned
10-19
10.4
Features
Connection module PM-X

For connecting an external infeed contactor or other external actuators. For integrating into external safety circuits
View of PM-X
LED:
SF Group error
Figure 10-8: PM-X connection module
Technical specifications - PM-X connection module

Dimensions and weight Overall W x H x D (mm) including terminal module Weight (g) Voltages, currents, potentials For information on the switched auxiliary circuit U2 at terminals 6 and 7 of the TM-X15 S27-01, see PM-D F1 to 5. Power draw from the backplane bus
Table 10-13: Technical specifications - PM-X
15 x 196.5 x 117.5 approx. 130
10 mA
Important If there is no infeed contactor connected to the PM-X connection module, jumper the feedback loop with terminals 1 and 2.
10-20
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
10.5
ET 200S with safety integrated SIGUARD system

Operation of the motor starters is monitored in that the series-connected normally closed contacts of the feedback loop are connected by the terminal modules.
Power module PM-D F1
L+ 1/8 U1 M 2/9 22 23 25 26 27 28
Monitoring motor starters
EMERGENCY STOP K0 ON
2 RF2
DS
DS
DS
U2
A1+ 4/11 A2- 5/12
PM-X
K0
1 RF1
Feedback circuit
K3
Q1 K1
Q2 K2
Q3 K3
PM-X
AUX3 7 AUX2 6
K1
K2
F kits
K1 K2 K3
K0
Infeed contactor
Direct starter
Figure 10-9: Circuit diagram for SIGUARD emergency stop circuit
An ET 200S is compatible with safety integration and can be converted (or upgraded in the field) accordingly.
Fail-safe kits 1 and 2

For applications of safety category 2 (EN 954-1) and higher, the standard motor starters with installation widths of 45/90 mm must be equipped with fail-safe kits. DS1e-x and RS1e-x high feature motor starters with installation widths of 65/130 mm incorporate the fail-safe functionality. There are two fail-safe kits available and the components of both are listed below: Fail-safe kit 1 for the DS, DS-x, DS1-x standard direct starters:
An auxiliary switch block A contact holder with a connecting lead for the direct starter A contact carrier with two contacts for the terminal module (for infeed contactor) A contact carrier with three contacts for the terminal module (for feedback loop)
Fail-safe kit 2 for the RS, RS-x, RS1-x standard reversing starters:
Two auxiliary switch blocks A contact holder with a connecting lead for the reversing starter Two contact carriers with two contacts for the terminal module (for infeed contactor) Two contact carriers with three contacts for the terminal module (for feedback loop) A connecting lead
10-21
Installing and wiring fail-safe kit 1

The procedure for preparing the feedback loop for the emergency stop circuit in the case of a DS, DS-x, DS1-x standard direct starter is as follows: 1. Insert the contact carrier for the feedback loop (3 contacts) offset slightly to the right into the top opening in the terminal module and then slide it to the left. 2. Seat the contact carrier for the infeed contactor (2 contacts) in the bottom opening of the terminal module. 3. Plug the contact holder with the connecting lead into the rear of the direct starter. 4. Route the connecting lead to the front of the direct starter as shown in the illustration. 5. Plug the auxiliary switch block into the appropriate opening in the direct starter. 6. Connect the connecting lead to the auxiliary switch block.
6 4
1 2
Table 10-14: Installing and wiring fail-safe kit 1 - standard direct starters
10-22
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Installing and wiring fail-safe kit 2

The procedure for preparing the feedback loop for the emergency stop circuit in the case of an RS, RS-x, RS1-x standard reversing starter is as follows:
Drawing 1 Procedure Starting at the left, insert the two contact carriers with two contacts for the infeed contactor into the two bottom openings of the terminal module and make sure they are correctly latched. Insert a light gray contact carrier with three contacts into the top left opening and a dark gray contact carrier with three contacts into the top right opening of the terminal module and make sure they are correctly latched.
2
3
3 1 1
Plug the contact holders with the connecting leads into the left opening in the rear of the reversing starter. Route the connecting leads through the channel to the front of the reversing starter.
Table 10-15: Installing and wiring fail-safe kit 2 - standard reversing starters
10-23

Drawing 5 Procedure Plug the two auxiliary switch blocks into the appropriate openings in the reversing starter. Connect the connecting leads to the auxiliary switch blocks.
Connect the two auxiliary switch blocks by means of the connecting lead.
Table 10-15: (cont.)Installing and wiring fail-safe kit 2 - standard reversing starters
10-24
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
10.6
Safety integrated system configurations

Standard motor starters with installation widths of 45/90 mm were used in the following configurations. These examples can also be used for high feature motor starters with installation widths of 65/130 mm. High feature/fail-safe motor starters with installation widths of 65/130 mm incorporate the F kit for SIGUARD.
Caution Derating (see Section 3.4) is not taken into account in these configurations.
Safety note The following applications are only some examples of typical circuits. No liability is accepted for the reliability, certification or compatibility of the examples. Use at your own risk.
10-25
PM-D
PM-X
PLC F kit 1 F kit 1 F kit 2
Master
IM 151
Profibus-DP
Terminating module
TM-PF30S47-B1
TM-P15 S27-01
TM-X15 S27-01
Terminating cover
10-26
without SIGUARD A2 DS DS RS PM-D F1 Q1
Power switch
with SIGUARD category 4 A4 DS DS RS A5 A6 A7 A8 A9
10.6.1
A1
A3
K1
Infeed contactor
The components required to set up this example are as follows:

Category 1 11) 1 2 3/4 Order number Description
Figure 10-10: Safety circuit with integrated SIGUARD combination with SIGUARD category 4
L+ OUT+ 1 RF 121 2 RF 2 22
2 1 1
without SIGUARD A5
OUT13 6 13 7 14 22 K1
L+ U1 M
A1
1 8 2 9
AUX2
A9
1 1 1 12)
Safety circuit with integrated SIGUARD combination
U1 M
1 8 2 9
6 13 7 14
AUX3
3RK1903-0BA00 3RK1903-0AA00 3RK1903-1BA00 3RK1903-1AA00 3RK1903-1CB00 3RK1903-1AB00 3RT1035-1BB40 3RH1921-1DA11 3RA1931-1BA00 3RV1031-4HA10
A1+ 6 U2 5 12 26 28 12 22
4 11
A1+
4 11
ON 23 14 24 17 27 EM. STOP 11 21 25 AUX2 A1 K1 7 A2 AUX3
U2
1 1
1 ) 2)
A2-
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
5 12
A2-
2 1 1 2 1 1 1
PM-D TM-P15 S27-01 1 PM-D F1 1 TM-PF30 S47-B1 1 PM-X 1 TM-X15 S27-01 1 Infeed contactor for maximum configuration 40 A 1 Auxiliary switch for infeed contactor 1 Connection module DC 1 Circuit breaker, protection for maximum configuration 40A 2 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA2 DS xx in accordance with the current rating 1 3RK1903-0AB00 TM-DS45 S32 with power bus infeed 1 3RK1903-0AB10 TM-DS45 S31 with power bus throughfeed 2 3RK1903-1CA00 F kit 1 1 3RK1301-xxB00-1AA2 RS xx in accordance with the current rating 1 3RK1903-0AC10 TM-RS90 S31 with power bus throughfeed 1 3RK1903-1CA01 F kit 2 Emergency stop looped into the supply lead for supply voltage U2 (A1+, A2-) with jumper between terminals 1, 2
F kit 2
M 3~
with SIGUARD category 4
Fault
A7
F kit 1
E A
21
22
Fault
Q1
K1
A6
E A
without SIGUARD
Fault
A4
E A
Fault
A3
E A
Fault
1L1 400 VAC 1L2 1L3
A2
E A
Figure 10-10: (cont.) Safety circuit with integrated SIGUARD combination
This configuration satisfies the requirements of all categories up to category 4 (EN 954-1) and employs an integral SIGUARD combination.
N PE
M 3~
M 3~
M 3~
M 3~
M 3~
E = integrated input for programming A = integrated output for programming = line for external wiring
Fault
A8
F kit 1
E A
N PE
N PE N PE 2T1 4T2 6T3 2T1 4T2 6T3 2T1 4T2 6T3 2T1 4T2 6T3 2T1 4T2 6T3 2T1 4T2 6T3
1L1 3L2 5L3 1L1 3L2 5L3
10-27
PM-X
PM-X
PLC F kit 1 F kit 1 F kit 1 F kit 1
Master
Profibus-DP
Terminating module
TM-PF30 S47-B1
TM-X15 S27-01
TM-PF30 S47-B1
TM-X15 S27-01
Terminating cover
10-28
Group 1 A1 PM-D F1 Q1
Power switch Power switch
10.6.2
Group 2 A3 DS PM-D F1 Q2 DS DS A4 A5 A6 A7 A8
A2 DS
IM 151
K1
Infeed contactor Infeed contactor
K2
Group 1
Group 2
Category 3/4
Figure 10-11: Two safety circuits with integrated SIGUARD combinations

Order number Description
L+ OUT+ 1 RF 121 2 RF 2 22 13 K1 OUTU1 M 2 OUT13 ON 14 OUT+
A1 A4
L+ 1 8 2 9 6 13 7 14 22
A5
A8
1 RF 121 K2 RF 2 22
Two safety circuits with integrated SIGUARD combinations
U1 M
1 8 2 9
6 13 7 14 22
1 2 21) 2 2 2 2 22)
A1+ 6 U2 5 12 7 12 22 K1 A2A2 AUX3 AUX2 A1
4 11 A1+
23 24 17 27 EM. STOP 11 21 25 4 11 26 28
ON 23 14 24 17 27 EM. STOP 11 21 25 12 22
6 7
AUX2 A1 K2 A2 AUX3
U2
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
A2-
5 12
26 28
PM-D TM-P15 S27-01 2 PM-D F1 2 TM-PF30 S47-B1 2 PM-X 2 TM-X15 S27-01 2 Infeed contactor for maximum configuration 40 A 2 Auxiliary switch for infeed contactor 2 Connection module DC 2 Circuit breaker, protection for maximum configuration 40A 4 4 4 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA2 DS xx in accordance with the current rating 2 2 2 3RK1903-0AB00 TM-DS45 S32 with power bus infeed 2 2 2 3RK1903-0AB10 TM-DS45 S31 with power bus throughfeed 4 4 3RK1903-1CA00 F kit 1 1 ) Emergency stop looped into the supply lead for supply voltage U2 (A1+, A2-) 2 ) each with jumper between terminals 1, 2
F kit 1
M 3~ N PE M 3~ M 3~ M 3~ N PE
Group 1
Fault
A3
F kit 1
21
22
E A
Fault
1L1 400V AC 1L2 1L3
Q1
Figure 10-11: (cont.) Two safety circuits with integrated SIGUARD combinations
This configuration satisfies the requirements of all categories up to category 4 (EN 954-1) and employs two integral SIGUARD combinations. The emergency stop circuits are mutually independent: Emergency stop circuit 1 switches only group 1. Emergency stop circuit 2 switches only group 2.
K1
A2
E A
Fault
Group 2
A7
F kit 1
21
22
E A
Fault
Q2
K2
A6
F kit 1
E A
N PE 2T1 4T2 6T3 2T1 4T2 6T3 2T1 4T2 6T3 2T1 4T2 6T3
1L1 3L2 5L3 1L1 3L2 5L3
10-29
PM-X
PM-X
Master
Profibus-DP
Terminating module
TM-PF30 S47-B1
TM-X15 S27-01
TM-PF30 S47-B0
TM-X15 S27-01
Terminating cover
10-30
Group 1 Group 1.1 A1 PM-D F1 Q1
10.6.3
A2 DS DS PM-D F1 Q2 DS DS
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
IM 151
K1
K2
Group 1 Group 1.1

3/4 Category Order number Description
Figure 10-12: Two cascaded safety circuits with integrated SIGUARD combinations A4
1 RF 121 2 RF 122 13 K1 OUT2 RF 2 22 K2 OUT+ 1 RF 121
L+
A1 A8
OUT+
A5
U1 M
1 8 2 9
OUT-
1 2 21) 2 2 1 1 2 22)
6 13 7 14 22
13
6 13 7 14 22
ON 14
3RK1903-0BA00 3RK1903-0AA00 3RK1903-1BA00 3RK1903-1AA10 3RK1903-1AA00 3RK1903-1CB00 3RK1903-1AB00 3RT1035-1BB40 3RH1921-1DA11 3RA1931-1BA00 3RV1031-4HA10
A1+ 6 7 K1 A2 AUX3 26 28 AUX2 A1
4 11
23 24 17 27 EM. STOP 11 21 25 12 22
ON 23 14 24 17 27 EM. STOP 11 21 25
6 7
AUX2 A1 K2 A2 AUX3
U2
Two cascaded safety circuits with integrated SIGUARD combinations (potential group, potential subgroup)
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
A2-
5 12
26 28
12 22
PM-D TM-P15 S27-01 2 PM-D F1 1 TM-PF30 S47-B0 1 TM-PF30 S47-B1 2 PM-X 2 TM-X15 S27-01 2 Infeed contactor for maximum configuration 40 A 2 Auxiliary switch for infeed contactor 2 Connection module DC 2 Circuit breaker, protection for maximum configuration 40A 4 4 4 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA2 DS xx in accordance with the current rating 2 2 2 3RK1903-0AB00 TM-DS45 S32 with power bus infeed 2 2 2 3RK1903-0AB10 TM-DS45 S31 with power bus throughfeed 4 4 3RK1903-1CA00 F kit 1 1) Emergency stop looped into the supply lead for supply voltage U2 (A1+, A2-) 2 ) each with jumper between terminals 1, 2
F kit 1
Group 1
Fault
A3
F kit 1
21
22
E A
Fault
1L1 400V AC 1L2 1L3
Q1
K1
A2
E A
Figure 10-12: (cont.) Two cascaded safety circuits with integrated SIGUARD combinations
This configuration is identical with that in Section 10.6.2. Cascading is achieved by plugging the second PM-D F1 power module into the TM-PF30 S47-B0 terminal module. The circuits have to be cascaded if you use two emergency stop circuits which respond in the manner described below: Emergency stop circuit 1 (potential group) shuts down all of the motor starters, i.e. those in group 1 and group 1.1, but the relays of the PM-D F1 do not shut down group 1.1. Note the following: - OUT+ and OUT- remain energized in PM-D F1 group 1.1 - the ON command for restart is required only for PM-D F1 group 1. Emergency stop circuit 1.1 (potential subgroup) shuts down only some of the motor starters, i.e. only those in group 1.1
N PE
M 3~
M 3~
Group 1.1
Fault
A7
F kit 1
E A
21
22
Fault
Q2
K2
A6
F kit 1
E A
M 3~
M 3~ N PE
1L1 3L2 5L3 1L1 3L2 5L3
10-31
PM-X
PM-X
PM-X
Master
Profibus-DP
Terminating module
TM-PF30 S47-B1
TM-PF30 S47-B0
TM-X15 S27-01
TM-X15 S27-01
TM-PF30 S47-B0
TM-X15 S27-01
Group 1
Category
Terminating cover
10-32
Group 1 Group 1.1 Group 1.1.1 A2 DS Q1 to 3
Power switch
10.6.4
A1 PM-D F1 DS PM-D F1 DS DS
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
PM-D F1
IM 151
K1 to 3
Infeed contactor
Order number 3/4
Description
Group 1.1 Group 1.1.1 A4

OUT+ 1 RF 121 OUT13
Figure 10-13: Three cascaded safety circuits with integrated SIGUARD combinations A6
K1
1 2 31) 3 3 2 1 3 32)
L+
A1
OUT+
A3
U1 M
1 RF 121
1 8 2 9
OUT-
6 13 7 14 22
13
RF 1 22
6 13 7 14 22
A7 A10 , with K3 K2 configuration 2 RF 2 22 same as Group 1.1
ON 14
3RK1903-0BA00 3RK1903-0AA00 3RK1903-1BA00 3RK1903-1AA10 3RK1903-1AA00 3RK1903-1CB00 3RK1903-1AB00 3RT1035-1BB40 3RH1921-1DA11 3RA1931-1BA00 3RV1031-4HA10
A1+
4 11 26 28 12 22
23 24 17 27 EM. STOP 11 21 25 6 7
AUX2 A1
ON 23 14 24 17 27 EM. STOP 11 21 25 AUX2 A1
U2
Three cascaded safety circuits with integrated SIGUARD combinations (potential group, potential subgroup)

K2 A2 AUX3
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
A2-
5 12
26 28
12 22
K1 A2 AUX3
PM-D TM-P15 S27-01 3 PM-D F1 2 TM-PF30 S47-B0 1 TM-PF30 S47-B1 3 PM-X 3 TM-X15 S27-01 3 Infeed contactor for max.configuration 40 A 3 Auxiliary switch for infeed contactor 3 Connection module DC 3 Circuit breaker, protection for maximum configuration 40A 4 4 4 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA2 DS xx in accordance with the current rating 3 3 3 3RK1903-0AB00 TM-DS45 S32 with power bus infeed 1 1 1 3RK1903-0AB10 TM-DS45 S31 with power bus throughfeed 4 4 3RK1903-1CA00 F kit 1 1) Emergency stop looped into the supply lead for supply voltage U2 (A1+, A2-) 2 ) each with jumper between terminals 1, 2
F kit 1
M 3~ N PE M 3~ M 3~ M 3~ N PE
Group 1
Fault
Q2
K2
A5
F kit 1
21
22
E A
Fault
1L1 400V AC 1L2 1L3
Q1
Figure 10-13: (cont.) Three cascaded safety circuits with integrated SIGUARD combinations
This configuration is identical with that in Section 10.6.2. Cascading is achieved by plugging the second and third PM-D F1 power modules into a TM-PF30 S47-B0 terminal module each. The circuits have to be cascaded if you use three emergency stop circuits which respond in the manner described below: Emergency stop circuit 1 (potential group) shuts down all of the motor starters, i.e. those in group 1, group 1.1 and group 1.1.1, but the relays of the PMD F1 do not shut down group 1.1 and group 1.1.1. Note the following: - OUT+ and OUT- remain energized in PM-D F1 group 1.1 and group 1.1.1 - the ON command for restart is required only for PM-D F1 group 1. Emergency stop circuit 1.1 (potential subgroup) switches off only the motor starters in group 1.1 and group 1.1.1. Note the following: - OUT+ and OUT- remain energized in PM-D F1 group 1.1.1 - the ON command for restart is required only for PM-D F1 group 1.1. Emergency stop circuit 1.1.1 (potential subgroup) switches off only the motor starters in group 1.1.1.
K1
A2
E A
Group 1.1.1
Fault
A9
F kit 1
21
22
E A
Group 1.1
Fault
Q3
K3
A8
F kit 1
21
22
E A
1L1 3L2 5L3 1L1 3L2 5L3 1L1 3L2 5L3
10-33
PM-D
PM-X
PM-X
PLC
TM-P15 S27-01 TM-X15 S27-01 TM-X15 S27-01
Master
Profibus-DP
Terminating cover
F kit 1
F kit 1
F kit 2
L+ The components required to set up this example are as follows: 13 L+ 1 RF 1 2 RF 2 2 RF 2 1 RF 1 U1 M

Category Order number Description
11
EM. STOP
12
U1
A1 K1 Y1 1 8 2 9 6 AUX2 13 7 AUX3 14
A1
A2
ON 14
A6
Figure 10-14: Safety circuit with an external SIGUARD combination 3TK2824, category 2 A1 A2 A3 DS
3TK2824
A2
Y2
Terminating module
10-34
A4 DS RS A5 A6 K1
2 1 1 2 2 2 3RK1903-0BA00 3RK1903-0AA00 3RK1 03-1CB00 3RK1903-1AB00 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA2
10.6.5
IM 151
A1+ 6 7
13
14
Safety circuit with an external SIGUARD combination 3TK2824, category 2
A1+ 4 U2 11 A2- 5 12
AUX2 AUX3
6 AUX2 7 AUX3
1 1 2 1
U2
23
24
1 1 1
PM-D TM-P15 S27-01 PM-X TM-X15 S27-01 DS xx in accordance with the current rating 3RK1903-0AB00 TM-DS45 S32 with power bus infeed 3RK1903-0AB10 TM-DS45 S31 with power bus throughfeed 3RK1903-1CA00 F kit 1 3RK1301-xxB00-1AA2 RS xx in accordance with the current rating 3RK1903-0AC10 TM-RS90 S31 with power bus throughfeed 3RK1903-1CA01 F kit 2 3TK2824-xCB30 External safety combination x in accordance with the connection
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
A2-
F kit 2
M 3~ N PE M 3~ M 3~ N PE N PE
Fault
A4
F kit 1
E A
Fault
Figure 10-14: (cont.) Safety circuit with an external SIGUARD combination 3TK2824, category 2
1L1 400V AC 1L2 1L3
This configuration integrates ET 200S components into external safety concepts. This configuration satisfies the requirements of category 2 and employs a safety combination. The monitored motor starters connect to the right of the load feeders.
A3
E A
Fault
A5
F kit 1
E A
N PE 2T1 4T2 6T3 2T1 4T2 6T3 2T1 4T2 6T3
1L1 3L2 5L3
10-35
PM-D
PM-X
PM-X
Master
IM 151
Profibus-DP
Terminating module
TM-P15 S27-01
TM-X15 S27-01
TM-X15 S27-01
Terminating cover
10-36
A3 DS
3TK2823
A1 A2 A4 DS RS A5 A6
10.6.6
K2
Q1
Power switch
K1
Infeed contactor

Category 1 1 1 Order number Description
13 L+ 1 RF 1 1 2 RF 2 2 U1 M
2 1 1 2 21)
L+
A1 K2 Y33 1 8 2 9 6 13 AUX2 7 AUX3 14
A1
A2
ON 14
A6
3/4 1 1 2 2 1
3RK1903-0BA00 3RK1903-0AA00 3RK1903-1CB00 3RK1903-1AB00 3RT1035-1BB40
Figure 10-15: Safety circuit with an external SIGUARD combination 3TK2823, category 4
U1 M
A2
Y34
Y11 EM. STOP 11 21 Y21
Y22 Y12
12 22
A1+ 6 7
13
14
Safety circuit with an external SIGUARD combination 3TK2823
A1+ 4 U2 11 A2- 5 12
AUX2 AUX3
6 7
U2
23
24
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
A2-
PM-D TM-P15 S27-01 PM-X TM-X15 S27-01 Infeed contactor for maximum configuration 40 A RF 121 1 3RH1921-1DA11 Auxiliary switch for infeed contactor K1 1 3RA1931-1BA00 Connection module DC RF 2 22 1 3RV1031-4HA10 Circuit breaker, protection for max. config. 40A 2 2 2 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA2 DS xx in accordance with the current rating 1 1 1 3RK1903-0AB00 TM-DS45 S32 with power bus infeed 1 1 1 3RK1903-0AB10 TM-DS45 S31 with power bus throughfeed 2 2 3RK1903-1CA00 F kit 1 1 1 1 3RK1301-xxB00-1AA2 RS xx in accordance with the current AUX2 rating A1 1 1 1 3RK1903-0AC10 TM-RS90 S31 with power bus throughfeed K1 1 1 3RK1903-1CA01 F kit 2 A2 1 3TK2823-xCB30 External safety combination AUX3 x in accordance with the connection 1 ) With module A6 jumper between terminals 1, 2
F kit 2
Fault
A4
F kit 1
21
22
E A
Fault
1L1 400V AC 1L2 1L3
Q1
Figure 10-15: (cont.) Safety circuit with an external SIGUARD combination 3TK2823, category 4
This configuration integrates ET 200S components into external safety concepts. This configuration satisfies the requirements of all categories up to category 4 and employs a safety combination. The monitored motor starters connect to the right of the load feeders.
K1
A3
E A
Fault
A5
F kit 1
E A
N PE 2T1 4T2 6T3 2T1 4T2 6T3 2T1 4T2 6T3
1L1 3L2 5L3
10-37
PM-X
PM-E
2DO
2DO
2DI
PLC
Profibus-DP
Master
F kit 1 F kit 1 F kit 2
Terminating module
TM-PF30 S47-B1
TM-X15 S27-01
Terminating cover
10-38
Category 4 to EN 954-1 A1 PM-D F1 DS DS RS A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 Category 1 Q1
Power switch
10.6.7
IM 151
K1
Infeed contactor
Figure 10-16: Safety circuit incorporating pneumatic valves
Safety circuit incorporating pneumatic valves
Category 4 to EN 954-1 A1
OUT+ 1 RF 1 21 2 RF 2 22 K1 OUT13
Category 1 A6
2 6
L+ U1 M
A5
A7
1 DO0 5 DO1
1 8 2 9 6 13 7 14 22
AUX1 4
A1+ U2 A25 12 26 28
4 11
ON 23 14 24 17 27 EM. STOP 11 21 25 6 12 22
7 Y2 Y1
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
AUX2 24 VDC 2 A1 6 K1 M 3 7 A2 7 AUX3
Category 4 to EN 954-1
Category
1 11)
2 3/4
1L1 400V AC 1L2 1L3
1 1
3RK1903-0BA00 3RK1903-0AA00 1 3RK1903-1BA00 1 3RK1903-1AA00
PM-D TM-P15 S27-01 PM-D F1 TM-PF30 S47-B1
Q1
21
K1
1L1 3L2 5L3 22
2T1 4T2 6T3
2T1 4T2 6T3
N PE
N PE M 3~
N PE
M 3~
This configuration incorporates pneumatic valves into the safety shutdown capability of the ET 200S SIGUARD for category 1 to EN 954-1.
N PE
PM-X TM-X15 S27-01 Infeed contactor for maximum configuration 40 A Auxiliary switch for infeed contactor Connection module DC Circuit breaker, protection for maximum configuration 40A 2 2 2 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA2 DS xx in accordance with the current rating 1 1 1 3RK1903-0AB00 TM-DS45 S32 with power bus infeed 1 1 1 3RK1903-0AB10 TM-DS45 S31 with power bus throughfeed 2 2 3RK1903-1CA00 F kit 1 1 1 1 3RK1301-xxB00-1AA2 RS xx in accordance with the current rating 1 1 1 3RK1903-0AC10 TM-RS90 S31 with power bus throughfeed 1 1 3RK1903-1CA01 F kit 2 1 6ES7138-4CA00-0AA0 PM-E 1 6ES7193-4CC20-0AA0 TM-P15 S23-A1 1 6ES7132-4BBxx-xxxx 2DO x depending on type 1 6ES7193-4CA20-0AA0 TM-E15 S24-A1 2 XXX Pneumatic valves 1) Emergency stop looped into the supply lead for supply voltage U2 (A1+, A2-) 2) with jumper between terminals 1, 2
2T1 4T2 6T3
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-09 A2 A3 A4

E Fault E A E F kit 1 E A Fault F kit 1 E Fault E A E F kit 2 A E E
Figure 10-16: (cont.) Safety circuit incorporating pneumatic valves
1 1 3RK1903-1CB00 12) 1 3RK1903-1AB00 1 3RT1035-1BB40 1 3RH1921-1DA11 1 3RA1931-1BA00 1 3RV1031-4HA10
10-39
PM-X
PM-E
2DO
2DO
2DI
PLC
Profibus-DP
Master
Terminating module
TM-PF30 S47-B1
TM-X15 S27-01
Terminating cover
10-40
Category 4 to EN 954-1 A1 PM-D F1 Q1
Power switch
10.6.8
A2 DS DS RS
A3
A4
A5 A6 A7 A8
IM 151
K1
Infeed contactor Motor contactor
Figure 10-17: Safety circuit incorporating external actuators K2 Category 4 to EN 954-1 A1

OUT+ 1 RF 1 OUT13
Safety circuit incorporating external actuators
L+
A5 A6
A7
2 6 1 DO0 5 DO1 A1 8 4 8 21 K2 A2 3 7 22 4 2 6
A8
1 DO0 5 DO1
U1 M
1 8 2 9 6 13 7 14 22
8 Y2 3 7
21 22
A1+
4 11 26 28 12 22
ON 23 14 24 17 27 EM. STOP 11 21 25
U2
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
A2-
5 12
21 K1 2 22 21 RF 2 K2 22 21 Y1 22 AUX1 4 21 Y2 22 AUX2 24 VDC 2 A1 6 21 6 K1 7 22 M 3 Y1 A2 7 AUX3
1L1 400V AC 1L2
Category
Order number
Description
1 11) 1
2 3/4
Q1
21
K1
1L1 3L2 5L3 22
2T1 4T2 6T3
2T1 4T2 6T3
N PE
N PE
Pneumatics 21 Y1 22 Main valve
M 3~
N PE
M 3~
N PE
PM-D 1L3 TM-P15 S27-01 1 1 PM-D F1 1 1 TM-PF30 S47-B1 1 1 PM-X 1 1 TM-X15 S27-01 1 Infeed contactor for maximum configuration 40 A 1 Auxiliary switch for infeed contactor 1 Connection module DC 1 Circuit breaker, protection for maximum configuration 40A 2 2 2 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA2 DS xx in accordance with the current rating 1 1 1 3RK1903-0AB00 TM-DS45 S32 with power bus infeed 1 1 1 3RK1903-0AB10 TM-DS45 S31 with power bus throughfeed 2 2 3RK1903-1CA00 F kit 1 1 1 1 3RK1301-xxB00-1AA2 RS xx in accordance with the current rating 1 1 1 3RK1903-0AC10 TM-RS90 S31 with power bus throughfeed 1 1 3RK1903-1CA01 F kit 2 1 1 1 3RT1034-1BB44 Motor contactor 1 1 Auxiliary switch for motor contactor (if necessary) 1 1 1 6ES7138-4CA00-0AA0 PM-E 1 1 1 6ES7193-4CC20-0AA0 TM-P15 S23-A1 2 2 2 6ES7132-4BBxx-xxxx 2DO x depending on type 2 2 2 6ES7193-4CA20-0AA0 TM-E15 S24-A1 1 XXX Main valve 1 1 1 XXX Pneumatic valve 1 2 XXX Limit switches for pneumatic/main valves 1) Emergency stop looped into the supply lead for supply voltage U2 (A1+, A2-)
2T1 4T2 6T3

E Fault F kit 1 E A E A E Fault F kit 1 E Fault F kit 2 E A E A E E
Figure 10-17: (cont.) Safety circuit incorporating external actuators K2 1 3 5

2 4 6 21 22 M 3~ 21 Y2 22 22 21 21 22
This configuration incorporates external actuators (e.g. pneumatic valves, load feeders rated > 5.5 kW) into the safety shutdown capability of the ET 200S SIGUARD for category 4 to EN 954-1.
10-41
PM-X
PM-X
PLC
Profibus-DP
Master
Terminating module
TM-PF30 S47-B1
TM-PF30 S47-B0
TM-X15 S27-01
TM-X15 S27-01
Terminating cover
10-42
A1 A2 PM-D F2 Q1
Power switch
A3 DS DS RS
10.6.9
A4
A5
A6
A7
PM-D F1
IM 151
K1
Infeed contactor
Figure 10-18: Emergency stop combined with protective door
Emergency stop combined with protective door
L+ OUT+ 1 RF 1 2 RF 2 OUT13 U1 M
A1
A2
A3
OUT+ OUT-
A7
1 RF 121 2 RF 2 22 K1 6 13 7 14 22
1 8 2 9 6 13 7 14 22
A1+ U2 A2-
4 11 5 12 26 28
Protective door 6 7 AUX2 11 21 6
ON 23 14 24 17 27 EM. STOP 11 21 25 12 22
23 24 17 27 25 AUX3 26 28
AUX2 A1 7 12 22 K1 A2 AUX3
GWA-4NEB950007202-09

Category
1L1 400V AC 1L2 1L3
1 11) 1
2 3/4
Q1
21
K1
1L1 3L2 5L3 22
2T1 4T2 6T3
2T1 4T2 6T3
1 1 1
1 3RK1903-0AC10 1 3RK1903-1CA01 1 3SBxx
PM-D TM-P15 S27-01 PM-D F1 TM-PF30 S47-B1 PM-D F2 TM-PF30 S47-B0 PM-X TM-X15 S27-01 Infeed contactor for maximum configuration 40 A Auxiliary switch for infeed contactor Connection module DC Circuit breaker, protection for maximum configuration 40A DS xx in accordance with the current rating TM-DS45 S32 with power bus infeed TM-DS45 S31 with power bus throughfeed F kit 1 RS xx in accordance with the current rating TM-RS90 S31 with power bus throughfeed F kit 2 Personnel protection switchxx type
N PE
) Emergency-stop and protective-door contacts looped into infeed for supply voltage U2 (A1+, A2-) ) Important With no infeed contactor connected to the PM-X connection module, jumper the feedback circuit with terminals 1 and 2.
N PE M 3~
N PE
M 3~
This configuration combines emergency stop and protective door monitoring up to category 4 to EN 954-1.
A2 A3 A4
N PE
Figure 10-18: (cont.) Emergency stop combined with protective door
2T1 4T2 6T3

1 1 1 1 2 22) 1 1 1 1 3RK1903-0BA00 3RK1903-0AA00 3RK1903-1BA00 3RK1903-1AA00 3RK1903-1BB00 3RK1903-1AA10 3RK1903-1CB00 3RK1903-1AB00 3RT1035-1BB40 3RH1921-1DA11 3RA1931-1BA00 3RV1031-4HA10
1 1 1 1 2 22)
E E Fault F kit 1 E A Fault E A E
E Fault E A F kit 2 A
2 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA2
F kit 1
1 1
1 1 2 1
1 1 2 1
3RK1903-0AB00 3RK1903-0AB10 3RK1903-1CA00 3RK1301-xxB00-1AA2
10-43
PM-X
PM-X
PM-X
PLC
Profibus-DP
Master
F kit 1 F kit 1
F kit 1 F kit 1
Terminating module
TM-PF30 S47-B1
TM-PF30 S47-B1
TM-PF30 S47-B1
TM-X15 S27-01
TM-X15 S27-01
TM-X15 S27-01
Terminating cover
10-44
Group 1 Group 1.1 A1 A8 PM-D F2 DS A9 PM-D F1 DS PM-D F2 DS DS A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A10 Group 1.2 Q1 to 3
Power switch
10.6.10
IM 151
K1 to 3
Infeed contactor
Group 1 Group 1.1 A3

1 RF 121 2 RF 2 22 13 ON 14 Protective door 11 21 12 22 K1 OUTU1 M L+ OUT+ 1 8 2 9
Group 1.2 A7
1 RF 121 2 RF 2 22 L+ U1 K2 M
Figure 10-19: Emergency stop combined with 2 cascaded protective-door circuits A4 A8

1 8 2 9 OUT+ OUT13 ON 14 Protective door 6 AUX2 A1 11 21 26 28 12 22 6 7
L+
A1
OUT+
A10
1 RF 121 2 RF 2 22 K3
U1 M
1 8 2 9
OUT-
6 13 7 14 22
13
6 13 7 14 22
6 13 7 14 22
ON 14
A1+ 6 7 A2 AUX3 K1 A2- 5 12 U2 26 28
4 11 AUX2 A1
23 24 17 27 EM. STOP 11 21 25 A1+ 4 11
23 24 17 27 25
23 24 17 27 25 A1+ 4 11 U2 K2 A2- 5 7 A2 12 AUX3
AUX2 A1 K3 A2 AUX3
U2
Emergency stop combined with 2 cascaded protective-door circuits
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
A2-
5 12
26 28
12 22
Group 1 Group 1.1 Group 1.2

1L1 400V AC 1L2 1L3
Category
Order number
Description
1 11) 1
2 3/4
Q1
21 21
Q2
Q3
21
K1
1L1 3L2 5L3 1L1 3L2 5L3 22 22
K2
K3
1L1 3L2 5L3 22
2T1 4T2 6T3
2T1 4T2 6T3
2T1 4T2 6T3
2T1 4T2 6T3 M 3~ M 3~ M 3~ M 3~ E = integrated input for programming A = integrated output for programming = line for external wiring N PE

3RK1903-0BA00 3RK1903-0AA00 3RK1903-1BA00 3RK1903-1AA00 3RK1903-1BB00 3RK1903-1AA10 3RK1903-1CB00 3RK1903-1AB00 3RT1035-1BB40 3RH1921-1DA11 3RA1931-1BA00 3RV1031-4HA10
A2 A6
A5
A9
E Fault E A E F kit 1 E A Fault
E Fault F kit 1 E A E
E F kit 1
PM-D TM-P15 S27-01 1 1 PM-D F1 1 1 TM-PF30 S47-B1 2 2 PM-D F2 2 2 TM-PF30 S47-B1 3 3 PM-X 32) 3 TM-X15 S27-01 3 Infeed contactor for maximum configuration 40 A 3 Auxiliary switch for infeed contactor 3 Connection module DC 3 Circuit breaker, protection for maximum configuration 40A 4 4 4 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA2 DS xx in accordance with the current rating 3 3 3 3RK1903-0AB00 TM-DS45 S32 with power bus infeed 1 1 1 3RK1903-0AB10 TM-DS45 S31 with power bus throughfeed 4 4 3RK1903-1CA00 F kit 1 2 2 2 3SBxx Personnel protection switchxx type 1) Emergency-stop and protective-door contacts looped into infeed for supply voltage U2 (A1+, A2-) 2) Important With no infeed contactor connected to the PM-X connection module, jumper the feedback circuit with terminals 1 and 2.
Figure 10-19: (cont.) Emergency stop combined with 2 cascaded protective-door circuits
N PE
This configuration combines emergency stop and two cascaded protective door monitoring circuits up to category 4 to EN 954-1.
10-45
PLC
Profibus-DP
TM-PF30 S47-B1 TM-PF30 S47-C0
Master
F kit 1 F kit 1
F kit 1
F kit 1
TM-X15 S27-01
Figure 10-20: Emergency stop circuit with cascaded delay category 2 EM. STOP 1 Category 2 STOP CAT. 0 A1
PM-X
EM. STOP 1 Category 2 STOP CAT. 0

L+ U1 M
Category 2 STOP CAT. 1

OUT+ OUT13
A1
A4
OUT+ OUT-
A7
1 RF 1 2 RF 2 6 13 7 14
Emergency stop circuit with cascaded delay category 2
1 8 2 9 6 13 7 14 22
A1+ U2 A2-
4 11 5 12
4 11 5 12
6 7
AUX2 AUX3
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
ON 23 14 24 17 27 EM. STOP A1+ 11 21 25 U2 26 A212 22 28
Terminating cover
Terminating module
10-46
Category 2 STOP CAT. 1 A3 DS PM-D F3 DS DS A4 A5 A6 A7 A2 DS PM-D F1 IM 151
10.6.11

1L1 400 VAC 1L2 1L3
Category 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 3RK1903-1BA00 3RK1903-1AA00 3RK1903-1BD00 3RK1903-1AC10 3RK1903-1CB00 3RK1903-1AB00 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA2
Order number
Description
1L1 3L2 5L3
3RK1903-0AB10
A2 A3
A5
1L1 3L2 5L3
2T1 4T2 6T3
2T1 4T2 6T3
2T1 4T2 6T3
N PE M 3~ M 3~ M 3~
N PE
This configuration combines instantaneous (STOP category 0) and delayed (STOP category 1) shutdown. This configuration consists of 2 potential or load groups.
2 3RK1903-0AB00
N PE
Figure 10-20: (cont.) Emergency stop circuit with cascaded delay category 2
2T1 4T2 6T3
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-09 A6

4 3RK1903-1CA00 PM-D F1 TM-PF30 S47-B1 PM-D F3 TM-PF30 S47-C0 PM-X TM-X15 S27-01 DS xx in accordance with the current rating TM-DS45 S32 with power bus infeed TM-DS45 S31 with power bus throughfeed F kit 1
E Fault E A E F kit 1 Fault E A
E F kit 1
10-47
PM-X
PM-X
PLC
Profibus-DP
Master
F kit 1
Terminating module
TM-PF30 S47-B1
TM-X15 S27-01
TM-PF30 S47-C0
TM-X15 S27-01
Terminating cover
10-48
EM. STOP 1 Category 4 STOP CAT. 0 A1 PM-D F1 Q1
10.6.12
Category 3 STOP CAT. 1 A4 PM-D F3 DS DS A5 A6 A7 A8
A2 DS DS
A3
Q2
IM 151
K1
K2
Figure 10-21: Emergency stop circuit with cascaded delay category 3 or 4 EM. STOP 1 Category 4 STOP CAT. 0 A1
OUT+ 1 RF 1 RF 2 OUT2 13 OUT-
Category 3 STOP CAT. 1 A4

OUT+ 6 13 7 14
L+
A5
A8
1 RF 1 2 RF 2 21 K1 22 21 K2 22
Emergency stop circuit with cascaded delay category 3 or 4
U1 M
1 8 2 9 6 13 7 14 22
A1+ 6 7 12 22 K1 A2 AUX3 U2
4 11 AUX2 A1 A2A1+ 26 28
ON 23 14 24 17 27 EM. STOP 11 21 25 4 11 5 12
6 7
AUX2 A1 K2 A2 AUX3
U2
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
A2-
5 12

1L1 400V AC 1L2 1L3
Category 3/4
Order number
Description
Q1
21 21
1 2 21) 2 1 1 2) 1 1 1 13)
Q2
K1
1L1 3L2 5L3 22
K2
1L1 3L2 5L3 22
2T1 4T2 6T3
2T1 4T2 6T3
2T1 4T2 6T3
4 4 3RK1903-1CA00 F kit 1 Emergency stop looped into infeed for U2 supply voltage (A1+, A2-).2) Time delay with standard timer relay 3) Important Subassembly A4 is no longer needed. At the PM-X connection module (subassembly A8), jumper the feedback circuit with terminals 1 and 2. 4) Caution At the PM-X connection module bearing the subassembly designation A4, make sure that terminals 1 and 2 are not jumpered.
2T1 4T2 6T3 M 3~ M 3~ M 3~ N PE M 3~ E = integrated input for programming A = integrated output for programming = line for external wiring N PE

3RK1903-0BA00 3RK1903-0AA00 3RK1903-1BA00 3RK1903-1AA00 3RK1903-1BD00 3RK1903-1AC10 3RK1903-1CB00 3RK1903-1AB00 3RT1035-1BB40 3RH1921-1DA11 3RA1931-1BA00 3RV1031-4HA10
A2 A3
A6
A7
E Fault E A E F kit 1 Fault E A
E F kit 1
PM-D TM-P15 S27-01 1 PM-D F1 1 TM-PF30 S47-B1 1 PM-D F3 1 TM-PF30 S47-C0 2 PM-X 24) TM-X15 S27-01 2 Infeed contactor for max. configuration 40 A 2 Auxiliary switch for infeed contactor 2 Connection module DC 2 Circuit breaker, protection for maximum configuration 40A 4 4 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA2 DS xx in accordance with the current rating 2 2 3RK1903-0AB00 TM-DS45 S32 with power bus infeed 2 2 3RK1903-0AB10 TM-DS45 S31 with power bus throughfeed
1)
Figure 10-21: (cont.) Emergency stop circuit with cascaded delay category 3 or 4
N PE
Important Category 3 to EN 954-1 is the maximum attainable with delayed stop.
This configuration combines instantaneous (STOP category 0) and delayed (STOP category 1) shutdown. This configuration consists of 2 potential or load groups.
10-49
PM-X
Q1
Power switch
PM-X
Terminating module
PLC
Profibus-DP
Master
Profibus-DP
F kit 1
TM-PF30 S47-B1
TM-X15 S27-01
TM-PF30 S47-C1
Terminating cover
TM-X15 S27-01
Infeed contactor
Terminating cover
K1
Terminating module
10-50
EM. STOP 1 A1 PM-D F1 DS DS PM-D F4 DS DS A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 Q2
Power switch
10.6.13
IM 151
IM 151
K2
Infeed contactor
Figure 10-22: One emergency stop circuit for two or more ET 200S rails
EMERGENCY STOP 1
additional ET 200S rails
L+ 1 RF 121 2 RF 2 22 23 RF 2 K1 U1 M
A1 A4
L+ 1 8 2 9
A5
A8
1 RF 121 2 RF 2 22 K2
L+ U1 M
1 RF 121 2 RF 222 23 RF 2 K
One emergency stop circuit for two or more ET 200S rails
U1 M
1 8 2 9
6 OUT+ 13 7 OUT14 22 13 ON 14 6 7 A2 AUX3 K1 A2U2 AUX2 A1 A1+ 4 11 5 12
6 OUT+ 13 7 OUT14 22 RF 1
1 8 2 9
6 OUT+ 13 7 OUT14 22 RF 1
A1+
4 11
23 24 17 27 EM. STOP 11 21 25
27 IN+ 28 IN-
6 7
AUX2 A1 K2 A2 AUX3
A1+ U2 A2-
4 11 5 12
27 IN+ 28 IN-
6 7
AUX2 A1 K A2 AUX3
U2
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
A2-
5 12
26 28
12 22
EMERGENCY STOP 1
Category
Order number
Description
1 11) 1
2 3/4
1L1 400V AC 1L2 1L3
Q1
21 21
Q2
K1
1L1 3L2 5L3 1L1 3L2 5L3 22
K2
22
2T1 4T2 6T3
2T1 4T2 6T3
2T1 4T2 6T3
Figure 10-22: (cont.) One emergency stop circuit for two or more ET 200S rails
For each ET 200S rail the dropout time of the PM-D F4 increases by 30 ms.
N PE M 3~ M 3~ M 3~
N PE
This configuration incorporates additional ET 200S rails into the emergency stop circuit for category 4 to EN 954-1.
N PE
Important
2T1 4T2 6T3
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-09 A2 A3 A6 A7

E Fault E A E F kit 1 E A Fault F kit 1 E Fault E A E F kit 1 E Fault E A E F kit 1 E E
PM-D TM-P15 S27-01 1 1 PM-D F1 1 1 TM-PF30 S47-B1 1 1 PM-D F4 1 1 TM-PF30 S47-C1 2 2 PM-X 22) 2 TM-X15 S27-01 2 Infeed contactor for maximum configuration 40 A 2 Auxiliary switch for infeed contactor 2 Connection module DC 2 Circuit breaker, protection for maximum configuration 40A 4 4 4 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA2 DS xx in accordance with the current rating 2 2 2 3RK1903-0AB00 TM-DS45 S32 with power bus infeed 2 2 2 3RK1903-0AB10 TM-DS45 S31 with power bus throughfeed 4 4 3RK1903-1CA00 F kit 1 1) Emergency-stop and protective-door contacts looped into infeed for supply voltage U2 (A1+, A2-) 2)Important With no infeed contactor connected to the PM-X connection module, jumper the feedback circuit with terminals 1 and 2.
3RK1903-0BA00 3RK1903-0AA00 3RK1903-1BA00 3RK1903-1AA00 3RK1903-1BC00 3RK1903-1AC00 3RK1903-1CB00 3RK1903-1AB00 3RT1035-1BB40 3RH1921-1DA11 3RA1931-1BA00 3RV1031-4HA10
10-51
PM-X
PM-X
PM-X
PLC
Profibus-DP
Master
F kit 1 F kit 1
F kit 1
F kit 1
Terminating module
TM-PF30 S47-B1
TM-PF30 S47-B0
TM-PF30 S47-B1
TM-X15 S27-01
TM-X15 S27-01
TM-PF30 S47-D0
TM-X15 S27-01
Terminating cover
10-52
EMERGENCY STOP 1 EMERGENCY STOP 2 Shutdown group I Shutdown group II A4 PM-D F2 DS PM-D F1 PM-D F5 DS DS A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 Shutdown group III A1 PM-D F1 DS A2 A3 Q1 to 3
Power switch
10.6.14
IM 151
K1 to 3
Infeed contactor
Figure 10-23: Two emergency-stop circuits, three shutdown groups

OUT+ 1 RF 121 2 RF 222 K1 OUT13 ON 14
L+
A1 A8
A3
A4
A6
1 RF 121 2 RF 2 22
L+ U1 K2 M
A7
1 8 2 9
OUT+ OUT13
A11
1 RF 121 2 RF 222 K3 6 13 7 14 22
Two emergency-stop circuits, three shutdown groups
U1 M
1 8 2 9 6 13 7 14 22
6 OUT+ 13 7 OUT14 22
A1+ 6 7 12 22 A2 AUX3 K1
4 11 AUX2 A1 26 28
23 24 17 27 EM. STOP 11 21 25 26 28
23 24 17 27 25
6 7
AUX2 A1 K2 A2 AUX3
A1+ U2 A2-
4 11 5 12
ON 23 14 24 17 27 EM. STOP 11 21 25 26 28 12 22
6 7
AUX2 A1 K3 A2 AUX3
U2
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
A2-
5 12
1.1 4 OUT 1 5 1.2 11 12 2.1 6 OUT 2 7 2.2 13 14 3.118 OUT 3 19 3.2 26 25 4.1 20 OUT 4 21 4.2 27 28
EMERGENCY STOP 1 EMERGENCY STOP 2 Shutdown gr. I Shutdown gr. II Shutdown gr. III
1L1 400V AC 1L2 1L3
Category
Order number
Description
3/4
1L1 3L2 5L3
1L1 3L2 5L3
3RK1903-0BA00 3RK1903-0AA00 3RK1903-1BA00 3RK1903-1AA00 3RK1903-1BB00 3RK1903-1AA10 3RK1903-1BE00 3RK1903-1AD10 3RK1903-1CB00 3RK1903-1AB00 3RT1035-1BB40 3RH1921-1DA11 3RA1931-1BA00 3RV1031-4HA10
A2
A5
A9
1L1 3L2 5L3
2T1 4T2 6T3
2T1 4T2 6T3
2T1 4T2 6T3
2T1 4T2 6T3 M 3~ M 3~ M 3~ N PE M 3~ E = integrated input for programming A = integrated output for programming = line for external wiring N PE
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-09 Q1

21 21
Q2
Q3
21
1 2 31) 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 32)
K1
22 22
K2
K3
22
A10
E Fault E A F kit 1 Fault E A E
E F kit 1
Figure 10-23: (cont.) Two emergency-stop circuits, three shutdown groups

E N PE
PM-D TM-P15 S27-01 2 PM-D F1 2 TM-PF30 S47-B1 1 PM-D F2 1 TM-PF30 S47-B0 1 PM-D F5 1 TM-PF30 S47-D0 3 PM-X 3 TM-X15 S27-01 3 Infeed contactor for maximum configuration 40 A 3 Auxiliary switch for infeed contactor 3 Connection module DC 3 Circuit breaker, protection for maximum configuration 40A 4 4 4 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA2 DS xx in accordance with the current rating 3 3 3 3RK1903-0AB00 TM-DS45 S32 with power bus infeed 1 1 1 3RK1903-0AB10 TM-DS45 S31 with power bus throughfeed 4 4 3RK1903-1CA00 F kit 1 1) Emergency-stop and protective-door contacts looped into infeed for supply voltage U2 (A1+, A2-) 2)Important With no infeed contactor connected to the PM-X connection module, jumper the feedback circuit with terminals 1 and 2.
This circuit illustrates how 2 emergency-stop circuits can be used to control 3 shutdown groups.
10-53
PM-X
PLC
Profibus-DP
Master
F kit 1 F kit 1
Terminating module
TM-PF30 S47-B1
TM-PF30 S47-D0
TM-X15 S27-01
Terminating cover
10-54
A1 PM-D F1
3TK2822
A2 PM-D F5 Q1
Power switch
A3 DS DS
10.6.15
A4
A5
K2
IM 151
K1
Infeed contactor
L+ OUT+ OUT13 ON 14 U1 M
A1
A1 K2 Y33 A2 Y34
13 ON 14 EM. STOP Y11 Y21 Y22 Y12 13 14 11 21 12 22
A2
A5
1 RF 121 2 RF 2 22 K1
Floating connection between an ET 200S safety circuit and autonomous safety circuits
Figure 10-24: Floating connection between an ET 200S safety circuit and autonomous safety circuits
1 8 2 9 6 13 7 14 22 A1+ U2 A223 12 22 5 12 26 28 24 4 11 23 24 17 27 EM. STOP 11 21 25 6 7 AUX2 A1 K1 A2 AUX3 1.1 4 OUT 1 11 2.1 6 OUT 2 13 3.118 OUT 3 25 4.1 20 OUT 4 27 5 1.2 12 7 2.2 14 19 3.2 26 21 4.2 28
GWA-4NEB950007202-09

Category 3/4 Order number Description
1L1 400V AC 1L2 1L3
Q1
21
K1
1L1 3L2 5L3 22
2T1 4T2 6T3
PM-D TM-P15 S27-01 1 PM-D F1 1 TM-PF30 S47-B1 1 PM-D F5 1 TM-PF30 S47-D0 1 PM-X 1 TM-X15 S27-01 1 External safety combination x in accordance with the connection 1 3RT1035-1BB40 Infeed contactor for maximum configuration 40 A 1 3RH1921-1DA11 Auxiliary switch for infeed contactor 1 3RA1931-1BA00 Connection module DC 1 3RV1031-4HA10 Circuit breaker, protection for maximum configuration 40A 2 2 2 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA2 DS xx in accordance with the current rating 1 1 1 3RK1903-0AB00 TM-DS45 S32 with power bus infeed 1 1 1 3RK1903-0AB10 TM-DS45 S31 with power bus throughfeed 2 2 3RK1903-1CA00 F kit 1 1)Emergency stop looped into the supply lead for supply voltage U2 (A1+, A2-) 2)with jumper between terminals 1, 2
Figure 10-24: (cont.) Floating connection between an ET 200S safety circuit and autonomous safety circuits
1 2 21) 2 1 1 1 1 1 12) 1 3RK1903-0BA00 3RK1903-0AA00 3RK1903-1BA00 3RK1903-1AA00 3RK1903-1BE00 3RK1903-1AD10 3RK1903-1CB00 3RK1903-1AB00 3TK2822-xCB30
Multiple PM-D F5 modules can be inserted.

A2 A3
N PE M 3~ M 3~ E = integrated input for programming A = integrated output for programming = line for external wiring
Note There are 4 floating contacts available for each PM-D F5.
This configuration shows how external safety components can be incorporated into the ET 200S safety concept.
2T1 4T2 6T3

E Fault E A F kit 1 Fault E A E F kit 1 E E
10-55
PM-X
PLC
Profibus-DP
Master
Terminating module
TM-PF30 S47-B1
TM-X15 S27-01
Terminating cover
10-56
Category 4 to EN 954-1 A1 PM-D F1 Q1
Power switch
10.6.16
A2 DS1e-x RS1e-x DSS1e-x
A3
A4
A5
IM 151
K1
Infeed contactor
K2
Motor contactor
For the DSS1e-x (A5)
Figure 10-25: DSS1e-x high feature direct soft starters up to safety category 4 Category 4 to EN 954-1 A1
OUT+ 1 RF 1 2 RF 2 OUT13 21 K1 22 21 K2 22 6 13 7 14 22
L+
A4
U1 M
1 8 2 9
DSS1e-x high feature direct soft starters up to safety category 4
A1+ 6 7 12 22 A2 AUX3 K1
4 11 AUX2 A1 26 28
ON 23 14 24 17 27 EM. STOP 11 21 25 A1 K2 A2
U2
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
A2-
5 12
Category
Order number
Description
1 11) 1
2 3/4
1L1 400V AC 1L2 1L3
Q1
21
K1
1L1 3L2 5L3 22
2T1 4T2 6T3
2T1 4T2 6T3
2T1 4T2 6T3 N PE N PE M 3~ M 3~
N PE
Figure 10-25: (cont.) DSS1e-x high feature direct soft starters up to safety category 4
K2 1 3 5
2 4 6
This configuration shows how to incorporate a DSS1e-x direct soft starter up to safety category 4 to EN 954-1.
M 3~
N PE 21 22
PM-D TM-P15 S27-01 1 1 PM-D F1 1 1 TM-PF30 S47-B1 1 1 PM-X 1 1 TM-X15 S27-01 1 Infeed contactor for maximum configuration 50 A 1 Auxiliary switch for infeed contactor 1 Connection module DC 1 Circuit breaker, protection for maximum configuration 50A 1 1 1 3RK1301-0xB10-0AA2 DS1e-x x in accordance with the current rating 1 1 1 3RK1903-0AK00 TM-DS65 S32 with power bus infeed 1 1 1 3RK1301-0xB10-1AA2 RS1e-x x in accordance with the current rating 1 1 1 3RK1903-0AL10 TM-RS130 S31 with power bus throughfeed 1 1 1 3RK1301-0xB20-0AA2 DSS1e-x x in accordance with the current rating 1 1 1 3RK1903-0AK10 TM-DS65 S31 with power bus throughfeed 1 1 3RK1903-0AE00 15 mm jumper module 1 1 3RT1034-1BB44 Motor contactor 1 1 Auxiliary switch for motor contactor (if necessary) 1) Emergency stop looped into the supply lead for supply voltage U2 (A1+, A2-)
10-57
PM-D
PM-X
PM-X
DP master
AS-I master
AS-i power supply unit
Terminating module
TM-P15 S27-01
TM-X15 S27-01
TM-X15 S27-01
Terminating cover
10-58
A1 A2 A3 DS
EMERGENCY STOP 1 3RK1105-1AE04-0CA0
A4 DS RS
10.6.17
A5
A6
A7
Q1
Power switch
EMERGENCY STOP 2
IM 151
EMERGENCY STOP 3
Profibus-DP
AS-i Safety Monitor
K1
Infeed contactor
Figure 10-26: ET 200S SIGUARD with AS-i Safety at work

EMERGENCY STOP 4

Category 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 21) Order number Description
ET 200S SIGUARD with AS-i Safety at work
L+ 1 RF 1 2 RF 2 2 U1 M
L+ A7 1.Y2 L+ 1 8 2 9 6 13 AUX2 7 AUX3 14
13 ON 14
A1
A2
A6
1 RF 121 K1 RF 2 22
U1 M
1.Y1
3/4 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1
3RK1903-0BA00 3RK1903-0AA00 3RK1903-1CB00 3RK1903-1AB00 3RT1035-1BB40 3RH1921-1DA11 3RA1931-1BA00 3RV1031-4HA10
AS-i +
AS-i +
AS-i AS-i -
AS-i -
A1+ 6 7
1.13
1.14
A1+ 4 U2 11 A2- 5 12
AUX2 AUX3
6 7
AUX2 A1 K1 A2 AUX3
U2
1.23
1.24
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
A2-
PM-D TM-P15 S27-01 PM-X TM-X15 S27-01 Infeed contactor for maximum configuration 40 A Auxiliary switch for infeed contactor Connection module DC Circuit breaker, protection for maximum configuration 40A 2 2 2 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA2 DS xx in accordance with the current rating 1 1 1 3RK1903-0AB00 TM-DS45 S32 with power bus infeed 1 1 1 3RK1903-0AB10 TM-DS45 S31 with power bus throughfeed 2 2 3RK1903-1CA00 F kit 1 1 1 1 3RK1301-xxB00-1AA2 RS xx in accordance with the current rating 1 1 1 3RK1903-0AC10 TM-RS90 S31 with power bus throughfeed 1 1 3RK1903-1CA01 F kit 2 1 1 1 3RK1105-1AE04-0CA0 AS-I Safety Monitor 1 ) With module A6 jumper between terminals 1, 2
F kit 2
Fault
A4
F kit 1
21
22
E A
Fault
1L1 400V AC 1L2 1L3
Q1
Figure 10-26: (cont.) ET 200S SIGUARD with AS-i Safety at work
This configuration shows how ET 200S components are incorporated into the AS-i Safety at work concept. This configuration satisfies the requirements of all categories up to category 4 and employs an AS-i Safety Monitor. It combines the advantages of AS-i Safety at work on the sensor side with the advantages of ET 200S SIGUARD on the actuator side in a way that makes best use of both.
K1
A3
E A
Fault
A5
F kit 1
E A
N PE 2T1 4T2 6T3 2T1 4T2 6T3 2T1 4T2 6T3
1L1 3L2 5L3
10-59
10-60
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Expansion modules
11
Subject Page 11-2 11-3 11-3 11-4 11-4 11-11 11-13 11-15 11-17 11-20 11-24 11-26
Section 11.1 11.2
Overview of expansion modules TM-xB15 S24-01 and TM-xB215 S24-01 terminal modules
11.2.1 Assignment of the terminal modules 11.3 Brake control module
11.3.1 Description 11.3.2 TM-xB15 S24-01, TM-xB215 S24-01 terminal modules 11.3.3 Signal response of the xB3, xB4 brake control modules and DS1-x, DS1e-x, F-DS1e-x motor starters 11.3.4 Signal response of the xB3, xB4 brake control modules and RS1-x, RS1e-x, F-RS1e-x motor starters 11.3.5 Externally powered brake xB1, xB3 11.3.6 Internally powered brake xB2, xB4 11.3.7 Installation 11.3.8 Removing the brake control module
11-1
Expansion modules
11.1
Overview of expansion modules

Expansion modules can be operated only in conjunction with direct, reversing or soft starters of the following types: DS-x DS1-x DS1e-x F-DS1e-x DSS1e-x RS-x RS1-x RS1e-x F-RS1e-x
The table below lists the expansion modules currently available, complete with their functions:
Description Brake control module xB1 xB2 xB3 Function for 24 VDC/4 A brake (externally powered) for 500 VDC/0.7 A brake (internally powered) for 24 VDC/4 A brake (externally powered) with 2 additional inputs 1) (no save) with diagnosis for 500 VDC/0.7 A brake (internally powered) with 2 additional inputs 1) (no save) with diagnosis
xB4
) Only in conjunction with DS1-x, DS1e-x, F-DS1e-x, DSS1e-x, RS1-x, RS1e-x, F-RS1e-x
Table 11-1: Overview of expansion modules
11-2
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Expansion modules
11.2
11.2.1
TM-xB15 S24-01 and TM-xB215 S24-01 terminal modules

The terminal modules are necessary for the wiring of the brake control modules xB1 to 4. The following table shows which brake control modules you can use with the various terminal modules. You can find information on the terminal modules in the following chapters: Chapter 6 for the PM-D power module and all motor starters Chapter 10 for SIGUARD Chapter 12 for fail-safe modules
Expansion modules Terminal modules TM-xB15 S24-01 3RK1903 Brake control module xB1 Brake control module xB2 Brake control module xB3 Brake control module xB4 -0AG00 X X X X TM-xB215 S24-01 -0AG01
Table 11-2: Assignment of the terminal modules for expansion modules
11-3
Expansion modules
11.3
11.3.1
Brake control module

Description
The brake control modules (xB1 to 4) control the integrated DC spring-loaded brake of a three-phase motor. The brake is actuated by a solenoid which holds the brake in the off position when energized. When the circuit is deenergized the solenoid drops out and the brake is applied by spring force, blocking the motor. Another possible application is the integration of external actuators such as DC valves. This applies particularly when the actuators are functionally dependent on the motor. The brake control module installs on the right beside the motor starter in question. The terminal module of the brake control module connects the brake control module to the motor starter. The brake control module is an add-on component for ET 200S motor starters (MS) with an expansion interface (DS-x, DS1-x, DS1e-x, F-DS1e-x, DSS1e-x, RS-x, RS1-x, RS1e-x, F-RS1e-x).
Note The brake control modules can be used only with ET 200S motor starters with an expansion interface (DS-x, DS1-x, DS1e-x, F-DS1e-x, DSS1e-x, RS-x, RS1x, RS1e-x, F-RS1e-x).
Important Do not use the high feature DSS1e-x direct soft starters for internally powered brakes (xB2, 4).
Safety note The brake control modules (xB1 to 4) can only be used with the F-DS1e-x and F-RS1e-x depending on the category (see Sections 8.3, 9.3).
11-4
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Expansion modules
Modules and components

The brake control module consists of the following sub-components: TM-xB15 S24-01 terminal module for xB1, xB2 TM-xB215 S24-01 terminal module for xB3, xB4 Brake control modules (xB1 to 4)
The components of the brake control module are illustrated below.
Link Connecting terminals for inputs (xB3, 4 only) Terminals for brake
Coding element
Plug connector to the motor starter Mechanical latch to terminal module for motor starter
Figure 11-1: Brake control
Terminal module for brake control module
11-5
Expansion modules
Electronic switch
The brake control module has a single-pole electronic switch for driving a DC spring-loaded brake integrated into an electric motor.
Drive
The brake control module is driven via the ET 200S bus and its motor starter. The output (DO 0.2) required for driving the brake comes from the motor starter.
Important If a brake is not driven via output DO 0.2 of the motor starter, the motor starts up with the brake applied and the circuit breaker/thermal motor model can be tripped.
Latch for mechanical locking

The brake control module is accommodated in a housing 15 mm wide. The link on the left-hand side of the brake control module (see Figure 11-1) ensures that the brake control module can be plugged in or pulled only when its motor starter has been pulled. This excludes the possibility of hot removal or insertion.
Coding
There is a coding element on the housing of the brake control module. This is a mechanical means of differentiating between different modules.
11-6
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Expansion modules
Indicator
The brake control module comprises A red LED for SF, group error (xB3, xB4), Two green LEDs as indicators for inputs 1 and 2 (xB3, xB4 only) Input 1, terminals 1 and 2, limit switch for clockwise rotation, Input 2, terminals 5 and 6, limit switch for counterclockwise rotation, A yellow LED which indicates the status for output DO 0.2 of the motor starter. The LED is on when output DO 0.2 of the motor signal is carrying a 1 signal. This means the electronic switch is closed and the brake is released. See Section 4.9.12 on xB3/xB4 diagnostics.
Note xB1, xB2: There is no indicator for actuation of the overload or short-circuit protection; the signal status of the LED for output DO 0.2 does not change under these circumstances. xB3, xB4: The signal status of the inputs is shown, as is actuation of the overload or shortcircuit protection.
View
LED: SF
LED: Inputs 1, 2 LED: STAT
xB1
xB2
xB3
xB4
Figure 11-2: Brake control modules xB1 to 4
11-7
Expansion modules
Common and distinguishing features of the brake control modules

Features 1 For externally powered mechanical DC spring-loaded brake For 24 VDC/4 A Supply from a separate 24 VDC auxiliary voltage Brake can be released when the motor is switched off (so that the motor can be turned by hand) For internally powered mechanical DC spring-loaded brake. 1) For 500 VDC/0.7 A Supply from a rectified voltage tapped from the electric motor Once the motor has been switched off, the brake can no longer be released Configurable Parameterizable Diagnostics capability 2 inputs (functional scope depends on the associated motor starter) Circuit status of the inputs shown by LEDs Circuit status of the inputs can be analyzed by PLC Diagnosis overload
1
xB 2 3 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 4
X X X X
) Brake control modules xB2, xB4 can also be used with an external rectifier (in the control cabinet) for an externally powered mechanical DC spring-loaded brake.
Table 11-3: Features of the brake control modules
11-8
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Expansion modules
Parameters
The following table indicates the parameters that can be set for the xB3 and xB4 brake control modules.
Group diagnosis
Disable
Module
Table 11-4: Parameter for brake control modules xB3, xB4
Note The "Disable group diagnosis" parameter suppresses the SF LED.
Note The xB1 and xB2 modules are purely passive from the point of view of the IM 151 and require no parameterization.
Parameter assignment of the inputs of the xB3 and xB4

(Only applies if the high feature/fail-safe motor starters are used). You can assign parameters to the inputs of the xB3 and xB4 expansion modules independently of one another for different actions via the relevant motor starter. Parameterization is described in: Section 8.3.4 for high feature/fail-safe direct starters Section 8.4.5 for high feature direct soft starters Section 9.3.4 for high feature/fail-safe reversing starters
11-9
Expansion modules
Configuration with brake control module

Caution See information on derating in Section 3.4.
The configuration of motor starter and brake control module with a DM-V15 spacing module is illustrated below (only with standard motor starters with 45/90 mm installation width):
IM 151
PM-D
xB1 ... 4
DM-V15
xB1 ... 4
DS
DS-x DS1-x
RS-x RS1-x
DS1e-x
RS1e-x
DSS1e-x
Figure 11-3: Configuration with brake control module and spacing module
11-10
xB1, 3
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Expansion modules 11.3.2 TM-xB15 S24-01, TM-xB215 S24-01 terminal modules
Features
The terminal module consists of a support and a terminal block Terminal module TM-xB15 S24-01 for xB1 or xB2 brake control module Terminal module TM-xB215 S24-01 for xB3 or xB4 brake control module Connection by screw-type terminal AUX1 cable fed through without terminals Terminal block
Support
Terminal assignment
The following table illustrates the terminal assignment of the TM-xB15 S24-01, TM-xB215 S24-01 terminal module:
View
1 5
Terminal 1 2
Description Input 1 L+ Input 1 Not used Input 2 L+ Input 2 Not used

Logic K1
Basic circuit diagram TM-xB215 S24-01 only

RS1-x RS1e-x xB3, xB4 U1 1 2 5
Logic K2
3 5
4 8
Input 1 Limit switch cw rotation Input 2 Limit switch ccw rotation
6 7
TM-xB215 S24-01
Logic
4 8
P-switching + -
Wiring options
4
~
M
4 8
8 Brake control
TM-xB15 S24-01
Motor with brake M-switching
~
M
8 Brake control
Motor with brake
Table 11-5: Terminal assignment of the TM-xB15 S24-01, TM-xB215 S24-01 terminal module
11-11
Expansion modules
Technical specifications - TM-xB15 S24-01, TM-xB215 S24-01

Dimensions and weight Installation dimensions W x H x D (mm) Depth with brake control module (mm) Weight (g) Rated currents Inputs (terminals 1 and 2, 5, and 6) - TM-xB215 S24-01 only Brake control (terminals 4 and 8) Connection cross-sections Single-core (mm2) Finely stranded with wire end ferrule (mm2) AWG cables, single- or multi-core Wiring Tool required Tightening torque (Nm) Standard screwdriver, size 1 0,4 to 0,7 1 x (0.14 to 2.5) to IEC 60947 1 x 2.5 1 x (0.14 to 1.5) to IEC 60947 15 x 196.5 x 95 117.5 approx. 120
1 x (18 to 22)
Table 11-6: Technical specifications - TM-xB15 S24-01, TM-xB215 S24-01
11-12
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Expansion modules 11.3.3 Signal response of xB3 and xB4 brake control modules and DS1-x, DS1e-x, and F-DS1e-x motor starters
The diagram below illustrates the dependencies between the individual signals
DS1-x, DS1e-x, F-DS1e-x: Control (process image outputs) - PLC action 1 DO 0.0 (motor ON) 3
braked 4 DS1-x, DS1e-x, F-DS1e-x: Check (process image inputs) - PLC evaluation
8 7
DO 0.2 (brake released)
DI 0.1 (contactor ON)
xB3, xB4
Limit switch, cw rotation Limit switch, ccw rotation
5 2
Rectification of fault Limit switch open
xB3, xB4: Check (process image inputs) - PLC evaluation

DI 0.0 (limit switch, cw rot.) DI 0.1 (limit switch, ccw rot.)
xB3, xB4: Diagnoses

LED, switching output LED, limit switch cw rotation LED, limit switch ccw rot.
From here, the drive can be moved manually away from limit-switch position
Original drive signal overridden / rendered ineffective by limit switch

Table 11-7: Signal response of xB3 and xB4 brake control modules and DS1-x, DS1e-x, and F-DS1e-x motor starters
11-13
Expansion modules
Explanation of the individual actions
1 Brake is released (DO 0.2) and motor (DO 0.0) is switched on by the application program in the PLC. PLC's switch-on command is drive signal for the contactor (DO 0.0). Command to release the brake effects drive of brake enabling signal (DO 0.2). Limit position is passed, so the limit switch for clockwise rotation opens (occurrence of fault). When the limit switch opens the direct (no PLC intervention) result is discontinuation of the contactor drive signal and cancellation of brake enabling signal. The PLC's driver signals for the currently active contactor and the brake enabling signal become ineffective (overridden by limit switch). The motor contactor and the brake driver signal of the DS1-x are switched off. The application program in the PLC cancels the switch-on command (DO 0.0) and optionally the brake enabling signal (DO 0.2). Brake is released (DO 0.2) by the application program in the PLC. Manual departure from limit switch possible only with externally powered brake. Rectification of fault. Limit switch closes. Limit switch for counterclockwise rotation is overshot. Brake enabling signal is canceled. PLC cancels brake enabling signal See step 1 The limit switch for counterclockwise rotation recloses.
3 4 5 6 7 8 9
11-14
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Expansion modules 11.3.4 Signal response of xB3 and xB4 brake control modules and RS1-x, RS1e-x, and F-RS1e-x motor starters
RS1-x, RS1e-x, F-RS1e-x: Control (process image outputs) - PLC action 1 DO 0.0 (cw rotation) 3 - Brake can be controlled again
DO 0.1 (ccw rotation) DO 0.2 (brake released)
4
Braked
RS1-x, RS1e-x, F-RS1e-x: Check (process image inputs) - PLC evaluation

DI 0.1 (contactor ON)
xB3, xB4
Limit switch, cw rotation Limit switch, ccw rotation
Rectification of fault, e.g. by reversal of direction
Limit switch open
xB3, xB4: Check (process image inputs) - PLC evaluation

DI 0.0 (limit switch, cw rot.) DI 0.1 (limit switch, ccw rot.n)
xB3, xB4: Diagnoses

LED, switching output LED, limit switch cw rotation LED, limit switch ccw rot.

Table 11-8: Signal response of xB3 and xB4 brake control modules and RS1-x, RS1e-x, and F-RS1e-x motor starters
11-15
Expansion modules
Explanation of the individual actions
1 Brake is released (DO 0.2) and motor (DO 0.0, clockwise rotation) is switched on by the application program in the PLC. PLC's switch-on command is drive signal for the contactor (DO 0.0). Command to release the brake effects drive of brake enabling signal (DO 0.2). Limit position is passed, so the limit switch for clockwise rotation opens (occurrence of fault). When the limit switch opens the direct (no PLC intervention) result is discontinuation of the contactor drive signal. The PLC's driver signal for the currently active contactor becomes ineffective (overridden by limit switch). The motor contactor (DO 0.0: clockwise rotation) of the RS1-x is switched off. The application program in the PLC cancels the switch-on command (DO 0.0) and optionally the brake enabling signal (DO 0.2). Brake is released (DO 0.2) and direction of rotation is reversed by switching on the motor (DO 0.1: counterclockwise rotation) by the application program in the PLC. The limit switch for clockwise rotation recloses.
3 4
11-16
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Expansion modules 11.3.5 Externally powered brake xB1, xB3

The xB1 or xB3 is the brake control module for controlling an externally powered brake. Features of externally powered brake: Brake is released when voltage is applied. Brake can be released when the motor is switched off (so that the motor can be turned by hand). The brake control module is a single-pole breaker in the brake's circuit. External 24 VDC supply required. Maximum switching current is 4 A.

The diagram below shows an externally powered DC spring-loaded brake (Pswitching) with motor starter (DS-x, DS1-x, DS1e-x, F-DS1e-x, DSS1e-x, RS-x, RS1-x, RS1e-x, F-RS1e-x) and brake control module (xB1, xB3).
ET 200S bus DS-x
DO0 Logic K1
RS-x
DO0 Logic K1 DO1 Logic K2 DO0
DS1-x DS(S)1e-x F-DS1e-x
DO0
RS1-x RS1e-x F-RS1e-x
xB3 U1
IN1
Inputs (xB3 only) 1 2 5 Input 1 Limit switch cw rotation Input 2 Limit switch ccw rotation
Logic K1
Logic K1 DO1 Logic K2
IN2
DO2
Logic
DO2
Logic
DO2
Logic
DO2
Logic
xB1 xB3
Power bus
Safe disconn. 500 V
Electronic switch
Motor starters
L+ M
24 VDC
Motor with integrated DC spring-loaded brake
Figure 11-4: Sketched circuit diagram of externally powered brake
11-17
Expansion modules
Technical specifications for xB1 and xB3

Module-specific data Ambient temperature Degree of protection Operation Storage 0 to 60 C -40 to 80 C IP20, IEC 60529
Inputs (terminals 2 and 6) - xB3 only (non-retentive) Input characteristic curve to IEC 1131 Low input current High input current Max. input current Input delay tin Iin Iin Type 1 <1.5 mA >5 mA max. 8 to 10 mA approx. 10 ms
Sensor supply (terminals 1 and 5) short-circuit-proof and overload proof Operating voltage range (referenced to U1 -) Current limitation in the event of a short-circuit to U1Isolation Between drive and brake circuit Surge withstand capability 500 VAC 8 kV 20.4 to 28.8 VDC approx. 1 A
Switching element of the brake control module (terminals 4 and 8) Rated operating voltage Peak voltage (periodic) Continuous current 1) Switch-on current at t <120 ms Switch-off current 13, at 24 VDC (with ext. induction protection) Off-state current Voltage drop at Iload <4 A 24 VDC <35 VDC 4 A 8 A 4 A <10 mA <0.3 V 95 W LED off (switch open) LED on (switch closed) no
Permissible power of brake at 24 V Indication by LED (yellow) - Motor braked Brake active - Motor unbraked Brake released
DO 0.2 = 0 DO 0.2 = 1
Error message if brake not driven
Table 11-9: Technical specifications, brake control module xB1, xB3
11-18
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Expansion modules
Protective measures Overload protection 2) Short-circuit protection 2) Integrated current limitation yes no Internal 40 W > 40 W Protective diode Recommended Necessary
(to EN 60947-5-1 with 24 V / 1 kA)

Reverse polarity protection 3) Induction protection External protective circuitry
for inductive load 4)

1 2
) See information on derating in Section 3.4 ) Electronic shutdown (cannot be reactivated until output DO 0.2 of the motor starter has been switched off) 3 ) If polarity is reversed current flows (via protective diode parallel to switching element), the brake is released and overload and short-circuit protection have no effect. 4 ) Circuit with RC element, protective diode or varistor
Table 11-9: (cont.)Technical specifications, brake control module xB1, xB3
11-19
Expansion modules 11.3.6 Internally powered brake xB2, xB4

The xB2 or xB4 is the brake control module for controlling an internally powered brake. The brake control module is for electric motors connecting to three-phase supplies with a rated voltage of 230/400 V to max. 290/500 V. Features of internally powered brake: Brake is released when voltage is applied. Once the motor has been switched off, the brake can no longer be released. The brake control module is a single-pole breaker in the brake's circuit. The brake receives a rectified supply tapped from the motor's terminal board. Maximum switching current is 0.7 A.
Important The brake control module does not isolate the brake from the line supply. The additional asymmetric load imposed by the brake's overcurrent trip transient has to be taken into account for motor starters with low adjustment ranges. Do not use soft starters in conjunction with internally powered brakes.
11-20
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Expansion modules

The diagram below shows an internally powered DC spring-loaded brake with motor starter (DS-x, DS1-x, DS1e-x, F-DS1e-x, RS-x, RS1-x, RS1e-x, F-RS1e-x) and brake control module (xB2, xB4).
ET 200S bus DS-x
DO0 Logic K1
RS-x
DO0 Logic K1 DO1 Logic K2 DO0
DS1-x DS1e-x F-DS1e-x
DO0
RS1-x RS1e-x F-RS1e-x
xB4 U1
IN1
Inputs (xB4 only) 1 2 5 Input 1 Limit switch cw rotation Input 2 Limit switch ccw rotation
Logic K1
Logic K1 DO1 Logic K2
IN2
DO2
Logic
DO2
Logic
DO2
Logic
DO2
Logic
xB2 xB4
Power bus
Safe isolation 500 V
Electronic switch
Motor starters
~
Motor with integrated DC spring-loaded brake
+ -
Figure 11-5: Sketched circuit diagram of internally powered brake
11-21
Expansion modules
Technical specifications for xB2 and xB4

Module-specific data Ambient temperature Degree of protection Input characteristic curve to IEC 1131 Low input current High input current Max. input current Input delay Operating voltage range (referenced to U1 -) Current limitation for short-circuit to U1Isolation Between drive and brake circuit Surge withstand capability Rated operating voltage Peak voltage (periodic) Continuous current 1) Switch-on currentat t <120 ms Switch-off current 13, at 220 VDCeff 2) (with ext. induction protection) Residual current Voltage drop at Iload <0.7 A Approved brakes (examples) with one-way rectification for 230 VAC equals 100 Veff, T <40 C 400 VAC equals 170 Veff 500 VAC equals 220 Veff Indication by LED (yellow) - Motor braked Brake active - Motor unbraked Brake released 500 VAC 8 kV 500 VDC <710 Vs 0.7 A 5 A 0.7 A <1 mA <1.4 V tin Iin Iin Operation Storage 0 to 60 C -40 to 80 C IP20, IEC 60529 Type 1 <1.5 mA >5 mA max. 8 to 10 mA approx. 10 ms 20.4 to 28.8 VDC approx. 1 A
Inputs (terminals 2 and 6) - xB4 only (non-retentive)
Sensor supply (terminals 1 and 5) short-circuit-proof and overload proof
Switching element of the brake control module (terminals 4 - 8)
70 W 100 W 135 W LED off (switch open) LED on (switch closed) no
DO 0.2 = 0 DO 0.2 = 1
Error message if brake not driven
Table 11-10: Technical specifications, brake control module xB2, xB4
11-22
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Expansion modules
Protective measures Overload protection 3) Short-circuit protection 3) Integrated current limitation yes no Internal 40 W > 40 W Varistor Recommended Necessary
(to EN 60947-5-1 with 230 V / 1 kA)

Reverse polarity protection 4) Induction protection External protective circuitry
for inductive load 5)
1) See information on derating in Section 3.4 2) Half-wave rectification for an 500 VAC supply 3) Electronic shutdown (cannot be reactivated until output DO 0.2 of the motor starter has
been switched off)

4) Module maps short-circuit without current limitation, the brake is released and
overload and short-circuit protection have no effect.

5) Circuit with RC element or protective diode at the brake coil or varistor at brake
rectifier
Table 11-10: (cont.)Technical specifications, brake control module xB2, xB4
11-23
Expansion modules 11.3.7 Installation
Installing terminal module for brake control module

Drawing 1 Procedure Hang the terminal module on the upper rail.
Tilt the terminal module backwards into the lower rail until you hear it engage.
Push the terminal to the left with both hands towards the module you have already installed, keeping it straight, until you can hear it engage with the adjacent module.
Table 11-11: Installing terminal module for brake control module
11-24
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Expansion modules
Connecting the brake control module Requirement

The terminal module for the brake module must be installed.
Mechanical coding
When the brake control modules are plugged in, the terminal modules are mechanically coded to ensure that, in the event of a fault, they can only be replaced by brake control modules with identical functions. You must therefore bear the configured layout in mind when you insert the modules. If necessary, code elements can be removed from the terminal module using a 3 mm screwdriver.
Code elements
Terminal module
Figure 11-6: Mechanical coding of terminal modules
Note If a brand-new brake control module is plugged into a terminal module that is already coded, the part of the code element for the terminal module must be removed from the brake control module beforehand.
11-25
Expansion modules
Connecting the brake control module

Drawing
xB1 to 4
Procedure 4 Insert the brake control module onto the installed and prewired terminal module as shown in the drawing. Brake control modules can only be connected to the correct terminal modules regardless of the code element.
TM-xB15 S24-01 TM-xB215 S24-01
Table 11-12: Connecting the brake control module
Connecting the motor starter Requirement

The brake control module (xB1 to 4) has to be connected before the motor starter (DS-x, DS1-x, F-DS1e-x, DSS1e-x, RS-x, RS1-x, F-RS1e-x) is connected.
Drawing 5 Procedure Insert the motor starter onto the installed and prewired terminal module as shown in the drawing. The procedure is described in Section 3.7.
Table 11-13: Connecting the motor starter
11.3.8
Removing the brake control module

The brake control module can be removed only when its motor starter has been removed. See Section 3.7 for instructions on removing motor starters.
11-26
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Fail-safe modules
12
Subject Page 12-2 12-3 12-4 12-4 12-5 12-7 12-9 12-10 12-11 12-14 12-16 12-17 12-18 12-21 12-23
Section 12.1 General description
12.1.1 Overview 12.2 Terminal modules TM-PFX30 S47 and TM-FCM30-S47
12.2.1 Assignment of the terminal modules 12.2.2 Terminal modules TM-PFX30 S47 for the PM-D F X1 power/expansion module 12.2.3 Terminal module TM-FCM30-S47 for the F-CM contact replicator 12.3 Power/expansion module PM-D F X1
12.3.1 Parameters 12.3.2 Electrical configuration 12.3.3 Technical specifications - PM-D F X1 12.4 F-CM contact replicator
12.4.1 Parameters 12.4.2 Electrical configuration 12.4.3 Technical specifications - F-CM 12.5 Examples with fail-safe modules
12-1
Fail-safe modules
12.1
General description
Safety note Fail-safe modules cannot be used in conjunction with the safety integrated SIGUARD system.
Fail-safe means: the F-DS1e-x, F-RS1e-x, and F-CM interrupt the main conducting path/enabling circuits if an emergency stop is requested via the mechanically selected SG bus. A device error is detected and the safe state is established.
12-2
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Fail-safe modules 12.1.1 Overview

The table below lists the fail-safe modules currently available together with the corresponding functions:
Description Power/expansion module Contact replicator PM-D F X1 F-CM Function ... supplies external safety devices ... loops the 6 SG buses and U1 and M through ... used in conjunction with a fail-safe power module PM-D F PROFIsafe or PM-D F X1 ... makes 4 floating relay contacts available
Power module Fail-safe direct starters Fail-safe reversing starters
PM-D F PROFIsafe F-DS1e-x F-RS1e-x
See the ET 200S Distributed I/O System, Fail-Safe Modules manual

See Section 8.3 See Section 9.3
Table 12-1: Overview of the fail-safe modules
12-3
Fail-safe modules
12.2
12.2.1
Terminal modules TM-PFX30 S47 and TM-FCM30-S47

Terminal modules are required for wiring the PM-D F X1 fail-safe power/expansion module and the F-CM contact replicator. The following table shows which fail-safe modules you can use with the various terminal modules. You can find information on the terminal modules in the following chapters: Chapter 6 for the PM-D power module and all motor starters Chapter 10 for SIGUARD Chapter 11 for expansion modules such as the brake control module
Fail-safe modules Terminal modules TM-PFX30 S47-G1 TM-PFX30 S47-G0 3RK1903 PM-D F X1 power/expansion module F-CM contact replicator
Table 12-2: Assignment of the terminal modules for fail-safe modules
TM-FCM30 S47
-3AE00 -3AE10 X
-3AB10
12-4
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Fail-safe modules 12.2.2 Terminal modules TM-PFX30 S47 for the PM-D F X1 power/expansion module
Features
The terminal modules consist of a support and a terminal block. TM-PFX30 S47-G0 terminal module With an incoming supply from the left to forward U1 and M as well as SG1 to SG6. TM-PFX30 S47-G1 terminal module No incoming supply from the left in order to start a new group. Connection by screw-type terminal. Prewiring of the terminal module. AUX1 cable fed through without terminals. The fail-safe modules are identified by yellow labeling strips.
Terminal block
Support
Color coding labels


Terminals 1/8, 2/9, 6/13, 7/14, 15/22, 16/23, 18/25, 19/26, 20/27, and 21/28 are bridged in the terminal module and can be used to loop the potentials through.
12-5
Fail-safe modules
Terminal assignment
The following table illustrates the terminal assignment of the TM-PFX30 S47G0/G1 terminal modules:
Terminal 1/8 Meaning View Terminal 15/22
1 1 85 1 96 2 2 2 3
Meaning
+ U1: Fused 24 VDC limited IN/OU to SIMATIC range T M IN/OU T L+ M Not used Not used Not used Uin: For connecting an external power supply unit 24 VDC SELV/PELV Fed through without terminals
SG1
2/9
16/23
SG2
3/10 4/11 5/12 6/13 7/14
1 8 1 9 12 30 12 41
2 5 2 6 2 7 2 8
17/24 18/25 19/26 20/27 21/28
SG3 SG4 SG5 SG6
Not used
AUX1
Table 12-3: Terminal assignment of the TM-PFX30 S47-G0/G1 terminal modules for the PM-D F X1 power module
Technical specifications - TM-PFX30 S47

Table 12-4: Technical specifications - TM-PFX30 S47
30 x 196.5 x 102 117.5 approx. 375 500 V 24 VDC 10 A 1 x (0.14 to 2.5) to IEC 60947 1 x 2.5 1 x (0.14 to 1.5) to IEC 60947 1 x (18 to 22) Standard screwdriver, size 1 0.4 to 0.7
12-6
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Fail-safe modules 12.2.3 Terminal module TM-FCM30-S47 for the F-CM contact replicator
Features
The terminal module consists of a support and a terminal block. TM-PFX30 S47 terminal module with throughfeed for the F-CM contact replicator Connection by screw-type terminal Prewiring of the terminal module AUX1 cable fed through without terminals SG bus selection using the wire jumper provided The fail-safe modules are identified by yellow labeling strips.
Terminal block
Support
Color coding labels

Terminal assignment
The following table illustrates the terminal assignment of the TM-FCM30-S47 terminal module:
Terminal 1--8 2--9 3/10 4--11 5--12 6--13 7--14 SG1 SG2 SG3 SG4 SG5
5 4 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 2 5 2 6 2 7 2 8 1 1 85 1 96 2 2 2 3
Meaning
View
Terminal 15 16 17-21, 24 22 23 25 26 OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT
Meaning
1.1 1.2 Not used 2.1 2.2 3.1 3.2 4.1 4.2
Not used
SG6 AUX1
Jumped in the factory Fed through without terminals

6
27 28
Table 12-5: Terminal assignment of the TM-FCM30-S47 terminal modules for the F-CM contact replicator
12-7
Fail-safe modules
Technical specifications - TM-FCM30-S47

Table 12-6: Technical specifications - TM-FCM30-S47
30 x 196.5 x 102 117.5 approx. 375
500 V 24 VDC 10 A
1 x (0.14 to 2.5) to IEC 60947 1 x 2.5 1 x (0.14 to 1.5) to IEC 60947 1 x (18 to 22)
Standard screwdriver, size 1 0.4 to 0.7
Safety note Only one SG bus can be selected.
12-8
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Fail-safe modules
12.3
Features
Power/expansion module PM-D F X1

A new fail-safe potential group begins with the power/expansion module together with the associated terminal module. The fail-safe motor starters/ F-CM contact replicators of a fail-safe potential group are connected to the right of the power/expansion module. The PM-D F X1 has redundant overvoltage protection that trips the internal fuse just outside the upper SIMATIC voltage limit, thus ensuring that the entire system downstream is deenergized. The PM-D F X1 conducts the fused voltage (U1) for the supply to the electronic components and the safety groups SG1 to SG6 to the potential buses of the terminal modules for all the fail-safe motor starters and F-CM contact replicators of a fail-safe potential group. External safety devices can be supplied with fused voltage U1 from PM-D F X1. This ensures that overvoltage cannot occur in the system (there must be no disturbances). Switching through the 6 safety groups SG1 to SG6 as well as from U 1 and M. The state of safety groups SG1 to SG6 is indicated by an LED. Transfer of diagnostic messages to the coordinating controller. The PM-D F X1 with a terminal module is a forwarding node. The fail-safe potential group can be switched to an additional ET 200S row. The fail-safe modules are identified by yellow labeling strips.
Caution Power/expansion modules must not be either inserted or removed during operation.
View
LEDs:
SF Group error
PWR (power) (U1) SG1 to SG6 (safety group 1 to 6)
Figure 12-1: PM-D F X1 power/expansion module
12-9
Fail-safe modules 12.3.1 Parameters

The following table describes the parameters that can be set for the PM-D F X1 power/expansion module.
Group diagnosis
Disable
Module
Table 12-7: Parameters for the PM-D F X1 power/expansion module
12-10
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Fail-safe modules 12.3.2 Electrical configuration
Block circuit diagram for the PM-D F X1

DC 24 V L+ 6/13 M 7/14 SG1 15/22 SG2 16/23 SG3 18/25
Bus connection
Safe isolation
SF
Redundant voltage monitoring and disconnection
Interference suppressor filter and display
ET 200S Bus
PWR 1/8 + IN/OUT 2/9 - IN/OUT 19/26 SG4 20/27 SG5 21/28 SG6
Fused 24 VDC (U1)

Figure 12-2: Block diagram for the PM-D F X1
Explanation
The PM-D F X1 is inserted at the start of a potential group or a new row (TM-PFX30 S47-G1) or is inserted to loop through a potential group (TM-PFX30 S47-G0). You can connect voltage (Uin) to the PM-D F X1 at terminals 6/13 and 7/14. You can feed a fused voltage of 24 VDC (U1) in and out at terminals 1/8 and 2/9. Safety groups SG1 to SG6 can be fed in and out at terminals 15/22, 16/23, 18/25, 19/26, 20/27, and 21/28. The PM-D F X1 module consists of the following system components: Non-safety-related system components: - Bus connection with communication - Diagnostic messages via the bus - Display of switching and error states Safety-related system components: - Monitoring of the U1 voltage for overvoltage - Disconnection of the U1 voltage in the event of overvoltage (<100 ms)
12-11
Fail-safe modules
Rules for laying cables

Safety note The user must ensure that a cross-circuit between the individual safety groups SG1 to SG6 or U1 and Uin or other cables cannot occur by complying with the correct cable-laying rules.
Safety regulations
Safety note If the PM-D F X1 power/expansion module is supplied via Uin , a PELV power supply unit that supplies a maximum of 60 VDC even in the event of an error, must be used. An external suppressor circuit (surge filter) is necessary between the load power supply (power supply unit) and the load voltage input (Uin) of the terminal module to ensure surge resistance (such as Blitzductor VT (order no. 918 402 from Dehn + Shne).
Safety note When PM-D F X1, PM-D F PROFIsafe, F-CM, F-DS1e-x, and F-RS1e-x are part of a single potential group, they must be in the same switch cabinet. Cables for SG1 to SG6, U1, Uin can only be laid in this switch cabinet.
12-12
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Fail-safe modules
Safety note If external safety devices (not ET 200S, e.g. SIGUARD 3TK28, AS-i Safety Monitor) are connected to the PM-D F X1, you must ensure that they have no effect on the potential group, also in case of failure. The external safety devices then switch U1+ (terminal 1/8) to the SG buses (emergency stop signal). A corresponding safety device must be selected depending on the requested category/SIL. Please ensure you comply with the regulations for each safety device.
Module replacement
If a PM-D F X1 module has to be replaced, an acceptance test is not necessary.
12-13
Fail-safe modules 12.3.3 Technical specifications - PM-D F X1

Dimensions and weight Installation dimensions W x H x D (mm) (incl. terminal module) Weight (g) Module-specific data Ambient temperature (C) Degree of protection Maximum attainable safety classes: IEC 61508 DIN V 19250 EN 954-1 SIL 3 Tripping class 5 and 6 Category 4 0 to 60 IP20 30 x 196.5 x 117.5 approx. 100
Safety parameters: Low demand PFDAVG (10a) High demand/continuous mode PFH 1/h Proof test interval years 2.5*10-6 5.7*10-11 10
Table 12-8: Technical specifications - PM-D F X1
12-14
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Fail-safe modules
Voltages, currents, potentials Rated control supply voltage Us Rated operating current Ie Internal protection through fusing Recommended upstream short-circuit protection: Fuse Supply of: Fail-safe motor starters Motor starters for safety integrated SIGUARD system Electronic modules Ex[i] modules Current consumption: From the backplane bus From U1 From SGx Status, interrupts, diagnostics Interrupts Diagnostic functions: Group error/device fault Monitoring of the supply voltage for electronic components U1 (PWR) Monitoring of the 6 safety groups Diagnostic information readable Standards, approvals TV UL, CSA certification
1)
21.6 to 26.4 VDC up to 60 C 6A 7 A (quick-response)
gL/gG 6.3 A 1) yes no no no 10 mA 35 mA 15 mA
None yes Red SF LED Green PWR LED Green LED SG1 to SG6 yes
yes yes
The fuse must be selected such that the connected power supply unit can provide the required current to interrupt it.
Table 12-8: (cont.)Technical specifications - PM-D F X1
12-15
Fail-safe modules
12.4
Features
F-CM contact replicator

The F-CM contact replicator closes its enabling circuits unless there is an emergency stop on the selected SG bus. Redundant circuit design with two output relays with positively driven contacts. Can be set to safety group SG1 to SG6 (default setting = SG6). Four separate floating enabling circuits as normally open contacts. At each on/off cycle of the contact replicator, the switching elements of the F-CM are checked to ensure that they open and close correctly. Welded contacts in any enabling circuits are detected by the F-CM when the enabling circuits are opened, and a reboot of the device is avoided by the positively driven operation of the contacts. Transfer of diagnostic messages to the coordinating controller. The fail-safe modules are identified by yellow labeling strips.
Caution Contact replicators cannot be either inserted or removed during operation.
View
LEDs:
SF
SF Group error
PWR
PWR (power) (U1) STAT (status)
STAT 3RK1903-3CA00
Figure 12-3: F-CM contact replicator
12-16
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Fail-safe modules 12.4.1 Parameters

The following table indicates the parameter that can be set for the PM-D contact replicator.
Group diagnosis
Disable
Module
Table 12-9: Parameters for the F-CM contact replicator
12-17
Fail-safe modules 12.4.2 Electrical configuration
Block diagram for the F-CM

OUT SG1 1 SF 8 SG2 2 9 SG3 4 11 1.1 2.1 3.1 4.1 15 22 25 27
Bus connection
Safe isolation
Connection logic and display

K1 K2
ET 200S Bus
5 SG4
12 6 SG5
13 7 SG6
14
U1
16 23 26
28
1.2 2.2 3.2 4.2 OUT
Figure 12-4: Block diagram for the F-CM
Explanation
The F-CM contact replicator consists of the following system components: Non safety-related system components: - Bus connection with communication - Diagnostic message via the bus - Display of switching and error states - Connection logic Safety-related system components: - Disconnection of the enabling circuits if there is no voltage on the selected SG bus - Mutual interlocking of the positively driven relays - Prevention of reclosing if there is an error in the enabling circuit
12-18
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Fail-safe modules
The F-CM contact replicator can be inserted anywhere in the corresponding potential group to the right of a fail-safe power module. Use the wire jumper to set the desired safety group (SG1 to SG6) on the terminal with the following terminals: - 1/8 for SG1, - 2/9 for SG2, - 4/11 for SG3, - 5/12 for SG4, - 6/13 for SG5, - 7/14 for SG6 The F-CM contact replicator is preset to safety group SG6 using the wire jumper. You can connect additional actuators or devices to the floating contacts with the terminals OUT 1.1 - OUT 4.2.
Safety regulations
Safety note Only one of the 6 SG buses can be selected with a jumper.
Safety note Only applies in fail-safe mode (fail-safe technology) The F-CM can only be operated in the potential group of a PM-D F PROFIsafe or PM-D F X1 that safely limits the voltage to within the SIMATIC range.
Safety note You must only use the F-CM contact replicator to control devices that do not pose any direct danger to persons or the environment if suddenly disconnected.
Safety note Cyclic test The F-CM must be tested at commissioning and then at least every 3 to 6 months by means of an on/off cycle using the selected emergency stop bus.
12-19
Fail-safe modules
Safety note The enabling circuits must be appropriately protected against overloading (with fuses, for example; see Section 12.4.3). Please note: If the enabling circuits are integrated into the sensor circuits of an external safety device, overload protection might not be necessary if there is protection in the sensor circuits of the external safety device. For more information, consult the operating instructions of the external safety device.
Safety note The F-CM is designed to shut down safely via the selected SG bus when an emergency stop occurs. In the event of a fault, a defined power-up cannot be guaranteed.
Safety note Make sure that any potential that builds up between the control circuit of the F-CM (U1/SGx/M) and the main conducting paths (OUT) is not greater than the safe, functional extra-low voltage. This can be achieved by means of suitable measures.
Module replacement
If you replace an F-CM module, an acceptance test is not necessary but the F-CM must be tested (see cyclic test).
12-20
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Fail-safe modules 12.4.3 Technical specifications - F-CM

Dimensions and weight Installation dimensions W x H x D (mm) (incl. terminal module) Weight (g) Module-specific data Mechanical life Electrical life Ambient temperature Degree of protection Utilization category Control times On-delay Release time Maximum attainable safety classes: IEC 61508 DIN V 19250 EN 954-1 Low demand PFDAVG (10a) Test interval 3 months Test interval 6 months High demand/continuous mode PFH Test interval 3 months 1/h Test interval 6 months 1/h Proof test interval years SIL 3 Tripping class 5 and 6 Category 4 10 x 106 switching cycles > 200,000 switching cycles at Ie 0 to 60 C IP20 DC-13 < 80 ms (typ. 50 ms) < 60 ms (typ. 35 ms) 30 x 196.5 x 117.5 approx. 190
Safety parameters: 1.8*10-5 3.0*10-5 4.0*10-10 6.9*10-10 10
Table 12-10: Technical specifications - F-CM
12-21
Fail-safe modules
Voltages, currents, potentials Control circuit U1 (PWR): Rated control supply voltage Us Power consumption Floating enabling circuits Rated operating current Ie 13 to 24 VDC Thermal continuous current Ith Recommended short-circuit protection for enabling circuits Fuse Power consumption: From the backplane bus From U1 From SGx Status, interrupts, diagnostics Interrupts Diagnostic functions: Group error/device fault Monitoring of the supply voltage for electronic components U1 (PWR) Monitoring of the circuit state of the enabling circuit Diagnostic information readable Standards, approvals TV UL, CSA certification
Table 12-10: (cont.)Technical specifications - F-CM
21.6 to 26.4 VDC up to 60 C 1.8 W
2A 4A
gL/gG 6.3 A 10 mA 15 mA 70 mA None yes red SF LED green PWR LED green/red LED STAT yes yes yes
12-22
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Fail-safe modules
12.5
Examples with fail-safe modules

Safety note The following applications serve only as examples of typical circuits. No liability is accepted for the reliability, certification or compatibility of the examples. Use at your own risk.
Safety note In the case of categories 3 and 4 and SIL 2 and 3, a PELV power supply unit that supplies a maximum output voltage of 60 VDC in the event of a fault must be used for U1 ext (safe functional extra-low voltage).
Safe functional extra-low voltage

Warning The fail-safe modules must be operated with safe functional extra-low voltage. That means that these modules may only be operated with maximum voltage of 60 V in the event of an error.
All system components that can deliver electrical energy in any form must fulfill these conditions. Every other electrical circuit (DC 24 V) utilized in the system must have a safe, functional extra-low voltage. Please observe the appropriate data sheets or contact the manufacturer.
Warning All voltage sources, e.g. electronics power supply, external load power supply, or bus power supply, must be electrically isolated from another externally . This is necessary so that even at low potential differentials no additive voltage which could exceed the 60 V develops from the individual voltage sources. Please observe the ET 200S installation guidelines to ensure that the electrical isolation is sufficient in regard to the electrical wiring's cross-section.
12-23
Master
PLC S7-300F
TM-P15 S23-A0 TM-E30 S44-A0 TM-PF30 S47-F1
L+ U1 ext. M 2 6 3 7
A1
A2
Vs1 DI0 2, 4, 6, 8 1 5 3 7 DI1 DI2 DI3
Figure 12-5: Example with PM-D F PROFIsafe and 4 emergency stop circuits up to category 4/SIL3 Category 4 to EN 954-1 A0 A3 F-DS1e-x = SG2 F-DS1e-x = SG6 F-DS1e-x = SG2 F-RS1e-x = SG1 EM 4/8 PM-D F F-DI PROFI 24 VDC safe PM-E IM 151-1 HF
Profibus-DP Terminating module
Example with PM-D F PROFIsafe and 4 emergency stop circuits
A3
L+ U2 ext. M
Vs2 DI4 DI5 DI6 AUX1 4 8 10, 12, 14, 16 9 13 11 15 DI7
L+ U1 ext. M 4 emergency stop circuits for SG1 to SG6

1L+ 2L+ 1M 2M
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
20 27 21 28
Terminating cover
12-24
A1 A2 4A 5A 6A 7A
12.5.1
Fail-safe modules
1L1 400V AC 1L2 1L3 1L1 3L2 5L3 E = integrated input for programming A = integrated output for programming = line for external wiring
1 A4 A5 A6 A7
U U U
2T1 4T2 6T3
2T1 4T2 6T3
2T1 4T2 6T3
N PE
N PE
2T1 4T2 6T3 M 3~ M 3~ M 3~

Description PM-D F PROFIsafe TM-PF30 S47-F1 PM-E TM-P15 S23-A0 EM 4/8 F-DI DC24V PROFIsafe TM-E30 S44-A0 F-DS1e-x x in accordance with current range TM-FDS65 S32 with power bus infeed TM-FDS65 S31 with power bus throughfeed F-RS1e-x x in accordance with current rating TM-RS130 S31 with power bus throughfeed
N PE M 3~
The example shows the circuit for category 4/SIL3.

Category to 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 2 1 1 Order number 3RK1903-3BA00 3RK1903-3AA00 6ES7138-4CB10-0AB0 6ES7193-4CD20-0AA0 6ES7138-4FA00-0AB0 6ES7193-4CK20-0AA0 3RK1301-0xB13-0AA2 3RK1903-3AC00 3RK1903-3AC10 3RK1301-0xB13-1AA2 3RK1903-3AD10
Figure 12-5: (cont.) Example with PM-D F PROFIsafe and 4 emergency stop circuits up to category 4/SIL3
U
This example illustrates the configuration with fail-safe motor starters and the safety group set accordingly. The motor starters can be arranged in any order. They are supplied by a PM-D F PROFIsafe power module 1). The emergency stop switches are connected to a fail-safe digital input module 1) supplied by a separate PM-E power module.
You can use your user program to determine which emergency stop switch affects which safety group(s).
) See the ET 200S Distributed I/O System, Fail-Safe Modules manual.
N PE
N PE

Fault Fault E A A E A Fault E A Fault E A
Fail-safe modules
12-25
Fail-safe modules 12.5.2 Example with the PM-D F X1 power/expansion module and external safety combinations
3TK2822
K2
ON 14 Y11 EM. STOP 11 21 Y21
3TK2822
K1
12 22
13
Y22 Y12
F-DS1e-x = SG2
A1 K2 Y33
A2
Y34
A5
ON U2 ext. Y34 M 14 Y11 EM. STOP 11 21 Y21
F-DS1e-x = SG1
L+
12 22
A4
13
13
Y22 Y12
A1 K1 Y33
24
14
23
24
14
SG1
SG2
SG3
SG4
SG5
F-DS1e-x = SG2
A1 15
A2
PM-D F X1
A1
IM 151-1
Profibus-DP
A0
A0
S7-300
Figure 12-6: Example with the PM-D F X1 power/expansion module and external safety combinations
Safety note A fuse for K1/K2 enabling circuits is not necessary here because the internal fuse of the PM-D F X1 is sufficient in this instance. If other external safety combinations are used, it might be necessary to add a fuse to the enabling circuits to prevent the occurrence of the common mode fault of contact welding of the enabling circuits.
PLC
12-26
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
U2 ext. M
L+
1L+ 2L+ 1M 2M
U1 ext. M
L+
6 13 7 14
1 8 2 9
22 16 23 18 25 19 26 20 27 21 28
SG6
Make sure the wiring is cross-proof!
A2
F-RS1e-x = SG1
A3
U2 ext. M
L+
13
23
TM-PF30 S47-G1
Terminating cover
Master
Terminating module
A2 A3 A4
A5
2T1 4T2 6T3
2T1 4T2 6T3
2T1 4T2 6T3
N PE
N PE
2T1 4T2 6T3 M 3~ M 3~ M 3~

Description PM-D F X1 TM-PFX30 S47-G1 External safety combination x in accordance with the connection F-DS1e-x x in accordance with the current rating TM-FDS65 S32 with power bus infeed TM-FDS65 S31 with power bus throughfeed F-RS1e-x x in accordance with the current rating TM-RS130 S31 with power bus throughfeed
N PE M 3~
Figure 12-6: (cont.) Example with the PM-D F X1 power/expansion module and external safety combinations
U U U U
The example shows the circuit for category 4.

Category to 4 1 1 2 3 1 2 1 1 Order number 3RK1903-3DA00 3RK1903-3AE00 3TK2822-xCB30 3RK1301-0xB13-0AA2 3RK1903-3AC00 3RK1903-3AC10 3RK1301-0xB13-1AA2 3RK1903-3AD10
This example illustrates the configuration with fail-safe motor starters and the safety group set accordingly. The motor starters can be arranged in any order. The motor starters are supplied by a PM-D F X1 power/expansion module. The emergency stop switches are connected to external safety combinations that switch the U1 voltage to the SG buses.
N PE
N PE

Fail-safe modules
12-27
Terminating module
Master
PLC
Terminating cover Profibus-DP
TM-PF30 S47-G1 TM-P15 S23-A0 TM-E30 S44-A0 TM-PF30 S47-F1 TM-PF30 S47-G0
A0
L+ U1 ext. M DI1 DI2 DI3 2 6 3 7 2, 4, 6, 8 1 5 3 7 Vs1 DI0
Example with PM-D F PROFIsafe and several stations
Figure 12-7: Example with PM-D F PROFIsafe and several stations up to category 4/SIL3 Category 4 to EN 954-1 A1 A3 F-DS1e-x = SG2 F-DS1e-x = SG6 PM-D F X1 IM 151-1 F-DS1e-x = SG3 F-DS1e-x = SG2 A4 A6 A7 A8 A9 EM 4/8 PM-D F PM-D F-DI PROFI F X1 24 VDC safe PM-E A2 A5 A0-0
A0-0
A1
A2
A3
1 8 2 9
A4 15
Terminating cover
S7-300F
Profibus-DP
Terminating module
12-28
1 8 2 9
12.5.3
Fail-safe modules
A0
IM 151-1 HF
A7 15
L+
L+
U2 ext. M AUX1 4 8
1L+ 2L+ 1M 2M
U2 ext. M
Vs2 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7
L+ U1 ext. M 4 emergency stop circuits for SG1 to SG6
1L+ 2L+ 1M 2M
10, 12, 14, 16 9 13 11 15
20 27 21 28
6 13 7 14
22 16 23 18 25 19 26 20 27 21 28
6 13 7 14
22 16 23 18 25 19 26 20 27 21 28
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
SG1 to SG6
1L1 400V AC 1L2 1L3 1L1 3L2 5L3 1L1 3L2 5L3
1 A5 A6 A8 9A
U U U
2T1 4T2 6T3
2T1 4T2 6T3
2T1 4T2 6T3
2T1 4T2 6T3 M 3~ M 3~ N PE M 3~

Description PM-D F PROFIsafe TM-PF30 S47-F1 PM-E TM-P15 S23-A0 EM 4/8 F-DI DC24V PROFIsafe TM-E30S44-A0 PM-D F X1 TM-PFX30 S47-G0 TM-PFX30 S47-G1 External safety combination x in accordance with the connection F-DS1e-x x in accordance with the current rating TM-FDS65 S32 with power bus infeed TM-FDS65 S31 with power bus throughfeed
N PE M 3~ E = integrated input for programming A = integrated output for programming = line for external wiring

Category to 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 4 2 2 Order number 3RK1903-3BA00 3RK1903-3AA00 6ES7138-4CB10-0AB0 6ES7193-4CD20-0AA0 6ES7138-4FA00-0AB0 6ES7193-4CK20-0AA0 3RK1903-3DA00 3RK1903-3AE10 3RK1903-3AE00 3TK2822-xCB30 3RK1301-0xB13-0AA2 3RK1903-3AC00 3RK1903-3AC10
Figure 12-7: (cont.) Example with PM-D F PROFIsafe and several stations up to category 4/SIL3
U
The example shows the circuit for category 4/SIL3.
Additional ET 200S buses are also supplied by a PM-D F X1.
This example illustrates the configuration with fail-safe motor starters and the safety group set accordingly. The motor starters can be arranged in any order. They are supplied by a PM-D F PROFIsafe 1) power module. The emergency stop switches are connected to a fail-safe digital input module 1) supplied by a separate PM-E power module.
You can use your user program to determine which emergency stop button affects which safety group.
N PE

Fault E A E A E A Fault Fault Fault E A
Fail-safe modules
12-29
Master
PLC
Profibus-DP
TM-P15 S23-A0 TM-E30 S44-A0 TM-PF30 S47-F1 TM-FCM30 S47-E0
L+ U1 ext. M
A1
Vs1 DI0
A2
A3
SG1 SG2 DI1 DI2 DI3 SG3
A4 5
SG4 SG5 SG6 12 6 13 7 14 1 8 2 9 4 11
Example with PM-D F PROFIsafe and contact replicator
Figure 12-8: Example with PM-D F PROFIsafe and contact replicator up to category 4/SIL3 Category 4 to EN 954-1 A0 EM 4/8 PM-D F F-CM F-DI PROFI 24 VDC safe PM-E IM 151-1 HF
Terminating module
2 6 3 7 2, 4, 6, 8 1 5 3 7
Terminating cover
12-30
A1 A3 F-DS1e-x = SG2 F-DS1e-x = SG6 F-DS1e-x = SG2 F-RS1e-x = SG1 A4 A2 A5 A6 A7 A8
Vs2 DI4 DI5 DI6 10, 12, 14, 16 9 13 11 15 DI7 L+ U1 ext. M 4 emergency stop circuits for SG1 to SG6 1.2 20 27 21 28 1.1 2.1 OUT 3.1 4.1 15 22 25 27 16 23 26 28 2.2 OUT 3.2 4.2 1L+ 2L+ 1M 2M AUX1 4 8
12.5.4
Fail-safe modules
S7-300F
L+
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
U2 ext. M
1L1 400 V AC 1L2 1L3 1L1 3L2 5L3 E = integrated input for programming A = integrated output for programming = line for external wiring
A5 A6 A7
A8
2T1 4T2 6T3
2T1 4T2 6T3
2T1 4T2 6T3
N PE
N PE
2T1 4T2 6T3 M 3~ M 3~ M 3~

Description PM-D F PROFIsafe TM-PF30 S47-F1 PM-E TM-P15 S23-A0 EM 4/8 F-DI DC24V PROFIsafe TM-E30S44-A0 F-CM TM-FCM30 S47-E0 F-DS1e-x x in accordance with the current rating TM-FDS65 S32 with power bus infeed TM-FDS65 S31 with power bus throughfeed F-RS1e-x x in accordance with the current rating TM-RS130 S31 with power bus throughfeed
N PE M 3~

Category to 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 2 1 1 Order number 3RK1903-3BA00 3RK1903-3AA00 6ES7138-4CB10-0AB0 6ES7193-4CD20-0AA0 6ES7138-4FA00-0AB0 6ES7193-4CK20-0AA0 3RK1903-3CA00 3RK1903-3AB10 3RK1301-0xB13-0AA2 3RK1903-3AC00 3RK1903-3AC10 3RK1301-0xB13-1AA2 3RK1903-3AD10
Figure 12-8: (cont.) Example with PM-D F PROFIsafe and contact replicator up to category 4/SIL3
U U U U
Safety note Only one of the 6 SG buses can be selected with a jumper on the F-CM.
Based on the example in 11.4.1, a contact replicator is added to this example in order to achieve fail-safe disconnection of additional enabling circuits. You can determine which safety group (SG) controls the contact replicator using the wire jumper.
N PE
N PE

Fail-safe modules
12-31
Master
PLC
TM-PF30 S47-G1 TM-FCM30 S47-E0
A0
SG1 SG2 SG3 SG4 SG5 SG6 13 U2 ext. M A2 Y34 L+ 13
Terminating cover
S7-300
Profibus-DP
Terminating module
12-32
Category 4 to EN 954-1 A0 A1 PM-D F X1
3TK2822 3TK2822
12.5.5
A2 F-CM F-DS1e-x = SG2 F-DS1e-x = SG1 F-DS1e-x = SG2 F-RS1e-x = SG1
Fail-safe modules
A3
A4
A5
A6
K1
K2
IM 151-1
A1 15
A1 K1 Y33
L+
A1 K2 Y33 A2 Y34
13
A2 5
SG1 ON 14 SG2 Y11 EM. STOP 11 21 Y21 SG3 SG4 SG5 SG6 12 6 13 7 14 1 8 2 9 4 11
1 8 2 9
ON U2 ext. M 14 Y11 EM. STOP 11 21 Y21 Y22 Y12 14 12 22
Y22 Y12 13 14
12 22
Figure 12-9: Example with PM-D F X1 power module and contact replicator up to category 4
L+ U1 ext. M
L+
U2 ext. M
Example with PM-D F X1 power module and contact replicator
1L+ 2L+ 1M 2M
6 13 7 14
22 16 23 18 25 19 26 20 27 21 28 23 24
23
24
1.1 2.1 OUT 3.1 4.1
15 22 25 27
16 23 26 28
1.2 2.2 OUT 3.2 4.2

Make sure the wiring is cross-proof!
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
A3 A4 A5
A6
2T1 4T2 6T3
2T1 4T2 6T3
2T1 4T2 6T3
N PE
N PE
2T1 4T2 6T3 M 3~ M 3~ M 3~

Description PM-D F X1 TM-PFX30 S47-G1 F-CM TM-FCM30 S47-E0 External safety combination x in accordance with the connection F-DS1e-x x in accordance with the current rating TM-FDS65 S32 with power bus infeed TM-FDS65 S31 with power bus throughfeed F-RS1e-x x in accordance with the current rating TM-RS130 S31 with power bus throughfeed
N PE M 3~

Category to 4 1 1 1 1 2 3 1 2 Order number 3RK1903-3DA00 3RK1903-3AE00 3RK1903-3CA00 3RK1 03-3AB10 3TK2822-xCB30 3RK1301-0xB13-0AA2 3RK1903-3AC00 3RK1903-3AC10 3RK1301-0xB13-1AA2 3RK1903-3AD10
Figure 12-9: (cont.) Example with PM-D F X1 power module and contact replicator up to category 4
U U U U
Safety note Only one of the 6 SG buses may be selected with the jumper on the F-CM.
Based on the example in 11.4.2, a contact replicator is added to this example in order to achieve fail-safe disconnection of additional enabling circuits. You can use the wire jumper to set which of the two safety groups (SG1 or SG 2), switched via the external safety combinations, controls the contact replicator.
N PE
N PE

Fail-safe modules
12-33
DP master
AS-i power supply unit
PLC
Profibus-DP
AS-I master
Terminating module
TM-PF30 S47-G1
Category 4 to EN 954-1 F A1 15
SG1 SG2 SG3 SG4 SG5 SG6 U2 ext. M M AS-i + AS-i 1.13 1.23 2.13 2.23 Make sure the wiring is cross-proof! 1.14 1.24 2.14 2.24 L+ L+ A6 1.Y2 1.Y1 1 8 2 9
ET 200S fail-safe motor starter with AS-i Safety at work
A0
13 ON 14
L+ U1 ext. M
L+
Figure 12-10: Example with PM-D F X1 power module and AS-i Safety at work up to category 4/SIL3 Category 4 to EN 954-1 A0 A1 PM-D F X1
3RK1105-1BE04-0CA0

6 13 7 14
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
U2 ext. M
1L+ 2L+ 1M 2M
22 16 23 18 25 19 26 20 27 21 28
Terminating cover
12-34
A2 F-DS1e-x = SG1 F-DS1e-x = SG1 F-DS1e-x = SG2 F-RS1e-x = SG2 A3 A4 A5 A6
EM. STOP 1
12.5.6
EM. STOP 2
Fail-safe modules
IM 151-1
S7-300
EM. STOP 3
AS-i Safety Monitor
EM. STOP 4
A2 A3 A4
A5
2T1 4T2 6T3
2T1 4T2 6T3
2T1 4T2 6T3
N PE
N PE
2T1 4T2 6T3 M 3~ M 3~ M 3~

Description
N PE M 3~

Category to 4 1 1 1 3 1 2 1 1 Order number 3RK1903-3DA00 3RK1903-3AE00 3RK1105-1BE04-0CA0 3RK1301-0xB13-0AA2 3RK1903-3AC00 3RK1903-3AC10 3RK1301-0xB13-1AA2 3RK1903-3AD10
Figure 12-10: (cont.) Example with PM-D F X1 power module and AS-i Safety at work up to category 4/SIL3
U U U U
Safety note To prevent a common mode fault (contact welding of the enabling circuits) occurring with the AS-i safety monitor, add a 4 A MT fuse.
It combines the advantages of AS-i Safety at work on the sensor side with the advantages of ET 200S on the actuator side in a way that makes best use of both.
N PE
This configuration integrates an AS-i safety monitor in an ET 200S system. The configuration satisfies the requirements of all categories up to category 4/SIL3.
Fail-safe modules
PM-D F X1 TM-PFX30 S47-G1 AS-I Safety Monitor F-DS1e-x x in accordance with the current rating TM-FDS65 S32 with power bus infeed TM-FDS65 S31 with power bus throughfeed F-RS1e-x x in accordance with the current rating TM-RS130 S31 with power bus throughfeed
N PE

Fault Fault E A A E A E A Fault Fault E A
12-35
Master
PLC
TM-PF30 S47-G1
A0
SG1
A1 15
1 A1 SG2 A2 SG3 SG4 SG5 SG6
K1 Y32
ON Y35 Y34
13
1 A1 14 Y11 EM. STOP 11 21 Y21 Y22 Y12 14 12 22 A2
Terminating cover
S7-300
Profibus-DP
Terminating module
12-36
Category 4 to EN 954-1 A0 A1 PM-D F X1
3TK2841 3TK2842
12.5.7
A2 F-DS1e-x = SG2 F-DS1e-x = SG6 F-RS1e-x = SG1
Fail-safe modules
A3
A4
K1
K2
IM 151-1
K2 Y32
Y35 Y34 ON
1 8 2 9
13 14 Y11 EM. STOP 11 21 Y21 Y22 Y12 14 12 22
L+ U2 ext. M U1 ext. M
Example with the PM-D F X1 power/expansion module and external safety combinations
Figure 12-11: Example with the PM-D F X1 power/expansion module and external safety combinations up to category 4/SIL3
1L+ 2L+ 1M 2M L+ 6 13 7 14 22 16 23 18 25 19 26 20 27 21 28 24 28 Make sure the wiring is cross-proof!
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
A2 A3 A4
2T1 4T2 6T3
2T1 4T2 6T3
N PE
2T1 4T2 6T3 M 3~ M 3~

Description PM-D F X1 TM-PF30 S47-G1 F-DS1e-x x in accordance with the current rating TM-FDS65 S32 with power bus infeed TM-FDS65 S31 with power bus throughfeed F-RS1e-x x in accordance with the current rating TM-RS130 S31 with power bus throughfeed Electronic safety combination Electronic safety combination
N PE M 3~

Category to 4 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 Order number 3RK1903-3DA00 3RK1903-3AE00 3RK1301-0xB13-0AA2 3RK1903-3AC00 3RK1903-3AC10 3RK1301-0xB13-1AA2 3RK1903-3AD10 3RK2841-1BB40 3RK2842-1BB41
Figure 12-11: (cont.) Example with the PM-D F X1 power/expansion module and external safety combinations up to category 4/SIL3
U U U
Note The external safety combinations are also supplied by the PM-D F X1 power/expansion module.
N PE
N PE

Fault Fault E A A E A Fault E A
Fail-safe modules
12-37
Terminating module
DP coupler
F-DI ET 200M
Master
S7-300
TM-PF30 S47-G1
S7-300F
A0
Terminating cover
Profibus-DP
A1 15
SG1 SG2 SG3 SG4 L+ SG5 1 8 2 9
A5 21 22 17 18 19 20 37 38 39 40
1L+ 2L+ 1M 2M 3L+ 3M
Figure 12-12: ET 200S fail-safe motor starters and PM-D F X1 with central safety PLC Category 4 to EN 954-1 A0 A1 PM-D F X1 IM 151-1 PLC F-DO ET 200M F-DS1e-x = SG2 F-DS1e-x = SG6 F-RS1e-x = SG1 A2 A3 A4 A5
L+ U2 ext. M
ET 200S fail-safe motor starter and PM-D F X1 with central safety PLC

1L+ 2L+ 1M 2M
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
U1 ext. M
6 13 7 14
22 16 23 18 25 19 26 20 27 21 28
SG6
Master
12-38
PLC
3 4 6 7 9 10 12 13 15 16 23 24 26 27 29 30 32 33 35 36
12.5.8
Fail-safe modules
A2 A3 A4
2T1 4T2 6T3
2T1 4T2 6T3
N PE
2T1 4T2 6T3 M 3~ M 3~

Description PM-D F X1 TM-PF30 S47-G1 F-DI ET 200M F-DO ET 200M F-DS1e-x x in accordance with the current rating TM-FDS65 S32 with power bus infeed TM-FDS65 S31 with power bus throughfeed F-RS1e-x x in accordance with the current rating TM-RS130 S31 with power bus throughfeed
N PE M 3~
The components required for this example are as follows:

Category to 4 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 Order number 3RK1903-3DA00 3RK1903-3AE00 6ES7326-1BK00-0AB0 6ES7326-1BF00-0AB0 3RK1301-0xB13-0AA2 3RK1903-3AC00 3RK1903-3AC10 3RK1301-0xB13-1AA2 3RK1903-3AD10
Figure 12-12: (cont.) ET 200S fail-safe motor starter and PM-D F X1 with central safety PLC
U U U
This example illustrates a configuration with a central safety PLC with local safe inputs and safe outputs that shut down the motor starters safely. The link from the safe inputs to the safe outputs is implemented in the user program on the safety PLC.
The standard PLC is responsible for operational switching and motor control and is thus not burdened with lengthy calculations of fail-safe links.
See also the S7-300 Programmable Controller, Fail-Safe Signal Modules manual.
N PE
N PE

Fault Fault E A A E A Fault E A
Fail-safe modules
12-39
Terminating module
S7-300F
TM-PF30 S47-F1
Terminating cover
TM-P15 S23-A0
Figure 12-13: Distributed selective detection of safety signals Category 4 to EN 954-1 A0 A1 PM-D F PROFI safe PM-E IM 151-1 HF IM 151-1 HF
Terminating module
Category 4 to EN 954-1 A0 A5 A1
L+ U1 ext. M 2 6 3 7
Distributed selective detection of safety signals
A6
A7
Vs1 DI0 2, 4, 6, 8 1 5 3 7 DI1 DI2 DI3
L+ U2 ext. M U2 ext. M
L+
L+ U1 ext. M
Vs2 DI4 DI5 DI6 1L+ 2L+ 1M 2M 20 27 21 28 AUX1 4 8 10, 12, 14, 16 9 13 11 15 DI7 4 emergency stop circu for SG1 to SG6

1L+ 2L+ 1M 2M
TM-E30 S44-A0
Profibus-DP + PROFIsafe frame
Master
12-40
A2 F-DS1e-x = SG2 F-DS1e-x = SG6 F-RS1e-x = SG1 EM 4/8 F-DI 24 VDC A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 PLC
12.5.9
Fail-safe modules
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Fail-safe modules
Fault
A3
E A
Fault
1L1 400V AC 1L2 1L3
A2
Category
Figure 12-13: (cont.) Distributed selective detection of safety signals
This example describes the distributed selective detection of safety signals and the selective safe shutdown of motor starters. The motor starters can be arranged in any order. They are supplied by a PM-D F PROFIsafe 1) power module. The emergency stop switches/position switches/rope-operated switches are connected to a fail-safe digital input module 1) supplied by a separate PM-E power module. The example shows the circuit for category 4/SIL3. The sensors (on the fail-safe digital input module) and the actuators (power module PM-D F PROFIsafe, fail-safe motor starter) are in different ET 200S stations. You can use your user program to determine which emergency stop switch affects which safety group(s).
1
N PE
to 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1
3RK1903-3BA00 3RK1903-3AA00 6ES7138-4CB10-0AB0 6ES7193-4CD20-0AA0 6ES7138-4FA00-0AB0 6ES7193-4CK20-0AA0 3RK1301-0xB13-0AA2 3RK1903-3AC00 3RK1903-3AC10 3RK1301-0xB13-1AA2 3RK1903-3AD10
E A
Order number
M 3~
PM-D F PROFIsafe TM-PF30 S47-F1 PM-E TM-P15 S23-A0 EM 4/8 F-DI DC24V PROFIsafe TM-E30 S44-A0 F-DS1e-x x in accordance with the current rating TM-FDS65 S32 with power bus infeed TM-FDS65 S31 with power bus throughfeed F-RS1e-x x in accordance with the current rating TM-RS130 S31 with power bus throughfeed
Fault
A4
E A
M 3~ N PE
Description
M 3~ N PE
N PE 2T1 4T2 6T3 2T1 4T2 6T3 2T1 4T2 6T3
1L1 3L2 5L3
12-41
Fail-safe modules
12-42
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Order numbers
A
Subject Page A-2 A-2 A-3 A-4 A-4 A-4 A-5 A-7 A-8 A-8 A-10
Section A.1 A.1.1 A.1.2 A.1.3 A.1.4 A.1.5 A.2 A.3 A.4 A.5 A.6 Motor starters
ET 200S standard direct starters DS, DS-x and DS1-x ET 200S standard reversing starters, RS, RS-x and RS1-x ET 200S starters high feature with electronic overload protection (DS1e-x, DSS1e-x, RS1e-x) ET 200S high feature motor starter for Switch ES ET 200S fail-safe motor starters with electronic overload protection (F-DS1e-x, F-RS1e-x) Components for the ET 200S motor starters Components required for the safety integrated SIGUARD system Components for expansion modules Fail-safe components ET 200S Distributed I/O System Manuals
A-1
Order numbers
A.1
A.1.1
Motor starters
ET 200S standard direct starters DS, DS-x and DS1-x
Order number
Direct starter (DS) 1) 3RK1301-0BB00- 0AA0 3RK1301-0CB00- 0AA0 3RK1301-0DB00- 0AA0 3RK1301-0EB00- 0AA0 3RK1301-0FB00- 0AA0 3RK1301-0GB00- 0AA0 3RK1301-0HB00- 0AA0 3RK1301-0JB00- 0AA0 3RK1301-0KB00- 0AA0 3RK1301-1AB00- 0AA0 3RK1301-1BB00- 0AA0 3RK1301-1CB00- 0AA0 3RK1301-1DB00- 0AA0 3RK1301-1EB00- 0AA0 3RK1301-1FB00- 0AA0 3RK1301-1GB00- 0AA0 3RK1301-1HB00- 0AA0 3RK1301-1JB00- 0AA0 3RK1301-1KB00- 0AA0 Direct starter (DS-x) 1) 3RK1301-0BB00- 0AA1 3RK1301-0CB00- 0AA1 3RK1301-0DB00- 0AA1 3RK1301-0EB00- 0AA1 3RK1301-0FB00- 0AA1 3RK1301-0GB00- 0AA1 3RK1301-0HB00- 0AA1 3RK1301-0JB00- 0AA1 3RK1301-0KB00- 0AA1 3RK1301-1AB00- 0AA1 3RK1301-1BB00- 0AA1 3RK1301-1CB00- 0AA1 3RK1301-1DB00- 0AA1 3RK1301-1EB00- 0AA1 3RK1301-1FB00- 0AA1 3RK1301-1GB00- 0AA1 3RK1301-1HB00- 0AA1 3RK1301-1JB00- 0AA1 3RK1301-1KB00- 0AA1 Direct starter (DS1-x) 3RK1301-0BB00- 0AA2 3RK1301-0CB00- 0AA2 3RK1301-0DB00- 0AA2 3RK1301-0EB00- 0AA2 3RK1301-0FB00- 0AA2 3RK1301-0GB00- 0AA2 3RK1301-0HB00- 0AA2 3RK1301-0JB00- 0AA2 3RK1301-0KB00- 0AA2 3RK1301-1AB00- 0AA2 3RK1301-1BB00- 0AA2 3RK1301-1CB00- 0AA2 3RK1301-1DB00- 0AA2 3RK1301-1EB00- 0AA2 3RK1301-1FB00- 0AA2 3RK1301-1GB00- 0AA2 3RK1301-1HB00- 0AA2 3RK1301-1JB00- 0AA2 3RK1301-1KB00- 0AA2
Adjustment range
kW <0.06 0.06 0.09 0.10 0.12 0.18 0.21 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 0.90 1.10 1.50 1.90 2.20 3.00 4.00 5.50
1)
A 0.14 - 0.20 0.18 - 0.25 0.22 - 0.32 0.28 - 0.40 0.35 - 0.50 0.45 - 0.63 0.55 - 0.80 0.70 - 1.00 0.90 - 1.25 1.10 - 1.60 1.40 - 2.00 1.80 - 2.50 2.20 - 3.20 2.80 - 4.00 3.50 - 5.00 4.50 - 6.30 5.50 - 8.0 7.00 - 10.0 9.00 - 12.0
Discontinued types
The DS1-x standard motor starter is downward-compatible with DS and DS-x. When replacing with a module having the new order number, remove the coding elements in the terminal module (see Figure A -1). There is no need to make changes to the configuration (STEP 7 / hardware configuration) or the device master file (GSD).
A-2
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Order numbers A.1.2 ET 200S standard reversing starters, RS, RS-x and RS1-x
Order number
Reversing starter (RS) 1) Reversing starter (RS-x) 1) 3RK1301-0BB00- 1AA0 3RK1301-0CB00- 1AA0 3RK1301-0DB00- 1AA0 3RK1301-0EB00- 1AA0 3RK1301-0FB00- 1AA0 3RK1301-0GB00- 1AA0 3RK1301-0HB00- 1AA0 3RK1301-0JB00- 1AA0 3RK1301-0KB00- 1AA0 3RK1301-1AB00- 1AA0 3RK1301-1BB00- 1AA0 3RK1301-1CB00- 1AA0 3RK1301-1DB00- 1AA0 3RK1301-1EB00- 1AA0 3RK1301-1FB00- 1AA0 3RK1301-1GB00- 1AA0 3RK1301-1HB00- 1AA0 3RK1301-1JB00- 1AA0 3RK1301-1KB00- 1AA0 3RK1301-0BB00- 1AA1 3RK1301-0CB00- 1AA1 3RK1301-0DB00- 1AA1 3RK1301-0EB00- 1AA1 3RK1301-0FB00- 1AA1 3RK1301-0GB00- 1AA1 3RK1301-0HB00- 1AA1 3RK1301-0JB00- 1AA1 3RK1301-0KB00- 1AA1 3RK1301-1AB00- 1AA1 3RK1301-1BB00- 1AA1 3RK1301-1CB00- 1AA1 3RK1301-1DB00- 1AA1 3RK1301-1EB00- 1AA1 3RK1301-1FB00- 1AA1 3RK1301-1GB00- 1AA1 3RK1301-1HB00- 1AA1 3RK1301-1JB00- 1AA1 3RK1301-1KB00- 1AA1 Reversing starter (RS1-x) 3RK1301-0BB00- 1AA2 3RK1301-0CB00- 1AA2 3RK1301-0DB00- 1AA2 3RK1301-0EB00- 1AA2 3RK1301-0FB00- 1AA2 3RK1301-0GB00- 1AA2 3RK1301-0HB00- 1AA2 3RK1301-0JB00- 1AA2 3RK1301-0KB00- 1AA2 3RK1301-1AB00- 1AA2 3RK1301-1BB00- 1AA2 3RK1301-1CB00- 1AA2 3RK1301-1DB00- 1AA2 3RK1301-1EB00- 1AA2 3RK1301-1FB00- 1AA2 3RK1301-1GB00- 1AA2 3RK1301-1HB00- 1AA2 3RK1301-1JB00- 1AA2 3RK1301-1KB00- 1AA2
Adjustment range
kW <0.06 0.06 0.09 0.10 0.12 0.18 0.21 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 0.90 1.10 1.50 1.90 2.20 3.00 4.00 5.50
1)
A 0.14 - 0.20 0.18 - 0.25 0.22 - 0.32 0.28 - 0.40 0.35 - 0.50 0.45 - 0.63 0.55 - 0.80 0.70 - 1.00 0.90 - 1.25 1.10 - 1.60 1.40 - 2.00 1.80 - 2.50 2.20 - 3.20 2.80 - 4.00 3.50 - 5.00 4.50 - 6.30 5.50 - 8.0 7.00 - 10.0 9.00 - 12.0
Discontinued types
The RS1-x Standard reversing starter is downward-compatible with RS and RS-x. When replacing with a module having the new order number, remove the coding elements in the terminal module. There is no need to make changes to the configuration (STEP 7 / hardware configuration) or the device master file (GSD).
Figure A-1: Removing coding elements
A-3
Order numbers A.1.3 ET 200S starters high feature with electronic overload protection (DS1e-x, DSS1e-x, RS1e-x)
Order number
Direct starter (DS1e-x) 3RK1301-0AB10- 0AA2 3RK1301-0BB10- 0AA2 3RK1301-0CB10- 0AA2 Direct soft starter (DSS1e-x) 3RK1301-0AB20- 0AA2 3RK1301-0BB20- 0AA2 3RK1301-0CB20- 0AA2 Reversing starter (RS1e-x) 3RK1301-0AB10- 1AA2 3RK1301-0BB10- 1AA2 3RK1301-0CB10- 1AA2
Adjustment range
kW < 1.1 3 7.5 A 0.3 - 3 2.4 - 8 2.4 - 16
A.1.4
ET 200S high feature motor starter for Switch ES

The following motor starters are suitable for the Switch ES software as of V2.0
Adjustment range
kW < 1.1 3 7.5 A 0.3 - 3 2.4 - 8 2.4 - 16 Direct starter (DS1e-x) 3RK1301-0AB10- 0AA3 3RK1301-0BB10- 0AA3 3RK1301-0CB10- 0AA3
Order number
Direct soft starter (DSS1e-x) 3RK1301-0AB20- 0AA3 3RK1301-0BB20- 0AA3 3RK1301-0CB20- 0AA3 Reversing starter (RS1e-x) 3RK1301-0AB10- 1AA3 3RK1301-0BB10- 1AA3 3RK1301-0CB10- 1AA3
A.1.5
ET 200S fail-safe motor starter with electronic overload protection (F-DS1e-x, F-RS1e-x)
Suitable for the Switch ES software
Adjustment range
kW A
Order number
Fail-safe direct starter (F-DS1e-x) 3RK1301-0AB13- 0AA2 3RK1301-0BB13- 0AA2 3RK1301-0CB13- 0AA2 Fail-safe reversing starter (F-RS1e-x) 3RK1301-0AB13- 1AA2 3RK1301-0BB13- 1AA2 3RK1301-0CB13- 1AA2
< 1.1 3 7.5
0.3 - 3 2.4 - 8 2.4 - 16
A-4
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Order numbers
A.2
Components for the ET 200S motor starters

Description Model
for direct and reversing starters
Order number
3RK1903-0BA00
Power module Terminal modules
PM-D
TM-P15 S27-01
for the PM-D power module with terminating cover for DS, DS-x, DS1-x, with power bus infeed, with caps for DS, DS-x, DS1-x, with power bus throughfeed for RS, RS-x, RS1-x, with power bus infeed, with caps for RS, RS-x, RS1-x, with power bus throughfeed for DS1e-x and DSS1e-x, with power bus infeed, with caps for DS1e-x and DSS1e-x, with power bus throughfeed for RS1e-x, with power bus infeed, with caps for RS1e-x, with power bus throughfeed for F-DS1e-x, with power bus infeed, with caps for F-DS1e-x, with power bus throughfeed for F-RS1e-x, with power bus infeed, with caps for F-RS1e-x, with power bus throughfeed
3RK1903-0AA00
TM-DS45-S32 TM-DS45-S31 TM-RS90-S32 TM-RS90-S31 TM-DS65-S32 -01 FS L TM-DS65-S31 -01 S TM-RS130-S32 -01 FS L TM-RS130-S31 -01 S TM-FDS65-S32 -01 FS L TM-FDS65-S31 -01 S TM-FRS130-S32 -01 FS L TM-FRS130-S31 -01 S
3RK1903-0AB00 3RK1903-0AB10 3RK1903-0AC00 3RK1903-0AC10 3RK1903-0AK00 3RK1903-0AK10 3RK1903-0AL00 3RK1903-0AL10 3RK1903-3AC00 3RK1903-3AC10 3RK1903-3AD00 3RK1903-3AD10
A-5
Order numbers
Description Spacing mod. Accessories
DM-V15 Terminal block L1/L2/L3 L1/L2/L3 terminal block PE/N terminal block PE/N terminal block PE/N terminal block PE/N terminal block PE/N terminal block M65-PEN-F PE/N terminal block M65-PEN-S 3-phase feed-in terminal for S0
Model
for installing dir. starters with derating 30 mm, jumper module 15 mm, jumper module 45 mm, infeed module, with caps 45 mm, infeed and jumper module 30 mm, jumper module 15 mm, jumper module 65 mm, infeed module, with caps 65 mm, infeed and jumper module if necessary for power bus infeed for wiring: single- or multi-core: 2.5 to 25 mm2 finely stranded with wire end ferrule: 2.5 to 25 mm2 single- or multi-core: AWG 12 to 4 manual actuation for contactors (only for DS, DS-x, DS1-x, RS, RS-x, RS1-x) (5 of) for direct drive of the contactor coils of ET 200S devices (only for DS, DS-x, DS1-x, RS, RS-x, RS1-x)
Order number
3RK1903-0CD00 3RK1903-0AF00 3RK1903-0AE00 3RK1903-2AA00 3RK1903-2AA10 3RK1903-0AJ00 3RK1903-0AH00 3RK1903-2AC00 3RK1903-2AC10 3RV1925-5AB
Control kit
3RK1903-0CA00
Control unit
3RK1903-0CG00
A-6
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Order numbers
Description Accessories
2DI control module
Model
2DI digital input module for full local operation (only for DS1e-x, DSS1e-x, RS1e-x, F-DS1e-x, F-RS1e-x) 2DI COM digital input module for local operation with PC interface (only for DS1e-x, DSS1e-x, RS1e-x, F-DS1e-x, F-RS1e-x) 2DI LC COM digital input module for local operation with PC interface manual operation local (only for DS1e-x, DSS1e-x, RS1e-x, F-DS1e-x, F-RS1e-x) to connect the PC to the 2DI COM/2DI LC COM control module software for diagnostics and commissioning for motor starters (version 2.0 and above)
Order number
3RK1903-0CH00
3RK1903-0CH10
2DI LC COM control module
3RK1903-0CH20
LOGO! PC cable Diagnostic and commissioning tool Switch ES Motor Starter
6ED1057-1AA00-0BA0 3ZS1310-0CC20-0YA0
A-7
Order numbers
A.3
Components for the safety integrated SIGUARD system

Description Model
fail-safe, up to safety category 4, EN 954-1 for EMERGENCY STOP fail-safe, up to safety category 4, EN 954-1 for autostart for protective door monitoring; fail-safe, up to safety category 3, EN 954-1 for expansion delay 0.5 ... 30 s fail-safe, up to safety category 4, EN 954-1 for expansion contact replicator, up to safety category 4, (EN 954-1) connection unit for infeed contactor, fail-safe, up to safety category 4 (EN 954-1) for potential group, infeed U1, U2, sensor connection with terminating cover for potential subgroup, sensor connection for potential group, infeed U1, U2 with terminating cover for potential subgroup, infeed U2 for contact replicator for PM-X connection module connection unit for infeed contactor, categories 3 and 4 (EN 954-1) for direct starters DS, DS-x, DS1-x, up to category 4, (EN 954-1) 1 auxiliary switch block 1 contact holder with connecting lead for direct starter 1 contact support for terminal module (feedback loop) 1 contact support for terminal module (infeed contactor) for reversing starters RS, RS-x, RS1-x, up to category 4, (EN 954-1) 2 auxiliary switch blocks 1 contact holder with connecting lead for reversing starter 1 light gray contact support for terminal module (feedback loop) 1 dark gray contact support for terminal module (feedback loop) 2 contact supports for terminal module (infeed contactor) 1 connecting lead
Order number
3RK1903-1BA00
Power modules
PM-D F1
PM-D F2
3RK1903-1BB00
PM-D F3
3RK1903-1BD00
PM-D F4 PM-D F5
3RK1903-1BC00 3RK1903-1BE00 3RK1903-1CB00
Connection module Terminal modules
PM-X
TM-PF30 S47-B1 for PM-D F1,2 TM-PF30 S47-B0 for PM-D F1,2 TM-PF30 S47-C1 for PM-D F3,4 TM-PF30 S47-C0 for PM-D F3,4 TM-PF30 S47-D0 for PM-D F5 TM-X15 S27-01
3RK1903-1AA00
3RK1903-1AA10 3RK1903-1AC00
3RK1903-1AC10 3RK1903-1AD10 3RK1903-1AB00
Fail-safe kit
Fail-safe kit 1
3RK1903-1CA00
Fail-safe kit 2
3RK1903-1CA01
A-8
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Order numbers
A.4
Components for expansion modules

Description Model
for brake 24 VDC/4 A with 2 extra inputs for brake 500 VDC/0.7 A with 2 extra inputs for brake control modules xB1, xB2
Order number
3RK1903-0CB00 3RK1903-0CE00 3RK1903-0CC00 3RK1903-0CF00 3RK1903-0AG00
xB1 xB3 xB2 xB4
Terminal modules
TM-xB15 S24-01
TM-xB215 S24-01
for brake control modules xB3, xB4
3RK1903-0AG01
A.5
Fail-safe components
Description Model
With overvoltage protection With diagnostics (for a description see the ET 200S Distributed I/O System, Fail-Safe Modules manual) With overvoltage protection for the infeed of external emergency stop signals With 4 safe, floating contacts
Order number
3RK1903-3BA00
Power module
PM-D F PROFIsafe
Power/expansion module Contact replicator Terminal modules
PM-D F X1
3RK1903-3DA00
F-CM
3RK1903-3CA00
TM-PF30 S47-F1 for PM-D F PROFIsafe
For potential group, with infeed U1, SG1 to SG6, with terminating cover (for a description see ET 200S Distributed I/O System, Fail-Safe Modules) For potential group, without infeed from the left for U1, SG1 to SG6 with terminating cover For potential group, with infeed from the left U1, SG1 to SG6, With throughfeed U1, SG1 to SG6,
3RK1903-3AA00
TM-PFX30 S47-G1 for PM-D F X1
3RK1903-3AE00
TM-PFX30 S47-G0 for PM-D F X1 TM-FCM30 S47-E0 for F-CM
3RK1903-3AE10
3RK1903-3AB10
A-9
Order numbers
A.6
ET 200S Distributed I/O System Manuals

The following documentation packets and manuals can be ordered for the ET 200S Distributed I/O System: Description Order number
6ES7 151-1AA10-8xA0 1)
ET 200S documentation packet, consisiting of ET 200S Distributed I/O System Manual ET 200S Distributed I/O System Motor Starter Manual PROFINET system description Programming manual, From PROFINET DP to PROFINET IO
ET 200S Interface Module IM 151-7 CPU Manual and Operations List ET 200S Process-Related Functions Manual ET 200S Positioning Manual ET 200S Serial Interface Module Manual Manual ET 200S Decentralized Peripheral System Failsafe Modules Documentation package ET 200S FC frequency converter consisting of ET 200S FC frequency converter operating manual ET 200S FC frequency converter list manual (in preparation) Documentation package ET 200S FC frequency converter consisting of ET 200S decentralized peripheral system manual ET 200S FC frequency converter operating manual ET 200S FC frequency converter list manual (in preparation)
1)
6ES7 151-1AB00-8xA0 1) 6ES7 151-1AC00-8xA0 1) 6ES7 151-1AD00-8xA0 1) 6ES7 151-1AE00-8xA0 1) is only available on the Internet 6SL3298-0CA12-0xP0 1)
6SL3298-0CA12-1xP0 1)
x = The documentation packets and manuals can be ordered in the following languages: A = German B = English The languages French, Spanish and Italian are also available through the Internet.
A summary of the individual manuals can be found at the beginning of this manual in Important Information.
A-10
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Dimensional drawings
B
Subject Page B-2 B-2 B-3
Section B.1 B.1.1 B.1.2 Motor starters
DS, DS-x, DS1-x standard direct starters and TM-DS45 terminal module High feature DS1e-x direct starter, High feature DSS1e-x direct soft starter and TM-DS65 terminal module Fail-safe F-DS1e-x direct starter and TM-FDS65 terminal module RS, RS-x, RS1-x standard reversing starters and TM-RS90 terminal module RS1e-x high feature reversing starter and TM-RS130 terminal module F-RS1e-x fail-safe reversing starter and TM-FRS130 terminal module Power modules, connection module PM-D power module and TM-P15 S27-01 terminal module PM-D F1 to 5 power modules and TM-PF30 S47-B0/-B1/-C0/-C1/-D0 terminal modules PM-D F PROFIsafe power module and TM-PF30 S47-F1 terminal module PM-D F X1 power/expansion module and TM-PFX30 S47-G0/-G1 terminal modules F-CM contact replicator and TM-FCM30 S47-E0 terminal module PM-X connection module and TM-X15 S27-01 terminal module DM-V15 spacing module Expansion modules xB1 to 4 brake control modules TM-xB15 S24-01, TM-xB215 S24-01 terminal modules
B.1.3 B.1.4
B-4 B-5
B.2 B.2.1 B.2.2
B-6 B-6 B-7
B.2.3 B.3 B.4 B.4.1
B-8 B-8 B-9 B-9
B-1
B.1
B.1.1
Motor starters
DS, DS-x, DS1-x standard direct starters and TM-DS45 terminal module
Space for heat removal
DS, DS-x, DS1-x
DS, DS-x, DS1-x

Rail 35 x 7.5/15 mm
Rail 35 x 7.5/15 mm
TM-DS45
Connection zone
B-2
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Dimensional drawings B.1.2 High feature DS1e-x direct starter, High feature DSS1e-x direct soft starter and TM-DS65 terminal module Fail-safe F-DS1e-x direct starter and TM-FDS65 terminal module
DS1e-x, DSS1e-x, F-DS1e-x
DS1e-x, DSS1e-x, F-DS1e-x
Rail 35 x 7.5/15 mm
Rail 35 x 7.5/15 mm LOGO! PC cable
Control module 2DI/-2DI COM/ -2DI LC COM
TM-DS65 TM-FDS65
Connection zone
B-3
Dimensional drawings B.1.3 RS, RS-x, RS1-x standard reversing starters and TM-RS90 terminal module
RS, RS-x, RS1-x
RS, RS-x, RS1-x
Rail 35 x 7.5/15 mm
Rail 35 x 7.5/15 mm
TM-RS90
B-4
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Dimensional drawings B.1.4 RS1e-x high feature reversing starter and TM-RS130 terminal module F-RS1e-x fail-safe reversing starter and TM-FRS130 terminal module
RS1e-x F-RS1e-x
RS1e-x F-RS1e-x
Rail 35 x 7.5/15 mm
Rail LOGO! PC cable 35 x 7.5/15 mm
Control module 2DI/-2DI COM/ -2DI LC COM
TM-RS130 TM-FRS130
Connection zone
B-5
B.2
B.2.1
Power modules, connection module

PM-D power module and TM-P15 S27-01 terminal module
PM-D
Rail 35 x 7.5/15 mm
TM-P15 S27-01
Rail 35 x 7.5/15 mm
B-6
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Dimensional drawings B.2.2 PM-D F1 to 5 power modules and terminal modules TM-PF30 S47-B0/-B1/-C0/-C1/-D0 PM-D F PROFIsafe power module and TM-PF30 S47-F1 terminal module PM-D F X1 power/expansion module and TM-PFX30 S47-G0/-G1 terminal modules F-CM contact replicator and TM-FCM30 S47-E0 terminal module
PM-D F1 to 5 PM-D F PROFIsafe PM-D F X1 F-CM
Rail 35 x 7.5/15 mm
TM-PF30 S47 TM-PFX30 TM-FCM30

Rail 35 x 7.5/15 mm
B-7
Dimensional drawings B.2.3 PM-X connection module and TM-X15 S27-01 terminal module
PM-X
SF
PM-X
Rail 35 x 7.5/15 mm
TM-X15 S27-01
Rail 35 x 7.5/15 mm
B.3
DM-V15 spacing module
Rail 35 x 7.5/15 mm
Rail 35 x 7.5/15 mm
B-8
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
B.4
B.4.1
Expansion modules
xB1 to 4 brake control modules and TM-xB15 S24-01, TM-xB215 S24-01 terminal modules
xB1 DC24V/4A
Rail 35 x 7.5/15 mm
X 2 3 4
Stat
3RK19030CB00
Rail 35 x 7.5/15 mm
B-9
B-10
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Applications
C
Subject Page C-2 C-2 C-4 C-6 C-8
Section C.1 C.1.1 C.1.2 C.1.3 C.1.4
Examples with brake control modules Example with 2 directions of rotation and limit-switch operation without brake Example with 2 directions of rotation, 2 speeds and 24 V brake with external power supply Example with 2 directions of rotation, 2 speeds and 400 V brake with internal power supply Example with frequency converter and 400 V brake with internal power supply and delayed EMERGENCY STOP shutdown, category 3 Example of lifting platform - up with motor, down with valve Example of lifting platform - up and down with brake motor Examples with reversible motors
C.1.5 C.1.6 C.2
C-10 C-12 C-14 C-14 C-16
C.2.1 Example with 2 directions of rotation and 2 speeds with one Dahlander winding C.2.2 Example with 2 directions of rotation and 3 speeds with two Dahlander windings
C-1
Applications
Safety note The following applications are only some examples of typical circuits. No liability is accepted for the reliability, certification or compatibility of the examples. Use at your own risk.
Caution Derating (see Section 3.4) is not taken into account in these examples.
C.1
C.1.1
Examples with brake control modules

Example with 2 directions of rotation and limit-switch operation without brake
Terminating cover 21 Limit switch ccw rotation 22 21 Limit switch cw rotation 22 IN1 1 L+ 5 L+ IN2 4 A1+ 4 11 U2 2 AUX2
A3
A2
RS1-x
A1
A3
Profibus-DP
IM 151
A1
6 13 7 14
AUX3
PLC
U1 M
L+
Figure C-1: Example with 2 directions of rotation and limit-switch operation without brake
C-2
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
A2-
5 12
1 8 2 9
Brake
TM-P15 S27-01
TM-xB215 S24-01
Master
Terminating module xB3, 4 PM-D

Number 1 1 1 3RK1301-xxB00-1AA2 RS1-x 3RK1903-0BA00 3RK1903-0AA00 PM-D TM-P15 S27-01 Order number Description
1L1 400V AC 1L2 1L3
2T1 4T2 6T3
N PE M 3~
Figure C-1: (cont.) Example with 2 directions of rotation and limit-switch operation without brake
xx in accordance with the current rating TM-RS90 S32 with power bus infeed TM-xB215 S24-01terminal module for xB3, 4 brake control xB3 1) xB4 1) brake control Limit switch for brake control module
N PE
4 8

1 3RK1903-0AC00 1 3RK1903-0AG01 1 3RK1903-0CE00 1 3RK1903-0CF00 2 XXX 1) either xB3 or xB4
A2
1L1 3L2 5L3
A3
E Fault E A A E
Applications
C-3
Applications C.1.2 Example with 2 directions of rotation, 2 speeds and 24 V brake with external power supply
21 Limit switch ccw rotation 22
21 Limit switch cw rotation 22
RS1-x
IN1
1 L+
5 L+
IN2
A4
A3
RS1-x
A5
1 IN1+
5 IN2+
IN2-
IN1-
+ 24 VDC
A2
A3
AUX2
A1
Profibus-DP
IM 151
A1
6 13 7 14
AUX3
A1+
U1 M
L+
Figure C-2: Example with 2 directions of rotation, 2 speeds and 24 V brake with external power supply
PLC
C-4
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
A2-
U2
5 12
4 11
1 8 2 9
24 V brake
A5
TM-P15 S27-01
Terminating cover
TM-xB215 S24-01 TM-xB215 S24-01
Master
Terminating module xB3 xB3 PM-D

Description
Number
Order number
1L1 400V AC 1L2 1L3
1 1 2
4 8
2T1 4T2 6T3
2T1 4T2 6T3
4 8
N PE
N PE

1L1 3L2 5L3
1 1 2 2 1 2
3RK1903-0BA00 PM-D 3RK1903-0AA00 TM-P15 S27-01 3RK1301-xxB00-1AA2 RS1-x xx in accordance with the current rating 3RK1903-0AC00 TM-RS90 S32 with power bus infeed 3RK1903-0AC10 TM-RS90 S31 with power bus throughfeed 3RK1903-0AG01 TM-xB215 S24-01terminal module for xB3 3RK1903-0CE00 xB3 brake control 3RK1903-0AE00 15 mm jumper module L1,2,3 XXX Limit switch for brake control module
A4
A3
E Fault E A A E E A Fault A E E
A5
N PE
+ 1W 1V 1U 2U 2V 2W M 3~
to A5
Figure C-2: (cont.) Example with 2 directions of rotation, 2 speeds and 24 V brake with external power supply
Applications
C-5
Applications C.1.3 Example with 2 directions of rotation, 2 speeds and 400 V brake with internal power supply
A5
21 Limit switch ccw rotation 22
21 Limit switch cw rotation 22
A4
IN1
1 L+
5 L+
IN2
4 IN2 4 A1+ 4 11 U2
A3
A5
A2
1 L+
IN1
5 L+
AUX2
A3
Profibus-DP
IM 151
A1
6 13 7 14
AUX3
A1
U1 M
L+
Figure C-3: Example with 2 directions of rotation, 2 speeds and 400 V brake with internal power supply
PLC
C-6
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
A2-
5 12
1 8 2 9
400 V brake
TM-P15 S27-01
Master
PM-D
RS1-x
400 V brake
RS1-x
Terminating cover
TM-xB215 S24-01 TM-xB215 S24-01
Terminating module xB4 xB4

Description
Number
Order number
1L1 400V AC 1L2 1L3
1 1
3RK1903-0BA00 3RK1903-0AA00
PM-D TM-P15 S27-01
3RK1301-xxB00-1AA2 RS1-x
4 8
2T1 4T2 6T3
2T1 4T2 6T3
N PE
N PE
1W 1V 1U
M 3~
2U 2V 2W
Figure C-3: (cont.) Example with 2 directions of rotation, 2 speeds and 400 V brake with internal power supply A2
1L1 3L2 5L3
N PE
4 8
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-09 A4 A3

E Fault E A A E E A Fault A E E
1 1 2 2 2 2
3RK1903-0AC00 3RK1903-0AC10 3RK1903-0AG01 3RK1903-0CF00 3RK1903-0AE00 XXX
xx in accordance with the current rating TM-RS90 S32 with power bus infeed TM-RS90 S31 with power bus throughfeed TM-xB215 S24-01terminal module for xB4 xB4 brake control 15 mm jumper module L1,2,3 Limit switch for brake control module
A5
Applications
C-7
Applications C.1.4 Example with frequency converter and 400 V brake with internal power supply and delayed EMERGENCY STOP shutdown, category 3
A5 K2
Contactor Brake Frequency converter
21 K1 22 21 K2 22
Q1
K1
AUX2 A1
K1 U2 7
Infeed contactor
1 RF 1
Power switch
OUT+
A4
A4
DS1-x
F kit 1
A3
A2
6 13 7 14
OUT-
6 13 4 11 A1+ 4 11
PM-D F3
A2
Profibus-DP
A1
6 13 7 14 22
U1 M
L+
Figure C-4: Example with frequency converter and 400 V brake with internal power supply and delayed EMERGENCY STOP shutdown, category 3
PLC
C-8
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
A2-
5 12
1 8 2 9
ON 23 14 24 17 27 EMERGENCY STOP A1+ 11 21 25 U2 26 A212 22 28
PM-D F1
A1
OUT+
Master
IM 151
OUT-
5 12
A2 AUX3
RF 2
TM-X15 S27-01 TM-PF30 S47-C0 TM-PF30 S47-B1
Terminating cover
Terminating module PM-X

Category 1 11) 1 2 3/4 Order number Description
1L1 400V AC 1L2 1L3
Q1
21
K1
1L1 3L2 5L3 22
2T1 4T2 6T3 N PE N PE A1

E Fault E A F kit 1
3RK1903-0BA00 3RK1903-0AA00 3RK1903-1BA00 3RK1903-1AA00 3RK1903-1BD00 3RK1903-1AC10 3RK1903-1CB00 3RK1903-1AB00 3RT1035-1BB40 3RH1921-1DA11 3RA1931-1BA00 3RV1031-4HA10 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA2 3RK1903-0AB00 3RK1903-1CA00 3RT1xxx-xxxxx PM-D TM-P15 S27-01 1 1 PM-D F1 1 1 TM-PF30 S47-B1 1 1 PM-D F3 1 1 TM-PF30 S47-C0 1 1 PM-X 1 1 TM-X15 S27-01 1 Infeed contactor for maximum configuration 40 A 1 Auxiliary switch for infeed contactor 1 Connection module DC 1 Circuit breaker, protection for maximum configuration 40A 1 1 1 DS1-x xx in accordance with the current rating 1 1 1 TM-DS45 S32 with power bus infeed 1 1 F kit 1 1 1 1 Motor contactorxx in accordance with the rating 1 1 Auxiliary switch for motor contactor (if necessary) 1) Emergency stop looped into the supply lead for supply voltage U2 (A1+, A2-)
A5
Frequency converter
21
K2
A2 22
M 3~
Figure C-4: (cont.) Example with frequency converter and 400 V brake with internal power supply and delayed EMERGENCY STOP shutdown, category 3
Applications
C-9
Applications C.1.5 Example of lifting platform - up with motor, down with valve
A1
PM-D
A2 DS1-x
A3
Terminating module xB3
Lifting platform configuration

xB3 input 1 Limit switch, top xB3 input 2 Limit switch, bottom
PLC
Master
IM 151
Profibus-DP
TM-P15 S27-01 TM-xB215 S24-01
Terminating cover
Hydraulic diagram
Y1
M 3~
1L1 400 VAC 1L2 1L3
A2
1L1 3L2 5L3
A3
E Fault E A E 2T1 4T2 6T3 4 8 L+ U1 M 1 8 2 9
A1
6 13 7 14
AUX2 AUX3
A3
1 L+ 2 IN1 5 L+ 6 IN2 21 Limit switch Top 22 21 Limit switch Bottom 22
A1+ N PE M 3~ E = integrated input for programming A = integrated output for programming = line for external wiring N PE U2 A2-
4 11 5 12
4 8 Y1

Number 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 Order number 3RK1903-0BA00 3RK1903-0AA00 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA2 3RK1903-0AB00 3RK1903-0AG01 3RK1903-0CE00 XXX XXX Description PM-D TM-P15 S27-01 DS1-x xx in accordance with the current rating TM-DS45 S32 with power bus infeed TM-xB215 S24-01terminal module for xB3 xB3 brake control Limit switch for brake control module Valve (Y1)
Figure C-5: Example of lifting platform - up with motor, down with valve
C-10
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Applications
DS1-x: Control (process image outputs) - PLC action 1 DO 0.0 (pump motor ON) 3 DO 0.2 (valve open) DS1-x: Check (process image inputs) - PLC evaluation DI 0.1 (contactor ON) xB3, xB4 Limit switch, top Limit switch, bottom xB3, xB4: Check (process image inputs) - PLC evaluation DI 0.0 (limit switch, top) DI 0.1 (limit sw., bottom) xB3, xB4: Diagnoses LED, switching output LED, limit switch, top LED, limit switch, bottom 4 2 6
Lifting platform at bottom
8 4 7
5 Lifting platform at top

Figure C-5: (cont.) Example of lifting platform - up with motor, down with valve
1 2
Pump motor is switched on (DO 0.0) by the application program in the PLC. PLC's switch-on command is drive signal for the contactor. Limit position is passed, so the limit switch for lifting table at top opens. When the limit switch opens the direct (no PLC intervention) result is discontinuation of the contactor drive signal. The PLC's drive signal for the contactor is rendered ineffective (overridden by limit switch). The motor contactor is switched off. The application program in the PLC cancels the switch-on command (DO 0.0). The valve for lowering the lifting platform is opened (DO 0.2) by the application program in the PLC. The limit switch for lifting platform at top position recloses. The limit switch for lifting platform at bottom opens. The switching output for the valve is disabled. The application program in the PLC cancels the switch-on command for DO 0.2. See step 1 Each upward or downward action of the platform can take place individually within the limits of travel.
3 4 5 6 7 8
C-11
Applications C.1.6 Example of lifting platform - up and down with brake motor
A1 A2 A3
PM-D PM-E 2DI
A4 RS1-x
A5
Terminating module Terminating cover xB4
PLC
Master
IM 151
Profibus-DP
TM-P15 S27-01 TM-xB215 S24-01 Description
Lifting platform configuration

xB3 input 1 Limit switch, top 2DI input 1 BERO limit switch, top 2DI input 2 BERO limit switch, bottom xB3 input 2 Limit switch, bottom
Brake motor
Number 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 Order number 6ES7138-4CA00-0AA0 6ES7193-4CE00-0AA0 6ES7131-4BB00-0AA0 6ES7193-4CB00-0AA0 3RK1903-0BA00 3RK1903-0AA00 3RK1301-xxB00-1AA2 3RK1903-0AC00 3RK1903-0AG01 3RK1903-0CF00 XXX XXX
PM-E DC24V TM-P15S22-01 2DI DC24V TM-E15S23-01 PM-D TM-P15 S27-01 RS1-x xx in accordance with the current rating TM-RS90 S32 with power bus infeed TM-xB215 S24-01terminal module for xB4 xB4 brake control Limit switch for brake control module BERO
Figure C-6: Example of lifting platform - up and down with brake motor
C-12
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Applications
1L1 400V AC 1L2 1L3 1L1 3L2 5L3
A4
A5
E Fault E A A E 2T1 4T2 6T3 4 8 N PE M 3~
N PE
24 VDC M
2 A1 6 3 7
A2 1 DI0
2 24 VDC 3 M
Top I
L+ U1 M
1 8 2 9
A3
6 13 7 14
AUX2 AUX3
A5
1 L+ 2 IN1 5 L+ 21 Limit switch Top 22 21 Limit switch Bottom 22
1 DI1 2 24 VDC 3 M
Bottom I A1+ U2 A25 12 4 11
6 IN2 4 8
400 V brake
Figure C-6: (cont.) Example of lifting platform - up and down with brake motor
At each limit position, the lifting platform is controlled by a BERO limit switch. If a limit switch fails, the positioning switch acts directly on the RS1-x reversing starter through the xB4 brake control module. The starter is shut down immediately and the brake is actuated. This rapid shutdown bypasses the user program in the PLC. With the positioning switch actuated, the PLC can start the starter only in the opposite direction. The process image of the inputs at the brake control module is also made available to the PLC. This means that the PLC can react accordingly to the situation.
C-13
PM-X
PLC
Profibus-DP
Master
Terminating module
TM-PF30 S47-B1
TM-X15 S27-01
Terminating cover
C-14
A1 A3 RS1-x RS1-x DS1-x PM-D F1 Q1
Power switch
C.2
C.2.1
Applications
A2 A4 A5
IM 151
K1
Infeed contactor

Category 2 3/4 Order number Description
L+ U1 M
A1
OUT+ OUT13
A5
1 RF 121 2 RF 2 22 K1 6 13 7 14 22
Examples with reversible motors
1 11) 1
1 8 2 9
Example with 2 directions of rotation and 2 speeds with one Dahlander winding
A1+ U2 A2-
4 11 5 12
ON 23 14 24 17 27 EM. STOP 11 21 25 26 28 12 22
6 7
Figure C-7: Example with 2 directions of rotation and 2 speeds with one Dahlander winding
PM-D TM-P15 S27-01 1 1 PM-D F1 1 1 TM-PF30 S47-B1 1 1 PM-X 1 1 TM-X15 S27-01 1 Infeed contactor for maximum configuration 40 A 1 Auxiliary switch for infeed contactor 1 Connection module DC 1 Circuit breaker, protection for max. config. 40A 1 1 1 DS1-x xx in accordance with the current rating 1 1 1 3RK1903-0AB00 TM-DS45 S32 with power bus infeed 1 1 3RK1903-1CA00 F kit 1 2 2 2 3RK1301-xxB00-1AA2 RS1-x xx in accordance with the current rating 1 1 1 3RK1903-0AB00 TM-RS90 S32 with power bus infeed 1 1 1 3RK1903-0AC10 TM-RS90 S31 with power bus throughfeed 2 2 3RK1903-1CA01 F kit 2 1 ) Emergency stop looped into the supply lead for supply voltage U2 (A1+, A2-) 3RK1903-0BA00 3RK1903-0AA00 3RK1903-1BA00 3RK1903-1AA00 3RK1903-1CB00 3RK1903-1AB00 3RT1035-1BB40 3RH1921-1DA11 3RA1931-1BA00 3RV1031-4HA10 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA2
AUX2 A1 K1 A2 AUX3
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Applications
F kit 1
M 3~
Fault
A3
2W 2V 2U
E A
F kit 2
L1 1U
2U
21
22
2W
Q1
1L1 400V AC 1L2 1L3
K1
Fault
A2
E A
Figure C-7: (cont.) Example with 2 directions of rotation and 2 speeds with one Dahlander winding
Warning You must ensure that there is an appropriate, software-specific interlocking with a sufficiently apportioned time delay between module A3 and A4.
N PE
1V L2
2V
1W L3
Fault
A4
F kit 2
E A
2U
1U 1W 2V L2 1V
1U 1V 1W
L1
2W L3 N PE
N PE N PE 2T1 4T2 6T3 2T1 4T2 6T3 2T1 4T2 6T3
1L1 3L2 5L3
C-15
PM-X
PLC
Profibus-DP
Master
F kit 2 F kit 2 F kit 2 F kit 1
Terminating module
TM-PF30 S47-B1
TM-X15 S27-01
Terminating cover
C-16
A1 A4 RS1-x RS1-x DS1-x PM-D F1 Q1
Power switch
C.2.2
A2 A3 RS1-x A5 A6
Applications
IM 151
K1
Infeed contactor

Category
2 3/4
1 11) 1
L+ U1 M
A1
1 8 2 9
OUT+ OUT13
A6
1 RF 121 2 RF 2 22 K1 6 13 7 14 22
Figure C-8: Example with 2 directions of rotation and 3 speeds with 2 Dahlander windings
A1+ U2 A27 12 22 5 12 26 28 4 11 ON 23 14 24 17 27 EM. STOP 11 21 25 6 AUX2 A1 K1 A2 AUX3
Example with 2 directions of rotation and 3 speeds with two Dahlander windings
3RK1903-0BA00 PM-D 3RK1903-0AA00 TM-P15 S27-01 1 1 3RK1903-1BA00 PM-D F1 1 1 3RK1903-1AA00 TM-PF30 S47-B1 1 1 3RK1903-1CB00 PM-X 1 1 3RK1903-1AB00 TM-X15 S27-01 1 3RT1035-1BB40 Infeed contactor for maximum configuration 40 A 1 3RH1921-1DA11 Auxiliary switch for infeed contactor 1 3RA1931-1BA00 Connection module DC 1 3RV1031-4HA10 Circuit breaker, protection for maximum configuration 40A 1 1 1 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA2 DS1-x xx in accordance with the current rating 1 1 1 3RK1903-0AB00 TM-DS45 S32 with power bus infeed 1 1 3RK1903-1CA00 F kit 1 3 3 3 3RK1301-xxB00-1AA2 RS1-x xx in accordance with the current rating 1 1 1 3RK1903-0AB00 TM-RS90 S32 with power bus infeed 2 2 2 3RK1903-0AC10 TM-RS90 S31 with power bus throughfeed 3 3 3RK1903-1CA01 F kit 2 1 ) Emergency stop looped into the supply lead for supply voltage U2 (A1+, A2-)
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Applications
F kit 1
Fault
A4
E A
F kit 2
2U 2V 2W
L1 2U
M 3~
3U
1W 1V 1U
3W
Fault
A3
F kit 2
E A
L1 1U
Q1
1L1 400V AC 1L2 1L3
K1
Fault
A2
E A
Figure C-8: (cont.) Example with 2 directions of rotation and 3 speeds with 2 Dahlander windings
Warning You must ensure that there is an appropriate, software-specific interlocking with a sufficiently apportioned time delay between module A4 and A5.
N PE
1V L2
21
2T1 4T2 6T3
1L1 3L2 5L3
22
1W L3 N PE
2V L2
3V
2W L3
3V L2 3U 3V 3W N PE 2T1 4T2 6T3
Fault
A5
F kit 2
E A
3U
2U 2W 2V
L1
3W L3
N PE N PE 2T1 4T2 6T3 2T1 4T2 6T3
C-17
Applications
C-18
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Glossary
2-channel (contactor control)

A two-channel contactor drive circuit is accessible when at least two release circuits are available and the primary current is disconnected redundantly.
2-channel (sensor)
The emergency stop switch is polled by means of two contacts, and the results are sent separately to the evaluating device.
AUX1
Freely usable potential line carried through all modules. Only the PM-E modules have connecting terminals.
AUX2
Supply for infeed contactor, connect to A1+.
AUX3
Supply for infeed contactor, connect to A2-.
CON
See U2.
Glossary-1
Cross-circuit-proof
In the event of a short circuit between the cables of the emergency stop switch, all the safety-related components of the ET 200S are switched off. EMERGENCY STOP switch
The operating status of the ET 200S cannot be restored until the problem has been rectified.
Direct starter
A direct starter is a > motor starter for a single direction of rotation that switches a motor on or off directly. It consists of a circuit breaker and a contactor.
Enabling circuit
A positively driven output with redundant, monitored normally open contacts that drives other switchgear such as motor starters or infeed contactors.
F systems
See fail-safe systems.
Fail-safe modules
ET 200S modules that can be used for safety-related operation in the ET 200S distributed I/O system. These modules have integrated safety functions.
Fail-safe motor starters

Fail-safe motor starters have the following features: Device designations: F-DS1e-x, F-RS1e-x Usable up to 7.5 kW Installation widths: 65 mm for F-DS1e-x 130 mm for RS1e-x
Fail-safe systems
Fail-safe systems (F systems) are characterized by the fact that they remain in a safe state or transfer directly into another safe state when certain failures occur.
Glossary-2
PM-D F1
Feedback loop
Operation of the contactor can be monitored by monitoring the slave auxiliary contacts (normally closed contacts) of the motor starter from the PM-D F1 to 5 power module. If a contactor is welded, the EMERGENCY STOP segment can no longer be started.
High feature motor starter

High feature motor starters have the following features: Device designations: DS1e-x, DSS1e-x, RS1e-x Usable up to 7.5 kW Installation widths: 65 mm for DS1e-x and DSS1e-x 130 mm for RS1e-x
Load group
A group of motor starters supplied by a single power bus infeed. A load group can be within a potential group or comprise parts of two potential groups.
Monitored start
At start-up, the emergency stop switch must always be closed first and the supply voltage switched on. Only then can the on switch be pressed. If the ON switch is bridged, the PM-D F1 evaluation device detects an error, which is indicated by a channel LED.
MS (motor starter)
Motor starter is the generic term for direct and reversing starters. With motor starters the start-up and direction of rotation of a motor is determined.
OUT+/A positively driven output that drives other safety devices such as expansion units (PM-D F4) or a time-delayed safety combination (PM-D F3).
PELV
Protective Extra-Low Voltage. A DIN VDE 0100 T410 protective measure against accidental contact.
Potential group
A group of motor starters and/or electronic modules that are supplied by a single power module.
Potential subgroup
A potential subgroup exists if the auxiliary voltage U2 can be partially switched off within a potential group.
Glossary-3
PWR
See U1.
Redundancy
All the components required for a function are duplicated. In order to achieve complete redundancy for ET 200S in the enabling circuits, two normally open contacts are connected in series in the PM-D F1 to 5 power module. If there is a failure of a normally open contact - if it is welded, for example - safe switching off is guaranteed.
Reversing starters
A reversing starter is a > motor starter for two directions of rotation of a motor. It consists of a circuit breaker and two contactors.
SELV
Safety Extra Low Voltage. A circuit that is designed and protected in such a way that when under normal conditions just one error occurs the following can be ensured: The voltage between any two accessible parts, one of which can either be a grounded or a conductive accessible part, does not exceed the safety extra-low voltage and no overvoltage is produced that is greater than the safety extra-low voltage.
SGx
SG stands for safety group. Six safety groups (SG1 to SG6) can be encoded using the corresponding terminal module of the motor starters.
Standard motor starter

Standard motor starters have the following features: Device designations: DS, DS-x, DS1-x, RS, RS-x, RS1-x Usable up to 5.5 kW Installation widths: 45 mm for DS, DS-x, DS1-x 90 mm for RS, RS-x, RS1-x
U1
(PWR) supply voltage for electronics.
U2
(CON) supply voltage for contactor control.
Glossary-4
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Index
Numerics 2DI 1-7, 4-8 2DI COM 1-7, 4-11 2DI LC COM 1-7, 4-12 3-phase feed-in terminal
1-3
A Actual motor current 8-47 Aggregate current 6-16 Anti-blocking function 8-46 Assignment of the terminal modules Asymmetry 8-52 AUX1 Gl-1 AUX2 Gl-1 AUX3 Gl-1 Auxiliary switch block 10-22 B Behavior of the inputs 4-38 Blocking current 8-46 Blocking time 8-46 Brake control 11-5 Brake control module xB1, xB3 Brake control module xB2, xB4
6-2
Contents vii Control kit 1-5, 4-6 Control module 2DI 1-7, 4-8 Control module 2DI COM 1-7, 4-11 Control Module 2DI LC COM 1-7, 4-12 Control unit 1-5, 4-7 Cross-circuit-proof Gl-2 Current flow via the power bus 6-16 Current limit 8-51 Current limit violation 8-52 Current-carrying capacity 1-19, 6-14 Cyclic duration factor CD 8-36 Cyclic test of the F-CM 12-19 Cyclic test of the F-DS1e-x 8-15 Cyclic test of the F-RS1e-x 9-15 D Deinstalling motor starters 3-27 Derating 3-6 DI, input signal 4-36, 4-37 Diagnostic options 2-11 Diagnostics 4-19 Dimensional drawings B-1 DIN rail 1-2 Diodes 4-4 Direct soft starter, high feature 8-26 Direct starter Gl-2 Direct starter, high feature 8-11 DM-V15 1-2, 3-8, 11-10 DM-V15 spacing module 3-7 DO, output signal 4-36, 4-39 DS 1-4, 8-4 DS1e-x 1-6, 8-11 DS1-x 1-4, 8-4 DSS1e-x 1-6, 8-26 DS-x 1-4, 8-4
11-17 11-20
C Cap 3-31, 6-6, 6-7, 6-8, 6-10, 6-11, 6-12, 6-14, 6-15 Caps 1-3 Circuit breaker 8-9, 8-44, 9-9 Coasting down time 8-35 Coding 3-13, 3-17, 3-18, 3-25 Coding (SIGUARD) 10-15 Color coding labels 6-4, 10-4, 10-11, 12-5, 12-7 CON 7-2, 10-19, Gl-1 Configuration 4-13 Configuration options 1-13 Connection module PM-X 10-20 Contact carrier 10-21 Contact holder 10-21 Contact replicator F-CM 1-9, 12-16 Contactor 8-9, 8-24, 9-9, 9-24
Index-1
E Electrical connections 3-18, 3-25 Electrical isolation 4-4 Electrical service life 8-10, 8-25, 9-10, 9-25 EMC suppressor circuit 8-2, 9-2, 10-25, 12-23, C-2 Emergency start 8-55 Emergency stop circuit 10-22, 10-23 Enabling circuit Gl-2 Environmental conditions 5-2 ET 200S DS1e-x high feature direct starter 1-6 ET 200S DSS1e-x high feature direct soft starter 1-6 ET 200S fail-safe direct starter F-DS1e-x 1-8, 8-11 ET 200S fail-safe reversing starter F-RS1e-x 1-8, 9-11 ET 200S high feature DS1e-x direct starter 8-11 ET 200S high feature DSS1e-x direct soft starter 8-31 ET 200S high feature reversing starter RS1e-x 9-11 ET 200S manuals 1-20 ET 200S RS, RS-x, RS1-x, standard reversing starters 9-4 ET 200S RS1e-x high feature reversing starter 1-6 ET 200S standard direct starters DS, DS-x, DS1-x 1-4 ET 200S standard DS, DS-x and DS1-x direct starters 8-4 ET 200S standard reversing starters RS, RS-x, RS1-x 1-4 External short-circuit protection 4-3 Externally powered brake xB1, xB3 11-17 F F systems Gl-2 Factory setting 8-56 Fail-safe direct starter 1-8, 8-11 Fail-safe kit (F-kit) 10-21 Fail-safe kit 1 1-11, 10-22 Fail-safe kit 2 1-11, 10-23 Fail-safe modules 12-1, Gl-2 Fail-safe motor starters Gl-2 Fail-safe reversing starter 1-8, 9-11 Fail-safe systems Gl-2 FB125 4-19 FC125 4-19 F-CM 1-9, 12-16 F-CM module replacement 12-20
F-DS1e-x 1-8, 8-11 Feedback loop 10-21, 10-22, 10-23, Gl-3 Feed-in terminal 1-3 Figures xiv Frequency converter 1-12, 1-21, A-10 F-RS1e-x 1-8, 9-11 G General warning 4-37 Group error 4-22, 4-37 H Help 2-13 High feature direct soft starter 1-6 High feature direct starters 1-6 HW Config 2-12 I Identifying the modules 3-13, 10-15 Idle time 8-50 IM 151 1-2 Infeed contactor 1-11, 10-2 Input signal DI 4-36, 4-37, 4-40 Inserting power modules 3-17 Installation measurements and clearances 3-5 Installation position 3-4 Installation rules 3-3 Installing an ET 200S with motor starters 3-3 Installing brake control module 11-24 Installing motor starters 3-18, 3-25 Installing terminal modules 3-13 Interface module IM 151 1-2 Internally powered brake xB2, xB4 11-20 J Jumper module L1/L2/L3 1-3 Jumper module PE/N 1-7 L Labeling strips 3-13, 10-15 Latched positions 3-18, 3-25 Load group 1-17, 6-16, Gl-3 LOGO! PC cable 4-11
Index-2
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
M Main circuit 8-8, 8-23, 8-43, 9-8, 9-23 Manual operation local 4-12, 4-37, 8-12, 8-31, 8-54, 9-12 Manuals 1-20 Maximum current-carrying capacity 1-19 Module replacement of the F-DS1e-x 8-19 Module replacement of the F-RS1e-x 9-19 Monitored start Gl-3 Monitoring 4-19 Motor connection 6-14 Motor current 4-37 Motor starters 8-1, 9-1 N Number of modules 3-3
Power/expansion module PM-D F X1 1-9, 12-9 Preventing unauthorized persons from switching on 4-5 Process image 4-36 PROFIBUS-DP 4-19 Protection against dirt 3-31 Protective circuit 8-2, 9-2, 10-25, 12-23, C-2 PWR 7-2, 10-19, 12-22, Gl-4 R Rails 3-4 Ramp time 8-35 Rated operational current 8-48 Recovery time 8-45 Reduction in starting current 8-27 Reductions 8-38 Redundancy Gl-4 Removal of motor starters 3-18, 3-25 Removing motor starters 3-20 Residual current detection 8-52 Reversing starter, high feature 1-6, 9-11 Reversing starter, standard 9-4 Reversing starters 4-4, Gl-4 RS 1-4, 9-4 RS1e-x 1-6, 9-11 RS1-x 1-4, 9-4 RS-x 1-4, 9-4 Rules for laying cables 12-12 S Safety regulations 12-12 Safety relay 4-24, 4-25, 4-26, 4-27, 4-28, 4-30 Self-test 8-16, 9-16 SELV Gl-4 Set current Ie 4-2 Settings 8-34 SGx Gl-4 Shipping conditions 5-1 Short-circuit protection 8-45 Short-circuit tripping 4-4 SIRIUS switchgear 8-4, 8-11, 8-31, 9-4, 9-11 Soft rundown function 8-34 Soft starter 8-28, 8-44 Soft starting function 8-34 Spacing module 1-2, 3-6, 11-10 Specifying the safety group 3-24 Standard direct starters 1-4, 8-4 Standard reversing starter 1-4 Standards for safety systems 10-19, 12-15, 12-22
O Operating position 3-19, 3-26 Output signal DO 4-36, 4-39 Overload tripping 4-4 Overload tripping test 4-3 P Parameter length 1-18 Parameters of the soft starters 8-41 Parked position 3-19, 3-26 PC interface 4-11 PE/N jumper module 1-3 PE/N terminal block 6-15 PELV Gl-3 Phase firing 8-28 PM-D 1-2, 7-1 PM-D F PROFIsafe 1-9 PM-D F X1 1-9, 12-9 PM-D F X1 module replacement 12-13 PM-D F1 to 5 1-10, 10-4, 10-13 PM-D F1 to 5 power modules 10-13 PM-D F1, F2 10-16 PM-D F3, F4 10-17 PM-D F5 10-18 PM-X 1-10, 10-4, 10-20 Potential group 1-17, 10-5, Gl-3 Potential subgroup 10-5, Gl-3 Potentiometers 8-39 Power bus 6-14 Power bus infeed 6-6, 6-7, 6-8, 6-10, 6-11, 6-12, 6-14 Power bus throughfeed 6-6, 6-7, 6-8, 6-10, 6-11, 6-12, 6-14 Power module PM-D 7-1 Power module PM-D F PROFIsafe 1-9
Index-3
Star starting 8-27 Start Time 8-35 Start Voltage 8-35 Starting current 8-26 Starting current protection 8-45 Starting current, reducing 8-27 Starting time 8-40 Starting torque 8-38 Starting voltage 8-35, 8-38 Station width 3-3 Stop time 8-35 Storage conditions 5-1 Storage temperature 5-1 Switch ES Motor Starter 4-11, 4-41 Switch-over interval 9-4 T Tables xviii Terminal block 1-5, 6-14 Terminal modules 6-1 Terminating cover for control bus 1-3, 3-31 Terminating module 1-3, 3-31 Thermal motor mode 8-48 Three-phase current - asynchronous motors 8-26 Time ramp 8-35 TM-DS45 1-4, 6-3, 6-6 TM-DS65 1-6, 6-3, 6-7 TM-FCM30 1-9, 6-3 TM-FCM30 S47 12-4 TM-FDS65 1-8, 6-3, 6-8 TM-FRS130 1-8, 6-3, 6-12 TM-P15 1-2, 6-2, 6-4 TM-PF30 1-10, 6-2, 10-4, 10-7 TM-PFX30 6-3, 12-5, 12-7 TM-PFX30 S47 12-4 TM-RS130 1-6, 6-3, 6-11 TM-RS90 1-4, 6-3, 6-10 TM-X15 1-10, 6-2, 10-4 TM-xB15 1-12, 11-3 TM-xB215 1-12, 11-3 Trip Reset 4-22, 8-48, 8-55 Tripping class 8-49 U U1 7-2, 10-19, 12-22, Gl-4 U2 7-2, 10-19, Gl-4 User program 4-19 V Version 4-38 Voltage tolerance for contactor supply 4-2
X xB1 11-17 xB1 to 4 1-12, 11-4 xB2 11-20 xB3 11-17 xB4 11-20 Z Zener diodes 4-4
Index-4
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
Sender (please complete) Name
To Siemens AG A&D CD MM 3
Company / Office
Address
92220 Amberg
Phone
Fax: + 49 9621 / 80-3337
Fax
SIMATIC - ET 200S with motor starters and safety integrated SIGUARD system manual
Have you come across any errors in this manual? Please describe the errors on this form. We will be very grateful to you for any ideas and suggestions for improvements.
GWA-4NEB950007202-09
GWA-4NEB950007202-09

ET 200S Fail-Safe Motor Starters

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ET 200S Fail-Safe Motor Starters

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

ET 200S Fail-Safe Motor Starters

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Important information, Contents Product overview Brief instructions Installation

This document is part of the documentation package 6ES7151-1AA10-8BA0

Applications Glossary, Index

Purpose of the manual

This manual is an addition to the following manuals:

SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-09

Documentation packets and manuals

ET 200S Positioning 6ES7151-1AD00-8xA0 1)

Parameter list Function charts Alarm, error messages

Automation systems S7-300, Operations list 6ES7398-8AA10-8xN0 1)

SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-09

SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-09

Standards, certificates and approvals

SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-09

Position in the information landscape

Aids to accessing information

Constantly updated information

SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-09

SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-09

SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-09

SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters

SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-09

Safety integrated SIGUARD system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters

SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-09

B.2.3 B.3 B.4 B.4.1

B-7 B-8 B-8 B-9 B-9

SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters

SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-09

SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters

SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-09

SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters

12-34 12-36 12-38 12-40 A-3 C-2 C-4 C-6

C-8 C-10 C-12 C-14 C-16

SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-09

SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters

SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-09

SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters

SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-09

SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters

SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-09

Component DIN rails

Interface module IM 151

Power module PM-D

Terminal modules TM-P15 S27-01

Spacing module DM-V15

Table 1-1: General components

SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters

Jumper module PE/N

3-phase feed-in terminal for S0

Table 1-1: (cont.) General components

SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-09

Component Standard direct starters DS (discontinued type) DS-x (discontinued type)

Terminal module TM-DS45

Standard reversing starter RS (discontinued type)

RS-x (discontinued type)

Terminal module TM-RS90

SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters

Control unit for ET 200S

SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters GWA-4NEB950007202-09